Home

Designer 11.00

1. e Either clicking on it or using the Line Number control then clicking Remove Line e Either clicking on it or using the Line Number control then using the Delete key on your keyboard e Dragging the line off the page Clicking the Remove Line button repeatedly will remove successively lower numbered lines Done When you have finished creating guide lines click Done to close the Guide Lines Editor The guide lines you defined will appear in the Page View canvas as solid yellow lines whenever the Show Extras option in the View pull down menu is on The lines do not appear in playback Guide line settings can be retained for future use by clicking Save Element and Page Defaults in the Tools pull down menu Snap To Guide Lines Using the Snap to Guide Lines Option works similarly to Snap to Grid With the element s selected choose the Snap to gt Guides from the View pull down menu When you move your elements on the canvas the edges will highlight the guide lines when you get near them Once the guide line is highlighted let go of the mouse and it will snap to that guide line Using the Help Menu in Page View File Edt Add Vew Teol Help ra gt a as Add A Cut Dapy Faite Scala Script Text Style Tags About Scala Designer Designer has help both in product and on line documentation The Help Menu enables quick access to Help Scala Script Text Style Tags About Scala Designer Help Provides assist
2. A Soia wall iiaia Stoke Di ni Pa Tokai oldar To conbrue cick Mest IF you woud ke to aed a deent fider dick Dow tket 55 948 of Te k e amp required son Crn Let 7 Select Components Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 11 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Bhd connects ahok be ts Lalli SMect the components vou want bo insta dear tee components pou do not wart to inch Chick Mert when you are ready in ontcue F imaga Ties LE vdeo Ses iyl 153 Caigie sormen andsa Curent ssiection requires at besst 1 52L LEI of disk oaee xo Gre comet 8 Select Clipart Location http docs scala com display D1100 This choice depends on personal preference where the Scala clipart should be installed A shortcut to this location will be installed in you re My Documents folder so you can find it later Make a selection and click Next What Do These Options Mean e Program Files Clipart will be installed in C Program Files Scala Clipart Shared Documents Clipart will be installed in C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Scala Clipart This choice is recommended e Custom Folder You choose a folder select Clipart library Location har ld Pe Sool dipai lie y be raiak T naa i Progar Fibra Sec cube iper Install to Stared Documents cala rt T Install bo custom Pader 9 Python Scripting
3. Choose media from a previously used media folder Opens the Design List Panel and adds a line to select Timing Branch Sound Launch Log Schedule or WinScript Inserts an Text Element on your page This can be useful when you can not select an open spot on the canvas area especially if you have full screen elements on your page The text cursor will also appear Places an empty Text Box Element on your page Adds a Text Crawl Element which can be positioned and edited Inserts a Text Entry Field an interactive text element that can accept typed input from someone running the script and store the text ina variable Table of Text Boxes Opens the Design List panel Creates a Box Element that can be drawn out with the mouse Opens the Design List panel Creates an Oval Element inside a boundary box that can be drawn out with the mouse Opens the Design List panel Creates a diagonal Line inside a boundary box that can be drawn out with the mouse Adds a TV Clip that shows the display of an attached TV Tuner type video source as controlled by the TV Tuner Module Dialog that requests input of the Streaming Video Clip URL Dialog that requests input of the Web Clip URL Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 137 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The View menu has a number of functions available to assist t
4. Integer Min Integer Nl Integer N2 Returns the smaller of N1 and N2 In other words if N1 gt N2 it returns N2 else it returns N1 Min Function syntax Max Integer Max Integer N1 Integer N1 Returns the larger of N1 and N2 In other words if N1 gt N2 it returns N1 else it returns N2 Max Function syntax Abs Integer Abs Integer N Returns the absolute value of N In other words if N lt 0 it returns N else it returns N Abs Function syntax Sign Integer Sign Integer N If N lt O return 1 else if N gt 0 return 1 else return 0 Sign Function syntax Random Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 192 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Integer Random Integer Min Integer Max Returns a random number in the range Min Max Random Function syntax Seed Boolean Seed Integer N Seed the random number generator N can be any number The function returns True always Seed Function syntax Sqrt Real sqrt Real X Returns the square root of X Sqrt Function syntax Bezier Real Bezier Real PO Real Pl Real P2 Real P3 Real Time Bezier Function syntax Cos Real Cos Real X Returns the cosine of X where X is in radians Cos Function syntax Sin Real Sin Real X Returns the sine of X where Xis in radians Si
5. This command must be used in the group list of a block Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 180 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Group If condition Group Else Else Command syntax Elself Boolean expr Causes the block to execute conditionally if the preceding If Elself returned False and if Boolean expr evaluates to True This command must be used in the group list of a block Group if condition Group ElseIf other_condition Elself Command syntax Looping While Boolean expr Used to cause repetitive execution of the current block while Boolean expr evaluates to True The condition is evaluated and tested before the block runs so the block may not execute at all This command must be used in the group list of a block Group If condition Group Else sequence While Command syntax Until Boolean expr Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 181 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Used to cause repetitive execution of the current block until Boolean expr evaluates to True The condition is evaluated and tested after the block runs so the block will always execute at least once This command must be used in the group list of a block Group Until co
6. VCs thumbnad long Ce mediaintosxml 51D 364 mumechumbs errormns If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg Else MsgBox Generated amp numthumbs amp thumbnail s End If Set obj Nothing Older Methods The newer more general methods GenerateThumbnail2 and GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 have replaced the older GenerateThumbnail and GeneratePreviewThumbnails methods but the older methods are still available and continue to work GenerateThumbnail Method The GenerateThumbnail method can be used to create a thumbnail image from a ScalaScript Publisher Generate Thumbnail scriptfilename As String pagename As String thumbnailfilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_errormsg As Variant scriptfilename Full path to the source script file pagename Name of the page to generate if omitted the first page is used thumbnailfilename Full path to desired image file The file name may end in the extension jpg jpeg png or gif width Thumbnail width in pixels height Thumbnail height in pixels options String that can optionally contain one of these flags e rl Rotate 90 degrees left e rr Rotate 90 degrees right e ru Rotate 180 degrees upside down e k Keep aspect e out_errormsg Error message returned by GenerateThumbnail Note that errors such as missing files may be reported even in cases where the call succeeds In such cases the imagery for
7. Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 102 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings ce E a m e E LPE T oe F lki ihLAFI TaT Pet ET m Design TV Clip Panel The Design TV Clip Panel which is only present if the TV Module has been configured in the Designer Options is shown when a TV Clip Element is selected in Page View It allows you to e Adjust Size and cropping areas e Apply Opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element e Set In and Out transitions for the element volume for the elements sound and the device and channel The Design TV Clip Panel is accessed by Adding a new TV Clip element selecting a TV Clip element on the page you want to change selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View when in list view and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design TV Clip Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page 1s i napper m rpe e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscella
8. Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 71 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Nothing will prevent you from creating multiple entry schedules which can cause an event to always or never run or which can make interrupt scheduled events interrupt each other You must keep track of the cumulative effect of the entries It is often easier to create your schedules within the Schedule interface in Content Manager The following choices are available from the drop down menu Option Entry Number Add Entry Remove Entry Remove All View Schedules Event Sets the type of scheduling for this event using the drop menu e Dates are in mm dd yy format e Time is in 24hr or military time Format HH mm ss Option Is Enabled within Period Daily in Time Daily Out Time Is Disabled within Period Daily in Time Daily Out Time Interrupts Exactly Leave Bookmark Explanation Selects the scheduled entry to display and or edit Creates additional schedule entries for this event For example to schedule an event to run from 1 2 pm on Wednesdays and 2 4 pm on Thursdays requires two schedule entries Removes an entry from the schedule Removes all scheduled entries from this event so that it is unscheduled Switches the Schedule panel to an entry view mode in which you can look at a summary of all th
9. Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Quick way to isolate only the selected element s on the screen Unhide All Elements Make all hidden elements visible regardless if they were selected You can also access the Hide Unhide All features from the context menu using the secondary Right mouse button on a selected element or by using the hotkey Ctrl N Elements will remain hidden until you complete editing them and exit from the page To permanently hide elements from playback use the Enable Disable feature from the Element Control Panel Hide Show Global Elements This toggle option hides shows any elements that are globally viable on all pages of this script Elements that are hidden are still in the script and can be drag selected or selected in the List panel but cannot be selected by clicking on them When the page is crowded this option makes it easier to work with elements that are only on this page Hide Show Off page Elements This toggle option Hides Shows elements not within the page boundary Elements that break the boundary are cropped to the part visible within the page boundary When off page elements are hidden the Page View scroll bars are limited to the page itself Extras Grids and Guide Lines Used in conjunction with Show Extras this menu allows to to specify which of the Extras are shown Show Extras This toggle option allows you to show hide grids and guidelines that are fo
10. Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil Set the overall Opacity level Opacity gradient Type Animation Animation Backgrounds have both a Face layer upper and Backdrop layer lower e File Shows the current media asset being used and can be changed by clicking the name to bring up the file dialog Face An Animation Background can have options applied to the face by selecting the Face button Backdrop An Animation Background can have a Backdrop Fill Type options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Loops Specifies the number of times the Animation Background should loop during playback Speed Specifies the speed of playback Stop on First Specifies whether the Animation finishes on the last or first fame Changing the Face options Selecting the Face button opens up the Face options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Changing the Backdrop options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following Corner Styles Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil Set the overall Opacity level Opacity gradient Sets the number of times the Animation Background should play The default value is one 1 Speed Adjusts the update rate of the animated GIF file Lower numbers make the a
11. Go To Event Go To Event is the most flexible button branching action Consequently it requires you to specify both the destination itself and the level of the script where the destination exists You see the controls for these on the tab when you choose Action Go to Event Action Description Go To Selector to choose the page or event that you want the script to advance to when a button is selected In most cases Go To will be set to a page Use the selector to choose a page number A thumbnail of the destination page is shown in the box to the right of the button If you just want to advance to the immediately following or preceding page in the script it is simpler to use the Go to Next Page or Go to Previous Page actions Use Level Choose the level of the script where the destination is Use the selector to cycle through the levels If the destination is in the same group you are in you can leave the selector as is If your script has no groups the only choices are lt this script gt and lt this page gt Only levels at or above the current level are accessible Setting a Go To an event on the current page is also possible set the Level selector to lt this page gt then use the Go To selector to cycle through events on the page Leave Bookmark Allows you to return from a series of events after branching with a Go to Event Click on Leave Bookmark to turn it on Then at the end of the button s series of Go to events insert
12. Photo gt C images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt Wes Vehnumbnedl gong 512 3384 Tre umMbhumbs errors If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg Erse MsgBox Generated amp numthumbs amp thumbnail s End If Set obj Nothing Alternate Use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails Sometimes an alternate way of calling GeneratePreviewThumbnails can be useful Here you pass a root folder as the first argument and the x mltext additionally provides the path to the template ScalaScript and any media files in the ingredients can be specified with paths relative to the r ootfolder Publisher GeneratePreviewThumbnails rootfolder As String xmltext As String thumbnailfilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_numthumbs As Variant out_errormsg As Variant e rootfolder Full path to the template ScalaScript e xmitext An string of XML that defines the template script and the data field values to use The syntax is slightly different than above See below All other parameters are the same as above The xmitext string defines the script and its ingredients This string consists of a lt content gt XML element whose name attribute is the path to the script relative to rootfolder The lt content gt XML element contains an lt ingredients gt XML element containing one or more data field elements as above With this form the path in any lt filename gt
13. This can be skipped if it is already installed Click Next Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 12 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Fyt on Scriptie Piin ia a p eee aage for eb one nyaa h eaa Dejga anc Scale Player using che Windows Sopbng fescure De wou wish bo install Pethon 2 7 97 This 6 the recommended version to install unless poy need to msih an ciie serao siresc cepoyed nm your nebek 2 retal Python 2 7 9 fecomnencec 1 ratal Pythen 2 6 6 D Do not inetall Python T customi installation of amp ython destinsdon folder etc 10 ScalaScript Export Plug in for Adobe Photoshop Un check the option and click Next The G a flag in for Adobe Phabian that dowd ea 12 tipai a Meissen daumen a5 waait Th plug in for Adobe Prakoshes lets wou eet your Photoshop cecument so 3 tabni and greseeyer the neredual chee and byer se ecesble deren tech ae Onis mth eea in Sook Degne F Install Sralatoopt Eeport plugan for Adobe Photoshop 54 a Shaw fee ja dian he ScalaSagl Epir l phos for Ae Pie borage 32a 11 Microsoft Internet Connection Firewall Keep the option selected to allow network connections for Designer Click Next Microtort Internet Connection Firewall For Soma Designer bo operate the Hre lviemet Connection Arevvall reeds to be told to slys ebaerk mmeo to the spokcston 12 Ready to Install Click
14. e d make the Box double its current width and height Add a Oval Element Ovals and Circles can be created using the Oval Element which is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background To create an Oval 1 Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add Oval option 2 The Design Oval Panel appears and the mouse pointer will turn into a cross hair 3 Move the pointer to where you want one corner of the bounding box in which the oval will be drawn then press and hold the left main mouse button 4 Move the pointer to the position of the diagonally opposite corner and release the mouse button to complete the oval While drawing you can hold down the the following keys to draw e SHIFT a perfect circle from the first corner in any direction e CTRL from the center of the Oval with the center being the original position e SHIFT CTRL a perfect circle from the center of the Oval with the center being the original position Graphic handles will appear around the resulting bounding box of the oval indicating it is selected allowing you to change its shape General Visual Manipulation Moving the Oval e With the Box Element selected simply drag the Box to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHI
15. All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 222 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ontent IntegrateContentLocally places the file there in a manner that prevents access collisions with the Scala script which may simultaneously be using the file Some examples where IntegrateContentLocally may be useful include e Load an XML file used by Data Source Module to be replaced at the local player e g prices for a menu board e Read XML over the web convert it to text and place it where TextFile Module can access it e Fetch the current weather map as a JPEG file from a web server every five minutes e Generate a BMP image that is a graph of current production rates The IntegrateContentLocally method cooperates with Player so that even if Player is currently reading a file you can install a new version of that file that will be used the next time player needs that file If you are part way done installing a file when Player needs it Player gets the most recent fully installed copy This COM interface is installed as part of the Scala Player installation and is available when the Transmission Client is running To use this method you first must instantiate the Scala InfoNetwork interface Set obj CreateObject Scala InfoNetwork Install External Content Files In a typical example your external code would generate the file in question or download it and p
16. Duration 0 0 05 0 gt P Loops 4r Separator I Clear Bind lt None gt Y Image Initially a text Crawl will source the text as an Expression with the word Crawl as its Expression Text Text Source There four sources that can be used with a Text Crawl once the Source is selected other fields appear for further definition e File Contained in a text file e Text File Use the file dialog to specify the Text File e Expression Contained in an expression e Text Enter an expression which can be a literal text string enclosed in double quotes or can involve variables functions and operators e CuedExpression Contained in an expression which can be that can be signaled cued by another program to display updated text content e Text Enter an expression which can be a literal text string enclosed in double quotes or can involve variables functions and operator e Cue Variable possibly from an external source during playback A cue variable is used to signal when updated text is available e Endless You also must specify whether the source is an endless stream such as a stock price ticker or is terminated e Variable Contained in a text variable or a text variable array e Text Enter an expression which can be a literal text string enclosed in double quotes or can involve variables functions and operators When a text array is selected then all entries in the array will be used Style Contr
17. If the scripts that you will be creating or using do not contain Launch events select this choice No Warning When Opening Disables Launch event warnings This can be convenient for those who often work with scripts that contain Launch events and prefer to avoid the dialogs If you select this choice you should be careful when opening scripts from sources you do not trust Schedule Module This provides options that specify the configuration of the Schedule Module and how the UI displays scheduling First Day of the Week The two choices for this option are for the First Day of the Week select Sunday or Monday Changes in these settings take effect when Scala Designer is restarted It is important to note the the players schedule matches this setting Week Numbers are used for scheduling as the the Start of the week can vary by a day Using the Help menu in Main View Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 60 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Fi Scala Designer Getting Started Guide Scala Designer Uber Guide Sala Script Tet Style Tags Scala on the Web Designer has help both in product and on line documentation The Help Menu enables quick access to Function Explanation Help Assistance for various user interface elements scala Designer Getting Started Guide Opens the online Getting Started guide Scala Designe
18. In addition to using Gap an image separator can be inserted between crawls The Image will have the Gap either side of it Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 115 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Click the Separator button and select a image file using the file dialog e Clear Clears the Image Separator e Bind Specify a variable that contains the Separator Image Image Controls the scaling and positioning of separator images in text crawl elements based on the metrics of the current font e Range can be set to Cap Height Ascender Height or Cell Height e Can be aligned with the Top Middle or Bottom of that range A separator image that is larger than the specified range will be scaled smaller to fit the range while one that is smaller than the specified range will not be scaled but will be positioned within that range based on the current image alignment Loops Lets you specify the number of times that the entire crawl text moves through the crawl element box The default infinity setting causes the crawl text to continue to repeat without stopping Wait Controls the progress of the script e When on it prevents the script from advancing to the next event in the page s sequence until the current text crawl finishes e When off it allows the next event to begin as soon as the text crawl has started Tab Fie
19. Oft gt lt shadowcolor rrggbb gt lt shadowoffset numpixels_horizontal numpixels_vertical gt lt shadowsoftness value gt lt shadowopacity percent gt lt kerning None Alpha AlphaNum gt lt leading numpixels gt lt spacing value gt lt imagevar variable or array entry gt lt imagepath path to image file gt lt imagerange CapHeight AscenderHeight CellHeight gt Top Middle Bottom gt lt imagealign lt opacity percent gt lt extragap numpixels gt Most of the above are self explanatory Documentation is available from within Designer via the Help gt Text Style Tags pull down menu Here are a few additional notes e In ScalaScript expressions the quotation mark always needs to be escaped with a caret Although you can directly type the following as a text element in Designer hello lt bold On gt world lt bold Off gt if using a ScalaScript variable the equivalent would be var hello lt bold On gt world lt bold Off gt Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 216 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The Text Expression button on the Crawl Control Tab of the Design Text Crawl Panel expects an expression as its name suggests You would type hello lt bold On gt world lt bold Off gt e The lt face gt and lt front
20. Process Element Position lt 1 231 gt Locked Element Size Size aA 490x367 gt Scaling Fit Inside Preserve Aspect Ratio Y Element Level lt OF Crop Position lt 0 0 P Size lt 4 1280x768 Flip X Flip Y Rotate Angle lt o Element Position This is normally defined by the number of pixels in the x and y direction relative to the origin which is the top left of the page 0 0 It can can be modified by entering in the exact coordinates or by using the numeric controls Also it may be bound to variables by clicking the right mouse button on a numeric control then choosing Bind to Data Element Size When this button is On it enables the Element Size value control and when Off the element is reverted to its original size The perimeter of the area defined by the size of the element is often referred to as the bounding box Size Sets the width and height of an element in pixels The element will be stretched or squeezed to fit the new dimensions It can be modified by entering the width and height or you can use the numeric controls It may be bound to variables by clicking the right mouse button on a numeric control then choosing Bind to Data This button is automatically enabled if you have re sized the element using graphical controls Cell Size Sets the width and height of the cell in pixels The cell will be stretched or squeezed to fit the new dimensions and it can be modified
21. The integer value is written as a complete line with CR LF appended Writelnt Function syntax WriteStr Boolean WriteStr Integer filehandle String value Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 202 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Writes a string to an open file The string is written as a complete line with CR LF appended WriteStr Function syntax Media Functions Movie Duration Integer Movie Duration String filename Returns the duration of a specified movie in milliseconds or zero if the duration cannot be determined Movie Duration Function syntax TargetAspectRatio Real TargetAspectRatio String targetname Gets the aspect ratio of a target such as a page Frame VirtualMonitor or Monitor TargetAspectRatio Function syntax TargetWidth Real TargetWidth String targetname Gets the width of a target such as a page Frame VirtualMonitor or Monitor TargetWidth Function syntax TargetHeight Real TargetHeight String targetname Gets the height of a target such as a page Frame VirtualMonitor or Monitor TargetHeight Function syntax Serial Module Functions Serial Open Opens the specified serial port with optional serial data parameters such as baud rate parity etc Serial Open Function syntax Serial Close Closes the specified serial port
22. and playback will automatically recognize the Intel 945 chipset and enable this workaround In some preliminary tests this workaround has also shown a performance improvement to movie playback on multiple display players If you enable this workaround you should probably also disable MM3D_UseBackBufferLockKludge as it will likely interfere with the MM3D_EnsureV BlankDuringPresentKludge workaround To enable this workaround use MM3D_EnsureVBlankDuringPresentKludge 1 MM3D_UseBackBufferLockKludge This enables a workaround for device drivers that consume a large amount of CPU waiting for vertical blank Most Direct3D devices apart from those from nVidia and ATi require this workaround Playback detects those devices and will enable this workaround as necessary You can override that behavior with this setting Note that the Intel 945 does not require this workaround other Intel devices 845 865 915 946 965 currently require this workaround To enable this workaround use MM3D_UseBackBufferLockKludge 1 To disable this workaround use MM3D_UseBackBufferLockkKludge 0 Due to a driver bug on certain ATl based systems some wide text elements or crawl segments could end up displayed as a white rectangle There is now a workaround that can be enabled by setting MM3D_UseATIOddTextureSizekludge 1 in your MMOS INI file Video playback of H 264 MPEG 2 MPEG 1 and WMV VC 1 as well as most audio playback is now based on the FFM
23. if for example you want the image to be a pointing finger instead of the standard arrow When you click on Pointer Image you see the File dialog open and you can and choose any clip to use as a pointer image Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 68 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Busy Pointer Image Change the image of the busy pointer which appears on the screen when the script is busy and temporarily cannot accept input By default there is no busy pointer Click this button and in the File dialog choose a new image Tab Slideshow Controls The Slideshow Controls tab lets you choose how you want your script to advance when you are working with a slideshow style production Slides how Controls ONLY work when playing back your script in Designer They do not work if you publish your script to the Network and schedule that script to play on a player Mouse Buttons This controls whether the mouse buttons by themselves control the advance to another page Pressing the main mouse button moves forward in the script and the secondary mouse button moves back It is on by default On any page with buttons the button selection function of the mouse buttons takes precedence over the page advance function regardless of the setting of the Mouse Buttons option Keyboard Page Up Down This controls whether the keyboard can ad
24. scale transitions and effects that were applied to the placeholder You cannot use a still image clip as a template placeholder and later select a video clip to replace it in Content Manager You must keep the same type of clip used in your template as you will use from your media folder items If you need the option of still and video you will have to make two separate template scripts or use Scala script programming to handle the choice of file format Binding a Text Crawl a Data Field The Text Crawl element has two options for templates depending on the Text Source Text Source Expression When binding a Text Crawl Expression to a data field you can only bind the complete text 1 Right click on a Text Crawl and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Text Source File When binding a Text Crawl File to a data field you are actually binding the file name of the Text File that is being assigned the data field 1 With the Text Crawl selected use the Edit menu and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 146 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Binding a Sound file to a Data Field Binding a Sound file to a data field can be done from the Sound panel Click on the Sound Column in the row of the eleme
25. you may need to create the MMOS INI file ina regular folder then use Windows Explorer to drag it over to the correct destination inside Program Files MMOS INI Options Applying to All Scala Products WIN32_RootDataFolder Control the location of all Scala config files logs settings temporary files etc WIN32_RootDataFolder path When set Scala data that is normally stored under the Windows standard configuration areas is stored instead under the specified path Also the Scala temporary folder appears under the specified path Most of the locations where Scala reads and writes files can be controlled This is the simplest way to move the locations where such files are stored There are additional MMOS INI keywords to move specific folders such as the Content andLocallylIntegratedContent folder but it is often better to move them all with this one keyword You can install the products specifying RootDataFolder path on its command line and Setup will set WIN32_RootDataFolder correctly creating anMMOS INI file if necessary otherwise modifying the existing one Content Manager installer supports RootDataFolder path on its command line This sets WIN32_RootDataFolder for Content Manager itself as well as for the Transmission Server and Server Support components In those components the installer also sets WIN32_CommonProductR ootDataFolder so those components can locate Content Manager s location where needed i Note For Cont
26. 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging on the clip s bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the clip to its original size A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are h make the clip half its current width and height e d make the clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the clip without having to resort to editing in a external paint package e Use ALT to drag a handle on the side or corner of the clip until the edge s enclose only the portion of the clip you want to keep e Use ALT to drag the clip itself to re position the cropped area seen The cropped area can also be
27. 2 lt top element 2 gt lt main contains zero or more repeating items where the item node can have any name gt lt item gt lt item node contains one or more elements with Simple values gt lt item element 1 gt item value Al lt item element 1 gt lt item element 2 gt item value A2 lt item element 2 gt lt item gt lt item gt lt Successive item nodes would typically have the same elements with new values gt lt item element 1 gt item value Bl lt item element 1 gt lt item element 2 gt item value B2 lt item element 2 gt lt item gt lt main gt An additional supported variant is that the main node can itself be inside a root node This is how RSS is structured for example Non supported XML Features Among the XML features not currently supported by the Data Source module include e XML attributes this is supported in hand scripted ScalaScript e Additional sub elements e Other more complex structures e g deeper trees e More than one group of repeating item nodes It will be the job of the Fetcher to present a Local XML File where any additional complexity in the Original Feed has been mapped down to a valid Local XML File Fetcher Requirements Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 219 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Currently when usin
28. Any shared variables that are changed by the Windows script will be reflected live in the ScalaScript Both the Windows script and the ScalaScript can periodically check for a change in the value of a shared variable then sleep for a fraction of a second The TextCrawl and GlobalTextCrawl elements support a cued expression with a cue control variable The Windows script side uses polling synchronization but the ScalaScript side uses the cue control variable to coordinate the feeding of new text from the Windows script into the crawl Page 212 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Notification Triggering In ScalaScript the OnNotification command lets you monitor a shared variable and trigger a Goto or Use when that variable changes The ScalaPlayer Interface The ScalaPlayer interface is available during any Scala playback which includes ScalaScript playback from within the Scala Player product and the Scala Designer product Its interface is the basic support interface exposed to a Windows script when run from the Windows Scripting Module To create a handle to this interface do as follows Dim oScala Set oScala CreateObject ScalaPlayer ScalaPlayer 1 The ScalaPlayer interface supports the following methods Sleep Method The Sleep method causes the script to sleep for the specified number of milliseconds It internally knows how to abort when playback of the script needs to be abort
29. Bookmark option This allows you to set a marker to which a later event can return In this way you can define sections of a script as independent units that you can go to and return from at any point in the script Exit from a Script Although most productions are designed to run continuously some need to be able to exit from playback This ends the script returning the viewer either to Windows or to the Main menu if the script was run from within Designer Show WWW Page i This Option has been superceeded Show WW Page has been superseded by using a Adding a Web Clip Page and is the preferred method for displaying a web page The option remains for legacy purposes only Show WWW Page allows the viewer to jump out of the playback environment You see the URL text box when Show WWW Page is selected Enter the address of the desired Web page there for example enter http www scala com to jump to Scala s Web page and Designer attempts to launch or activate the preferred Web browser If successful it then tries to connect to the Web page specified If playback is setup to run full screen playback is minimized so that the Web browser window is visible on the desktop Data Source The Data Source Module allows a simply formatted Local XML File to be opened You are also able to view the various XML elements and decide which of these can be connected to data fields such as ScalaScript variables and arrays These can then be bound to S
30. Done The grid settings apply to every page in every open script however they will only have an effect while you are editing a page They can be retained for future use by clicking Save Element and Page Defaults from the Tools pull down menu and are not saved with scripts Using the Grid The grid can be used purely as a visual aid or can assist alignment if the Snap option is set you can easily position elements to consistently line up on the page i Snap To When Snap is enabled it will use grid and guides depending on the setting of Snap To in the View Menu When turned on this option will allow elements to be specifically positioned at grid points When you drag with the grid on the horizontal and vertical leading edges of the elements will show a visible yellow line where they can snap into the possible positions defined by the horizontal and vertical grid size values However if you quit dragging in between two grid points the element will not automatically jump to the snap position Using Guide Lines Guide Lines are another useful layout and alignment aid for the Designer But unlike grid points they are not defined by default Guides are horizontal and vertical lines which extend across the entire page canvas They are visible only in the Page View when the Show Extras option is turned on They need to be checked in the Extras Option They are not viewable when you preview or play a script and can be created or posit
31. Function syntax Formatting Functions Format String Format String FormatStr Integer Value Apply the specified format string to the given integer value and return the result as a string For example my_str Format O 0 123400 Will return the string 00123 400 Format Function syntax FormatReal String FormatReal String FormatStr Real Value Apply the specified format string to the given real value and return the result as a string FormatReal Function syntax Format String Syntax The bang expansion syntax in strings allows for formatting information to be presented for integer expressions The formatting information is presented as a format string within the parentheses along with the expression to be expanded The formatting allows for fixed width fields leading plus or minus signs and leading or trailing zeroes For example This is a test my_var of a format string This will build a string representation of an integer variable based on information in the format string The Format function may also be used to format integer values Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 190 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 str var Format int_var Format strings may be constructed as follows HHH will print an integer 4 digits wide 12345 too wide gr
32. Page View You will see a small overlay indicating the level for any selected element that is not on level zero 0 The Element Level can also be set in the List View of a Page and may be bound to a variable by clicking the right mouse button on the numeric control then choosing Bind to Data Rotate Displays the rotation angle of the element You can adjust the angle using the numeric field or the up down controls in either single 1 or ninety 90 degree increments depending on the element type Tab Misc The Misc miscellaneous Tab enables you to Set the Global status of the element Set Page Margins Control how on screen variables are updated Control the advanced scripting behavior for replaying an element i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Text x Appearance Position Misc Global _ Left Page Margin lt 4 10D Right Page Margin 10 gt On Replay Replace Top Page Margin i lt o gt Bottom Page Margin lt om Update Extended Global When Global is Off default the element appears only on that page When it is On the element shows on all pages of the script without being affected by page transitions Global Elements cannot have an In or Out transition nor can they be aligned relative to the page If transi
33. Player or Scala Android Player Integrating with Windows Host Scripting WHS Languages A ScalaScript can invoke other scripts usually Python or VBScript Various topics are documented at Windows Scripting Introduction including Sharing ScalaScript variables or arrays with Python or VBScript variables or arrays Methods to let the script sleep Methods to write messages to the Scala log Methods to report custom errors back to Content Manager Functions to manage access to Scala media files that take care of file revision and locking issuesMethods that let a Python or VBScript or other external process download or create media files and integrate them locally to the player in a way that takes care of file revision and locking issues Additional Windows Scripting integration notes can be found here A username and password is required to access this page Accessing Player Variables and Metadata This page contains information on various ways to access player variables and metadata Scripting and Automation Scala Developer Wiki Scala now offers an online information resource for partners and customers who wish to develop solutions around Scala products at the Scala Developer Wiki Registration is required Web Services for Content Manager Scala Enterprise Content Manager now supports a rich set of web services so that other applications can interface with it Documentation is provided on the Scala Developer Wiki Regi
34. String listing successfully publish scripts one name per line out_failedscripts String listing all scripts that failed to publish one name per line out_allerrors String listing all errors encountered in this publish operation CheckPublish synchronously requests progress information on a publish operation in progress It may be called repeatedly to request information on a handle returned from GoPublish A publish operation has ended whenout_currentscriptnum gt out_numberofscripts An example VBScript might look like this Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 229 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Dim obj handle Set obj CreateObject Scala Publisher Ob 7 GoPubliash er MylstScript sc a a VDL amp er MyZndScript sca http username password servername 8080 ContentManager network MET LOG CRE Ny EMS Handie This example shows progress ten times using MsgBox User must hit OK each time Dim i numscripts curscriptnum curscriptname percentdone totpercentdone completedscripts failedscripts allerrors i 0 Do While 1 lt 10 i i 1 obj CheckPublish handle numscripts curscriptnum curscriptname _ percentdone totpercentdone completedscripts failedscripts allerrors Dim s Tf Gurseriptnum gt numscripts Then If failedscripts lt gt Then s Publishing finished with error
35. Supported Languages You can use any Windows Script Host compatible language including VBScript JScript and Python There are also Windows Script Host compatible versions of other languages including Perl Ruby TCL and REXX VBScript VBScript is a light scripting language that resembles Visual Basic See VBScript information on microsoft com It comes pre installed on Windows XP and newer systems JScript JScript is a light scripting language that resembles JavaScript See JScript information on Microsoft com Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 209 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 It comes pre installed on Windows XP and newer systems Python Python is a flexible scripting language with many extensions See www python org Scala Release 11 0 comes with an installer for Python 2 7 9 which includes the core Python distribution for that version and the following useful Python packages pip setuptools requests pyserial Pygments colorama httpie humanize bottle waitress virtualenv xird Pillow psycopg2 Plus the following Scala supplied scripts and packages See https developer scala com for full information scala5 ezxml scalalib scalalink scalaprov scalatools SCWS scws2 soaplib cm_upload packager player_report sca_publisher screencap Windows Scripting Examples Various examples
36. This option is on by default will place the name of your script without its file extension at the top of each page of your print job When this option is turned on you will see a representation of the title displayed at the top of the page preview When off the printed pages will not contain a heading Page Number This option enables or disables printing the print job s page number at the bottom of each page The page number represents the order of the pages as they are generated by the printer for the current print job and does not necessarily correspond to the numbering of pages in the script If this option is turned on you will see a Greek numbered representation 1 2 3 etc of the page number displayed at the bottom of the page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 47 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 preview For example suppose you select pages 1 3 and 5 from the Main View and set the matrix to 1 x 1 in ScalaPrint so each slide prints on one page You have defined a print job of 3 pages These pages if you turn on Page Number will be pages 1 2 and 3 of the print job The print job s page numbers do not correspond to the script s page numbers Frames You can choose to have a beveled frame similar to a picture frame placed around your slides If you turn this option on a predefined frame is placed
37. a new page and also assumes that a new page should have the same timing setting as the previously selected one Look at the Timing button to verify the setting To change the timing setting click on the Timing button for the desired page and open the Timing Panel When a thumbnail in the Main View represents a group of pages a script or a special event Designer automatically uses Wait For Elements as the timing setting indicating no delay between the current page and the following page If the thumbnail represents a group the timing setting for the last page in the group determines when the next page in the script is displayed Regardless of the timing setting the viewer of the script can always override the timing of a page by pressing the secondary mouse button to see the previous page or by pressing the main mouse button to see the following page Further details on Working with Script Timings are discussed here Variables The Variable column button allows access to the panel that defines variables and controls the flow of a script This panel makes it possible for you to produce sophisticated flexible scripts which can respond to a variety of inputs Clicking a button in the Variables column opens the Variable and Branching panel which consists of 4 tabs Condition Determines whether page will be played based on the Show If expression Set Variable Sets either the initial value for a new variable or the value of a variable for an
38. a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected then they move as a group and maintain their relative positions Cut Copy amp Paste A Text Element can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new text element is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new text element exactly in the same place as the original Additional Keyboard Shortcuts e r Rotates the text clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the text counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Importing Text Text can be imported from a ASCII text file by using the Add File dialo
39. a publish location and opens the Publish to Scala Enterprise Content Manager option Opens the Export Script as an HTML Slides dialog which exports the script to a Web server as a set of HTML pages that displays the script as a series of static images Viewing the script in this format requires only a web browser Collects the script and all its media Print the current script Opens a dialog allowing you to view and edit specific properties related to the current script Exits this session of Designer If there are any open scripts that are unsaved you will be prompted to do save them Additional Topics A more detailed discussion of script collection can be found at Collecting a Script Collecting a Script It is useful to be able to collect the final version of your script either for archival purposes or to send the script and the assets to another Designer Collecting a Scala Script will save a copy of your script and create a folder with the same name as the script containing all of its media files This script and the folder are separate copies of the script you are editing To collect a script 1 Load or Create a script 2 Select File from the drop down menu and choose Collect Files 3 Set the Collect For button to Authoring The Collecting For option affects which fonts can be embedded in the script Choosing Playba Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Pag
40. a special event On this special event open the Variables column and select the Go To tab Choose Action Return to Bookmark When executed this returns the script to the bookmark location which is immediately after the original Go to Event Using Go to Event with a bookmark lets you define sections of a script as independent units that you can go to and return from whenever a button is clicked Going to the Next Page A very common type of button activated branch is advancing to the next page in the presentation It does what its names implies advancing to the page that follows the current page on the Main Menu Going to the Previous Page A very common type of button activated branch is returning to the preceding page in the presentation It does what its names implies returning to the page that immediately precedes the current page on the Main Menu Returning to a Bookmark When using a Go to Event branch on a button or in the Branch menu you can choose to use the Leave Bookmark option This allows you to set a marker to which a later event can return This way you can define sections of a script as independent units that you can go to and return from at any point in the script As with bookmarks and GoTo s on the Branch menu bookmarks left with a button Go to Event action are used in conjunction with an action that restores the current execution location in the script to the bookmark location This is Action Return to Bookmark Th
41. add arguments to set the sound s volume panning pitch fade in time fade out time and so on Sample Play C Sounds Toccata mp3 Volume 24 Pan 5 FadeOut 10 In these examples the first argument the file name is fixed After all the fixed position arguments comes a list of optional named arguments which may be empty as in the first example above New options may be added to the command at any time without changing existing usage For instance a Reverb parameter could be added in a future version of the Sample Play command Sample Play C Sounds Toccata mp3 Reverb 10 The new version of the Sound module will still play the old scripts they simply will not use the new features It is possible to have more than one value per named parameter for example Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 168 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Clip 120 400 C Graphics Logo png Resize 48 54 It is even possible to have parameters that contain other named parameters Clap 120 400 C Graphics Logo phg Bevel on Size 4 Directives There are a number of directives that apply to commands and events Disabled Events may be disabled by placing the directive Disabled in front of them A disabled event does not play when the script is executed This directive follows any label but precedes the com
42. adjust the size by clicking and drag one of the of a clip s bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Flash Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the Movie Clip to its original size A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Flash Clip half its current width and height e d make the Flash Clip double its current width and height Cut Copy amp Paste A Flash Clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new Flash Clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Page View Toolbar Cut Copy and Paste eu D Cut Copy Paste Funct
43. adjusted in the Design Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as reverting to the clip to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original If a clip was copied from an external package and added by pasting from the clipboard the Clip button will read lt embeddeds indicating there is no underlying file This can bloat your script file and on saving as you will also see a dat file associated to the sca file Additional Keyboard Shortcuts e x Flips the selected Clip horizontally around a vertical axis e y Flips the selected Clip upside down around a horizontal axis e r Rotates the clip clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the clip counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 81 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Exportin
44. already in use applied to some element the element s color will be remapped to the closest matching color in the User palette Pick Usually used after adding a new color chip Pick enables you to change a selected color to match a specific color from the page Clicking this button changes the pointer to the Pick pointer and you can then position it on the pixel whose color you want and click to pick it The color that was selected in the color bar changes to the picked color and all pixels in the image that were the selected color become the picked color Spread One special feature of the Palette panel is automatic color spreads which allow you to easily create a series of any number of colors which will smoothly shade between two given colors To create a spread in the User palette Select a color chip on the User palette color bar Click the Add button as many times as the number of steps you want in the spread Use the color controls to adjust the last color added or Pick a color from the page This color will be representing the end of the spread Select the first color added and adjust it or Pick a color to represent the other end of the spread Click the Spread Button Select the ending color chip on the User palette color bar ouorhWwhNh The color chips between the first and last colors which were created will smoothly shade between the two colors Sliders You can adjust the color of the selected chip to
45. alternative to the Text element due to these specific properties 1 It defines an area on the page into which text is entered 2 Text typed into it will automatically reduce in size when the cursor reaches the bottom right corner allowing more text to be entered into the area until the minimum font size is reached 3 Text that overflows it will be truncated This makes using a Text Box almost the primary element for Text when using them for Binding to Data in Templates General Visual Manipulation When the Text Box element is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge The highlighted frame is an indication that it has been selected You can continue to work with the Text element or click anywhere on the page outside of the Text element to deselect it Moving the Text Element e With the Text Element selected simply drag the clip to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will
46. and the bottom section is an alphabetical list of fonts available on this system Scroll the list using the scroll bar or the up down arrows or even type the first letter of the font you are looking for and select the font highlighted The changes you make are applied to any selected text or to the next text you type Fonts listed with a lock symbol next to the name is an indication that the font has restricted distribution rights and cannot be embedded within a ScalaScript If you wish to publish or distribute a script that uses non embeddable fonts you must ensure that the machines on which the script will play already have the necessary font s installed A warning at the the time of selection is shown as well as at the time of collection and publication of the script Font Size The Font Size popup has several options e Font Size Specify the font size or select the numeric value and enter the size you want It can be bound by right mouse selection of the numeric value e Font Browser Shows an alternative and more detailed font selection panel with a preview area to type some text into e Font Sizing Sets the method to use to calculate the drawn text e Cell Height Text including accents and descenders fits exactly within the number of pixels specified in the Font Size e Character Height Upper case letters are approximately the number of pixels specified in the Font Size which more closely matches various other applications e Text E
47. any desired shade simply by using the three color sliders The sliders are available for two color modes RGB or HSV For both modes the large color block in the middle of the panel will display the color and the corresponding numerical display You can also click the value and enter a number RGB HSV selector Lets you choose either RGB or HSV color modes for editing colors Click this button to toggle between RGB and HSV mode RGB Mode The three sliders control the amounts of Red Green and Blue that combine to make the color in the color chip The R G and B values range from 0 to 255 Red Green and Blue channels are combined in the color light spectrum to produce the color chip Pure white light is a full combination of RGB at 100 whereas black is the absence of all RGB or 0 HSV mode The HSV color mode is slightly more complicated Once you understand it you can frequently make color adjustments more easily than with RGB The three sliders in HSV control are e Hue H Basic color accessible on the slider in a spectral order red orange yellow green blue violet red Because of this the value Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 132 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ranges from 0 to 359 e Saturation S Intensity or purity of the hue It can have values from 0 to 255 e Value V Overall brightness I
48. around each slide But if you leave it off the default setting the slide will be displayed and printed without a border With this option on thin lines representing the frames outlining each slide will appear in the page preview ScalaPrint frames are the same thickness regardless of Slide size Slide Name Turn this on to enable the name of a slide to print directly underneath the slide image The slide name corresponds to the scripts assigned page name including the extension if a file name is used With this option on you will see a representation of the slide name displayed underneath and to the left of each slide in the page preview This option is off by default Slide Number This option enables or disables printing the slide s script page number which is the same as the script s page number directly underneath the slide image If a slide is part of a group of pages in the Main View the slide number will be printed as the Group number followed by a dash and the page number within the group With this option on you will see a representation of the slide number displayed underneath and to the right of each slide in the page preview ScalaPrint Margins You can adjust the margins of the printed page by using the Top Left Bottom and Right value controls on the Margins panel The units of measure indicated on the value controls are controlled by the Margin Units selector Adjusting the margins is useful when you need t
49. as rows from top to bottom identified by name which lets you see and access many pages column buttons at once This provides an overview of the script s settings for Transitions timing etc Status information Bar 11 Additional information may appear in this bar from time to time Additional Topics These areas will also be discussed as part of this section Working with Pages Adjusting Script Properties Closing a Script Quitting Designer Main View Toolbar On opening a Designer session there are only two options available in the toolbar Led New Open New Icon for creating a new script Open Allows you to open an existing script Once one of these activities have been done then the full toolbar is shown The toolbar is context sensitive and only those icons that can be used at that moment are available while the remainder are ghosted Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 35 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The following is the full list of activities in the toolbar Click on the link to find out more information e Save Saves the currently selected script The drop down menu also allows you to select Save As which enables you to save the script with a new name e Add Opens the file dialog to select a file as the background for a new page The drop down menu also enables you to add A Specia
50. best use of scheduling in a complex production you may need to utilize grouping and or sub scripts as the use of groups and or sub scripts have special considerations Schedule Panel The Schedule panel specifies entries in the schedule for an event Each entry consists of a collection of time related information which determines when the scheduled event can or will play These controls are grouped into four sections corresponding to successively more specific levels of scheduling Valid Range Establish the overall date time range within which an event can play and outside of which it cannot play Valid Weeks Make it possible to schedule events through the year on the basis of week numbers Valid Days Operates on the level of individual days and allows you to permit the event to play on certain days of the week Valid Time of Day Exact Time of Day Operates on the level of the individual days which are valid as defined by other controls and establishes whether the schedule entry is of the periodic or interrupt type Other buttons in the Schedule panel let you add view and remove entries Schedule Entries When you open the Schedule panel you will start at entry 1 Once it has been edited you can add additional entries for the event as necessary For example you may want the same page to run only during an hour in the morning and another hour in the afternoon Each hour would then be one entry in the schedule for that corresponding page
51. between thumbnails List mode is a textual view that can be useful when over viewing larger scripts or when you want to modify multiple pages simultaneously This area gives you an overview of everything your script will display or execute A thumbnail in the Main view may represent one of several things each of which has a distinctive appearance e Page 5 Contains elements such as text video clips HTML web clips and sounds Most thumbnails fall into this category Examples include a background upon which you may place elements such as text graphics and video These pages may also include non graphic elements such as sounds and timing events Page View is used to create and manipulate a page e Group 6 Collection of pages that can be treated as a unit e Sub Script 7 Another script run from within the current script e Special Event 8 Non graphical event such as a timing event sound or a command to control an external device Column EXtension Modules 9 Between the Document Tab Bar and the Thumbnail area is a row of columns which hold information or events associated with the currently selected page as a whole The number of columns displayed depends upon the number of modules installed which can vary You can change the size of the thumbnail images by using the slider control above the thumbnails 10 or by adjusting the Size control in the Thumbnails tab of the Options dialog In List mode pages are displayed here
52. checker Changing the Highlighted Word Clicking Change will replace the highlighted word on the page with the word in the Change To text box The corrected word will retain the same text styles as the original word The spell checker will resume searching for any other unrecognized words on the page If the suggested correction in the text box is not the intended word but the intended word is in the Suggestions list select the word in the list to make it appear in the Change To box and then click Change If the highlighted word or any suggestions are not correct select the word in the Change To box and type the intended word and then click Cha nge to make the correction Ignoring a Word To ignore the highlighted word and allow the spell checker to continue checking the page click Ignore To ignore the word and continue ignoring it for the remainder of your authoring session click Ignore All The word will be added to a temporary list in memory of words to ignore Until you shut down and restart Designer or use the Reset Ignore All option in the Options dialog from the To ols pull down menu the spell checker will not stop on that particular word Adding a Word to the User Dictionary The dictionary which Designer checks spellings is extensive but it cannot contain every word that might be used in a script Proper names trademarks technical terms foreign words and less common forms of existing words are likely to be unrecogn
53. color transparent Process Image processing options to change the appearance of Clips which affect the rendering of the images only not the underlying files and can easily be undone if desired Video Related to the playback of Anim Clips and Movie Clips Crawl Control Field Web Clip Control Flash Control Image Type Image Settings Tab Appearance Control aspects of a Text Crawl element Controls input options for Text Entry Fields Control aspects of a Web Clip element Related to the playback of flash files Choose a type of background image and set certain options for that image type Control the size of the background image and other background settings Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 105 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The Appearance tab is the primary tab of all Design Panels It allows the application of a variety of styles to the element and how it should transition on and off of the page Note This image is for illustrative purposes only The actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Text x Appearance Position Af Misc Face IC 1 fouttine DIEET DIEE mA a La In __ Font Bitstream Vera Sans y 50 a Spacing al i E I B Belz
54. columns you can rearrange the order of any of the other columns For example if you need to work more frequently than usual within a column adjusting the column order would be desirable To rearrange the columns of page elements 1 Point to the column heading and 2 Drag the name to the left or right until it is in the new position 3 Do this as necessary until the columns are in the desired order You can also choose not to display the columns of optional Modules This may be accomplished in the Options dialog Working with Pages In addition to using the Main View to define page elements such as transitions pauses and sounds there are many other ways to work with pages in the Main view to refine the script Generally the basic techniques for handling pages are the same whether you are working in the List or Thumbnail mode The topics discussed in this section include e Administrating Pages Administrating Pages This section covers techniques for manipulating your production script Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 75 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Topics covered in this section include Selecting a Page s Moving Pages Copying Pages Deleting Pages Disabling Pages Grouping Pages Selecting a Page s To select a single page click on its thumbnail In List Mode you will click on the corresponding N
55. effect of causing the selected element to move in front of or behind overlapping elements Using Element Layering will control how elements cover each other independent of their temporal order When using these options the rules applied are based of whether the element has a transition Essentially there are two groups as is seen in the List View The first section of elements are those without transitions and are already on the page when the page appears during playback while the second section of elements are those with transitions and appear in the order in List View Adding or removing a transition will cause the element to move between the sections Align Opens the Align popup which provides the different ways to align the selected elements both vertically and horizontally Spread Opens the Spread popup which provides the different ways to spread the selected elements both vertically and horizontally Bind to Data This will bring up a popup menu that lets you pick a variable or choose New to create or select a variable to bind the property to If the property already is bound to data you will find an Unbind option at the bottom of the popup menu so that you can unbind it from the data When an element is bound to a variable the Selection box of the element will show the name of the variable it is bound to Set Array Index Opens the Set Array Index popup which provides the different ways to alter the index used when binding param
56. exited is the main block of the script then the script will exit returning control to the calling script If the current script is the top level script then the Player terminates The Exit command takes an argument that indicates the number of blocks levels of nesting to exit Exit 1 Exit 5 The Exit command may be used to return from a subroutine called by the Use command Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 184 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Use myresource Resources myresource return from the resource before the end Exit 1 echo this is a test n The subroutine will return when it reaches the end of the event so thse Exit command is only needed when control must return before reaching the end of a block The parameter to the Exit command indicates the number of blocks that are to be exited For instance if the Exit command is embedded within a conditional block then Exit 2 must be called to fully exit the subroutine res event Group If exit condition Sequence return from the resource before the end Exit 2 Exit Command syntax Notification OnNotification variable branch Used to set up notification on a specific variable When the variable changes value a specified action is taken The notification remains in effect until the variable o
57. from Designer As of Release 11 00 the password must contain at least eight 8 characters Note If your computer is behind a proxy server you will need to know its URL and if required user name and password for the proxy These are entered in Designer under Tools Options Network To publish a script 1 Click the Publish icon from the toolbar Publish settings are saved as Targets Select lt New Target gt and click OK Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 32 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 2 The Publish panel lets you select options for publishing a script to Content Manager In most networks the Connection Type should be set to Content Manager Direct Click on the Content Manager Address button Enter the URL User Name and Password for your Content Manager Click Refresh This will test the connection to the server and tell you the name of the Content Manager network If you have entered the correct information the Available Networks button will be automatically filled Ook WwW 7 If you see an error message you may have entered an incorrect URL user name or password Or the server is not accessible from your computer 8 Click the Publish Button 9 You will see the publishing progress display 10 When it is done click Close Useful Tip Once you have published
58. from the Composite port of the device device dependent e S Video Captures from the S Video port of the device device dependent e Custom Selecting this option enables the Custom Button below Custom Channel This is only available if Custom is first selected as the Channel lis and lets you manually enter the name of the Channel Transparency Turning transparency On makes transparent any portions of the Streaming Video defined as transparent using the controls in the Chroma Key tab Volume The TV Clip volume is set to to the maximum value This can be adjusted by either using the slider or by selecting and changing the numeric value The actual volume is in relationship to the master volume setting of the device e g if the Master volume of the device is set to 60 then Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 110 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 setting the volume of the clip to 25 will result in the actual volume being 15 of the master volume Tab Position The Position tab contains options related to the position and dimensions of the element s selected i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Clip x _ Appearance Position ies Cheon Kan
59. from the Menu Add Recent File A list of recent loaded files is displayed Choosing one will load the file Add Page From Media File Add Page From Recent Media File gt Add Page From Recent Media Folder p Add Plain Page Add Special Event Add Streaming Video Page Add From Recent Folder A list of recently used folders is displayed Choosing one will open the file dialog for this folder The number of items listed will be based on the settings in the Authoring Tab of Designer Tool Options Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 39 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Adding a Plain Background Page The Add Plain Page option enables you to quickly create a page with a single color background As with other backgrounds Designer assumes you want to begin designing the page immediately so when you choose Add gt Add Plain Page you will see the Design Text Panel in addition to a plain background You also have the option of changing the color of the background or subsequently change the background type Adding a Special Event Page A Special Event page is unique because it enables you to add elements to a script which may not be associated with a file or background Some examples of Special Events include setting the value of a variable or changing the flow of the script based on variable values To add a s
60. hh e Enables the End Time value control allowing you to adjust the end time for the movie e End Time Control The default is the movie length indicating that the movie plays to the end Select a value and adjust it Wait Controls the progress of the script e When On Wait prevents the script from advancing to the next event in the page s sequence until the current animation finishes e When Off Wait allows the next event to begin as soon as the animation has started Loops Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 114 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Sets the number of times the Movie Clip should play e The default value is one 1 and is the recommended setting Page Advancement for Wait and Loops Regardless of the Wait setting the page itself will advance when the page duration is reached If Wait is off and if the page is set to Wait for Elements then the page will wait for the specified number of Loops to complete If Loops is set to infinite then the page will advance Tab Crawl Control The Crawl Control tab has a number of options for defining the source of the text crawl as well as options for how the crawl is displayed Design Text Crawl x Appena Position Misc Crawl Control y I i i Wait Rate Control Duration o Y Direction 0 Text Crawl Gap 10
61. in the Main View You can also open scripts from the Files menu using e Open e Open Recent e Open from Recent Folder It is also possible to work with multiple scripts open at once Each is shown in its own tab in the Main View and it is possible to copy pages between open scripts Be careful when copying between scripts of different dimensions as the layout may change Main View Toolbar Save aa Save As you compose and manipulate the pages in a script you should periodically save the script so that your work is not accidentally lost Designer allows you to save a script at any time from any level of the script structure in which you are working This can be done in a number of ways e Use the Save icon in the toolbar to save the current script if it has previously been saved using its current name and location without opening the File dialog If the script has not been previously saved the File dialog opens for you to choose a location and script name e Use the Save drop down menu icon to access Save and Save As options e Alternatively use the File pull down menu and click Save or Save As to open the File dialog Ensure that the File dialog shows that you are on the drive and in the folder where you want to save the script Designer remembers the last one used or if this is the first time using Designer you will see the My Documents folder If necessary navigate to the folder where you want to save the script e File Name M
62. is a string that uniquely identifies the playlist e g Display1 My channel My frame TimeSlot My playlist Current Media Item Variables You can read these ScalaScript variables to learn about the currently playing media item in the current frame Medialtem Title Name of the current media item in this frame Medialtem Type Type of the current media item in this frame Medialtem ModifiedDate Modification date of the current media item in this frame Medialtem Folder Folder of the current media item in this frame Medialtem Foo Value of media item metadata Foofor the current media item in this frame The metadata entry Foo and its values for each media item would be set up in Content Manager Use of Media Item Metadata If you set up a Media Item metadata entry called Foo then the value of Foo for the currently playing Media Item is made available as the Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 225 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ScalaScript variable Medialtem Foo and you can read this variable directly from your ScalaScripts Your ScalaScript can also pass this variable to a VBScript JScript or Python script for processing there You can make a script that displays the metadata information or takes different actions based on metadata values That lets a ScalaScript read the values of the Media Item metadata that were applie
63. is running as a service I Ignore errors scripts get published with errors f Do NOT include fonts w Do NOT include wipes x Skip cleanup p Use passive FTP z Publish to a ScalaScript Package a single file format e out_handle Returns a unique handle for each request for use with the CheckPublish method GoPublish asynchronously initiates a publish operation Multiple operations can be queued Once initiated you can check the progress of a publish operation by passing the handle returned from GoPublish to the CheckPublish method See the CheckPublish method for more information and a full VBScript example on how to invoke both methods CheckPublish Method Publisher CheckPublish handle As Variant out_numberofscripts As Variant out_currentscriptnum As Variant out_currentscriptname As Variant out_scriptpercentdone As Variant out_overallpercentdone As Variant out_completedscripts As Variant out_failedscripts As Variant out_allerrors As Variant Where handle Supply the handle returned by GoPublish out_numberofscripts Total number of scripts in this publish operation out_currentscriptnum Number in sequence of script currently being published starting with 1 out_currentscriptname Name of script currently being published no path or extension out_scriptpercentdone Current script progress 0 100 for display only out_overallpercentdone Overall progress 0 100 for display only out_completedscripts
64. may wish to play a sound at the same time a picture is being displayed rScatlascript Group Picture C Pictures Photol jpg Sample Play C Sounds Sound1 mp3 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 151 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 This example is similar to the previous example except it contains a Group directive Events that follow the Group directive are said to be in the group list of the block Each block may have its own group list It introduces the Sample Play command which plays a sound file Events within the group list of a block are executed in parallel They are also executed before any events in the block that are outside of the group list In the above example the sound will start playback when the picture is displayed Combining Parallel and Sequential Execution The next step is to allow both sequential and parallel execution of events within the same script This may be accomplished in a number of ways given the simple constructs that have been presented so far The first and most obvious way is to separate the parallel events from the sequential events using blocks LSCcalaSeripe Group Preture Cs Pictures i PhotoL Jpg Sample Play C Sounds Sound1 mp3 Preture Ce Prctures Phoeto2 jog Picture C Pictures Photo3 jpg In this case Photo will play in para
65. move as a group and maintain their relative positions Cut Copy amp Paste A Text Box can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the handles on the bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip The size can also be adjusted in the Design Text Box Panel s Position Tab When re sizing the Text Box the font size of the text displayed may change according to the Text Box s normal and minimum font size If it contains Text segments with different normal font sizes they will reduce or enlarge proportionately until the minimum size is reached Add a Text Crawl Element A Text Crawl is a special kind of text element allowing you to move text across the p
66. not been previously saved the File dialog opens for you to choose a location and script name Save As Choose a location and script name even if it has previously been saved Export Sub menu has several options for exporting selected element s the background or the entire Page as a PNG image file Options for saving the selected text into a text file exporting the page s palette and saving a newly created button as a button preset for later use Main ALT M Returns you to the Main View Using the Edit Menu in Page View Edit contains options for managing the contents of the page The available options depend on the tab which may differ slightly from one tab to another They can be accessed primarily through the Edit pull down menu A few options are also available in the Page view Toolbar such as Cut Copy Paste Undo and Redo The Edit menu consists of Undo last named action Redo Undo Page Cut Copy Paste Paste Special Reset Format Delete Select All Appear Later Appear Earlier Align Spread Bind to Data Set Array Index Insert Image Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 134 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Undo last named action Redo You can Undo and Redo your actions as necessary The Undo Redo support in the Design panels is the same as described in Main View Toolbar Undo and R
67. notate or comment your script by naming the page with your comment and then un checking Enabled in the Page Control panel Add a Text Element A text element is created by typing text on a page If you click on any free area of the page the Text Cursor will appear and you can start typing text It can be a single word a line or several lines Each text element is independent of one another and can exhibit entirely different settings which govern its appearance position and movement on the page If you wish to add Text over another element then chose Add Text from the Add pull down menu The Design Text Panel at the bottom of the work area allows you change many attributes of the Text Element Designer allows tremendous freedom to individually move manipulate and design each element You can move any text element by dragging it to a new position You can also start a new element or break the current text element into two when the cursor is visible by pressing Enter Selection and Editing Text You can select text using the keyboard the mouse or a combination of both The method you use will depend upon the amount of text you want to select and if you want to move the text For example using the mouse is the quickest way to select and group several text elements so they can be moved as a unit Depending on the selection method chosen the text will either be highlighted in a different color or enclosed in a dashed rectangular selection fr
68. number is too high pages will not be printed Entering an ending page number greater than the maximum number of pages will have the same effect as entering the maximum number Copies Use the Copies value control to set the number of copies of the current print job you wish to print Include Background Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 46 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 You have the option to exclude the background images from your slides so they will not be printed as part of the slide Turning off Include Background excludes background images from all slides in the current print job For example if your slides contain text overlying busy background graphic images and you are using ScalaPrint to generate transparencies then you may want to emphasize only the text and might choose to exclude the background images from the slides This option is on by default ScalaPrint Layout The Layout panel contains options which adjust how slides are laid out on the pages of your print job Orientation Choose the direction in which the slide s contents are positioned on the page with this selector You can choose either e Portrait Page height is longer than its width and columns are positioned across the narrower dimension of the page e Landscape Page width is longer than its height and columns are positioned across the
69. oScalaFileLock UnlockScalaFile End If Access Metadata from Python Using this method to access metadata is a simpler way than using a VBScript Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 227 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 from scalatools import get_metaval location get_metaval Player location Scala Publish Automation EX Module The Scala Publish Automation EX Module is an additional software component that supports external applications that wish to represent and publish content to a Scala network It is a Windows service that allows an external program to perform the equivalent of the Publish to Scala Network function of Scala Designer Publish Automation Module Installation The Publish Automation EX Module is a separate product with its own installer To use that Installer 1 In the Administrative Tools control panel double click the Services icon Select the Scala Publish Server service and open its Prope rties 2 On the Log On tab specify a suitable account and password for this service to log on as Publish Automation Usage When the Publish Automation EX Module is running it offers a COM interface to access its Publish to Scala Network feature This COM interface can be accessed from VBScript or many other languages It contains these methods GoPublish and GoPublishFolder Methods Publisher GoPub
70. of a spell checking session then resume spell checking from where you left off To switch to the Design panel while spell checking click the Design button at the bottom of the Spelling panel The Design Text Panel will appear and the misspelled word will be highlighted You can revise the positioning of text elements so everything will properly fit and or go to other Page Views to rearrange other elements When you have finished making your change click the Tools pull down menu and choose Continue Spelling This choice will appear in place of Spelling in the Tools pull down menu while spell checking is in progress The Spelling panel will appear again and spell checking will restart at the point where you left the dialog Previewing the Page during Spell Checking You can click the Preview button to see how the current page will look during playback Continuing the Spell Check As you continue to click Change Ignore or Ignore All the spell checker will move on to other text on the page When all the text has been checked the Next Page button will be enabled requiring you to move to the next page and give you the opportunity to review the page and if necessary adjust the layout When you are satisfied with the page click Next Page which allows the spell checker to check the text of the following page in the script Spell check will continue to check each subsequent page until it finds another misspelled word When the spell checker
71. of using Windows Script in Scala and other advanced scripting features of Scala can be found here Windows Scripting Documentation Windows Script Event To run a Windows script is run from a ScalaScript add a WindowsScript event to the ScalaScript You choose the Windows script file the scripting engine language to use and whether the ScalaScript should wait for the Windows script to complete In addition you can choose to share one or more ScalaScript variables for access from the Windows script Sharing Variables In the Windows Scripting Module you can select one or more ScalaScript variables to share with the Windows Script These variables then become available as objects you can use in the Windows script where you can read them or change them If you change a variable from within the Windows script it value automatically changes live in Scala Shared variables can be used to pass data in either direction between ScalaScript and a Windows script Accessing shared variables is similar in all Windows Scripting languages A shared variable is actually a Windows script object whose value is represented by the Value method This is the default method in VBScript so in VBScript you do not need to explicitly write out Value In Python Scala supplies bindings to make direct access easy In JScript and other languages you have to explicitly use the Value method to get at its value Note The following examples given assume you have
72. only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the image You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the element to its original size A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing for images and animations Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 143 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e h Make the clip half its current width and height e d Make the clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the element without having to resort to editing in a external package e Use ALT Dragging a handle on the side or corner of the element until the edge or edges enclose only the portion of the clip you want to keep e Use ALT Dragging the element within the cropped rectangle to re position the cropped area seen The cropped area can also be adjusted in the Design Panel s Position Tab as well as reverting to the element to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A element can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script any styles applied will be remembered e Copy the element using C
73. or select the file and click Open If the file is a picture background Designer assumes you want to start composing the page Therefore the Page view will appear with your chosen background Usually you will see the Design Text Panel however when adding an animation or movie you will see the Design Background Panel 3 When your page is completed and you click the Main icon in the Page View you will see the page thumbnail listed in the Main View 4 If the file is not a picture background you will see the Main View The new page is automatically selected and Designer will assign a name which you can change at any time You will also see the panel for the type of page element represented by the file you have selected For example if you selected a sound file the Sound panel is already open allowing for immediate refining of the sound settings Designer also has the ability to select several files from the same folder and add them to the script at the same time You can select a range of consecutive files Shift click or randomly select files Ctrl click The new pages are automatically selected in the Main View When you add a page to a script the contents of the file chosen from the File dialog become the contents of the page If the file is a script all of its pages sub scripts sound effects etc will be included in the definition of the page Additional Methods Designer also has two additional Menu choices to assist adding a page
74. page Unlike other panels the settings you make on this panel are not options specific to the page on which they are set Instead they are commands to change the interactive settings for the script starting at that point in script execution The settings are effective for the current page and all subsequent pages until another Input panel event is encountered The Input menu has three tabs e Button Controls Types of user input accepted by interactive buttons within a script e Mouse Pointer Options for determining when a mouse pointer appears and what it looks like e Slideshow Controls Options for page advance that do not require the use of interactive buttons as in slideshow presentations Tab Button Controls On the Button Controls tab you can choose the type of input recognized in a production using one of these options e Mouse e Touch Screen e Keyboard arrows Enter At least one of these options is always on so you cannot turn off all three Mouse Enabling Mouse allows the viewer to use the mouse to highlight and select buttons when the production plays The mouse pointer appears and the script can respond to mouse clicks if the page uses buttons This option is on by default Touch Screen Turn this on when the system playing the production uses a touch screen Doing so turns off the Mouse option so that the mouse pointer does not appear Because mouse and touch screen input are mutually exclusive the appea
75. page edge with line O is closest to its edge line 1 is the next closest and so on The number of the current line is shown in the Line Number value control arrows You can use this value control to select a line or alternatively click on the line The selected line will become solid and its Edge Line Number and Line Position settings will be displayed in those controls Positioning Guide Lines If you used Add Line the new line will be positioned relative to the last guide line which you created for the current edge Newer lines are positioned farther from the edge The Line Position value control will show the distance of the current guide line from its edge in pixels You can adjust the line s position using this control Once created you can move guide lines by dragging them You must click directly on the line to avoid Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 141 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 creating a new line In repositioning guide lines it can be easier to use the Line Number control to select the lines rather than making precise adjustments with the Line Position control If you click and drag to move a guide line the line will follow the mouse pointer and a number will appear near the pointer indicating its line position Removing Guide Lines There are several methods to remove a guide line by selecting it and
76. position fields initially 0 0 set the upper left corner of the crop area The first value is the distance from the left side of the original media asset the second value is the distance from the top of the original media asset The size fields initially lt full width gt x lt full height gt define the size of the area visible after cropping The first value is the crop area width and the second is its height You can revert to the background s uncropped media asset by turning this button off Flip Horizontal When enabled the media asset is flipped horizontally Flip Vertical When enabled the media asset is flipped vertically Rotate Displays the rotation angle of the picture movie streaming video or anim background Adjust the angle using the numeric field or the up down controls in 90 degree increments Page View Toolbar Background Background Once a new page is added the background becomes a backdrop for elements such as text clip art soecial photographs pre designed graphics and video clips all of which will enhance the creative design of your page In Designer still images are referred to as Picture backgrounds while AnimGIF animations and SWF files are Animation backgrounds Digital video AVI WMV MPG H 264 are referred to as Movie backgrounds Animation and Movie backgrounds are generally referred to as animations There are also Multi tile backgrounds which are similar to picture backgrounds and Plain ba
77. prefer your text which appears in the timing variables am pm October Thursday to be all in upper case AM PM OCTOBER THURSDAY simply turn on this option Time Format Time Format has ten primary options using different combinations of 12 hour and 24 hour leading zero and seconds and a custom format The following Table shows the Time formats available and the value of the Scala System Variable timeformat Time Format Timeformat Value 07 30 58 24h 0 07 30 24h 1 7 30 58 24h 2 7 30 24h a 07 30 58 am 12h 4 07 30 am 12h 5 7 30 58 am 12h 6 7 30 am 12h 7 Use Windows Regional Options With Seconds 100 Use Windows Regional Options Without Seconds 101 Use Windows Regional Options In Custom format 102 The custom time format template consists of a combination of one pattern from each of these categories The letters m s and t must be lowercase and the letter h must be lowercase to denote the 12 hour clock or uppercase to denote the 24 hour clock Hours e h Hours 12 hour clock e hh Hours with leading zeros 12 hour clock e H Hours 24 hour clock e HH Hours with leading zeros 24 hour clock Minutes Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 58 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e m Minutes e mm Minutes with leading zeros Seconds e s Seconds e ss Seconds with leading zeros Time Marke
78. products of Enterprise the prior Designer version or to other versions depending on your interests Where to Begin User Manual New Users e Working in the Main View e Introducing Designer e Working in the Page e Installing Designer View e Primer e Working with e Glossary of Terms Templates e Getting Started e Working with e Tips and Tricks Add Ons e Integrating Data Experienced Users e Scripting and e What s New Automation e Release and Update Notes Other Resources In addition to this resource the following are also available J J e Support provides help through FAQs and a Discussion Forum J Introducing Designer Related Areas For online documentation related to our other products in this same release version e Content Manager 11 00 e Player 11 00 To access the prior version of Designer e Designer 10 5 Looking for something different Visit our documentation portal homepage e Scala Enterprise Homepage Updates show which updates are available for the product s you have currently licensed Extras is a resource of information and inspiration from documentation to examples and more Services and Training are available to help you get the most out of your digital signage network Whether you are a beginner or an expert with Designer you can create polished professional on screen productions that combine text sound graphics and animation for maximum impact Designer when used with its power
79. reaches the end of the script that you did not start checking on the first page it goes back to the beginning and continues checking Once the text in the script has been checked the following message will appear The spell check of this script is complete Finishing a Spell Check Click the Close button on the Spelling panel at any time to complete a spell checking session Designer Tool Options Authoring Options Cina ns Firad playback deacon ukek Prewiean ag Taine Ose hipa bor Decay oguen One Serem Crem Same ta Deskin w aen Hala L on Inte Rh AD Graphics 4600 La Sareen Seflings 20 58 a 1152 x Tre Color x SHE Siren Crenigaen O Deye Soalpg Fil Display Exactly i ia Select Tools Options from the pull down menu This displays system information panel contains options that you can use to customize how Designer is presented and controls script performance The following is a brief overview for each of the Tabs e Playback Allows you to modify the options that control playback within Designer e The Display Configuration button determines how Designer will display your script when you press Play Normally this is set to Window mode e In Full screen mode you can use the Quick Preview option to choose whether or not to swap to that resolution when you click Preview Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 56 Scala D
80. relative position This is the default setting e Setting Off All other states remain in their specified position If you do need to position button states independently 1 Turn off Link Positions 2 Move the individual button states to the correct places 3 Turn the option back on again You can then move the entire button all states as necessary without losing the relative positioning Apply Preset Button presets load a set of backdrop images that are aligned and contain appropriate Shift and Border settings so that an element fits neatly into the backdrop with no additional effort Button presets are much like an elaborate kind of style that you can apply to buttons Clicking Apply Preset when a button is selected opens the File dialog open to the Clipart Folder Select the ButtonsPresets folder and then you can choose a preset BTN file Page View Toolbar Palette Hes Palette Several Design panels will also allow you to assign colors to elements from the color popup These colors are controlled from the Design Palette panel where you can individually apply color options to images and edit individual colors Designer uses three kinds of palettes e User Palette Selection of default colors which are fully customizable Most of your time working with individual colors in Designer will involve the User palette e Background Palette Colors in the background image if the image is 256 color format 8 bit e Clip Palette Color
81. secondary mouse button to return to the previous page If you use the mouse buttons during the presentation of a page which represents another script you will advance or move back through each page of the sub script Using the mouse to advance when the script has reached the last event by default will loop back to the beginning of the script Main View Menus The drop down menus in Main View cover the following activities File Edit Add View Tools Help Using the File Menu in Main View The File Menu has a number of functions available to assist you during the creative process and it enables quick access to Function Explanation New Ctrl N Creates a new blank script Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 49 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Open Open Recent Open From Recent Folder Close Ctrl W Close All Scripts Save CTRL S Save As Save All Revert Publish To Publish All Scripts To Export to HTML Slides Collect Files Print Script Properties Exit http docs scala com display D1 100 Brings up the Open Script File dialog with the Scripts folder displayed by default Lists recently used scripts to open without using the Open Script File dialog The number of scripts listed can be set in Tools Options Lists recently used folders Opens the Open Script File dialog for the Scripts folder selected
82. seen The cropped area can also be adjusted in the Design TV Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as reverting to the TV Clip to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A TV Clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new TV Clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new TV Clip exactly in the same place as the original Addition Keyboard Shortcuts e x Flips the selected Clip horizontally around a vertical axis e y Flips the selected Clip upside down around a horizontal axis e r Rotates the clip clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the clip counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Add a Flash Clip Element A Flash Clip is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background For a more detailed discussion of the Flash Clip formats supported by Designer click here All Flash Clips are added to the page one of these methods e Position the cursor at the point on the page you want to insert the Flash Clip e Then either e In the toolbar click
83. shared a variable called sharedvariable Sharing Variables in VBScript Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 210 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Reading and writing shared variables is very straightforward in VBScript Read a shared variable myVBScriptString The value of the shared variable is amp sharedvariable Write to a shared variable sharedvariable new_value Sharing Variables in JScript Reading and writing shared variables is very straightforward in JScript Remember to explicitly write out the Value method Read a shared variable var myJScriptString The value of the shared variable is sharedvariable Value Write to a shared variable sharedvariable Value new_value Sharing Variables in Python In Python first import the Python support bindings From there reading and writing shared variables is very easy Note In Python do not use the same name for a Python variable as for a shared Scala variable as access to the shared variable will be lost and an exception thrown scalavars sharedvars Don t do this x scalavars x Sharing Boolean Variables If you share a boolean variable in VBScript the resulting variables appear in VBScript with the possible string values of True and False Sharing Arrays ScalaScript supports array variables as do Windows Script langu
84. signals to change the mood lighting or receiving a trigger from a proximity sensor when a customer is near to the screen An additional column is added in the Page and Main Views and it is normal for the Serial commands to be applied to a special event although can be tied to specific elements This module requires configuration prior to use Information on doing this can be found at Designer Tool Options Customizing Columns Designer enables you to adjust the width of the columns in the Main View and change the sequence of the columns that represent page elements Transition Timing etc Adjusting Column Width Changing the width of a column affects the number of columns that can be seen at one time in the Main View For example if you make the Nam ecolumn narrower you can see additional Module columns without using the scroll bar Adjusting the width will also determine the amount of visible information on one or more buttons For example if the Timing column is wide enough a full time value such as 00 03 45 50 can be shown To make an adjustment to column width 1 Point to the vertical space between the column you want to adjust and the column to its right 2 Press and hold the main left mouse button The space between the columns will be highlighted 3 Drag the right edge of the column to your desired width then release the mouse button Adjusting Column Order Although you cannot adjust the position of the No and Name
85. size values the more freedom you have to position and resize elements Both the width and height contain a range from a minimum of 4 to any desired maximum size Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 140 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 To graphically edit the size of the grid drag the solid graphic handle which is located below and to the right of the origin initially the upper left corner of the page To numerically edit the size of the grid simply highlight the value in the Grid Size control which you want to change width or height and use the value control to increase or decrease the number As the values are edited you will see the grid change With coarser settings the grid lines become farther apart and the boxes in the grid will become larger Moving the Grid on the Page You can re position the entire grid relative to the page so that even with coarse grid settings you will still have considerable freedom in positioning items The grid origin is represented by a hollow graphic handle crossed by two solid lines By default it is set to 0 0 which is located in the upper left corner of the page You can drag this handle or you can adjust the values in the Grid Origin control Any pixel position regardless of the grid size can also be set as the origin When you are finished in the Grid Settings dialog click
86. source is a video stream Add a clip whose source is a web based URL HTML or HTML5 If this is the case you should be presented with the corresponding Design Panel for the first element on the page i e if the first item is a clip then you will see the Design Clip Panel If the page is an animation or movie page then the Design Background Panel is shown irrespective of whether there are any elements on the page Main View Toolbar Cut Copy and Paste w Function Cut Copy Paste What It Does Deletes the selected page s Puts information to the clipboard which can be pasted into any script Inserts pages from the clipboard that have been cut or copied Main View Toolbar Undo and Redo y Where Does my Info Go Information is placed on the clipboard and can be pasted into any script Any information located on the clipboard is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Any information on the clipboard is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Pages are inserted after the currently selected page Mistakes happen which is why Designer has a multi leveled Undo and Redo function Undo shortcut Ctrl Z and Redo shortcut Ctrl Y are options which are available on the Edit pull down menu and the toolbar panel in both the Main and Page Views While the majority of actions can be undone changes to settings that impact only the application s working environment and no
87. terminate the current token and mark the start of a specific type of token Marks the end of commands including assignments Separates arguments in an argument list Used in expressions to control precedence and begins an argument list Used in expressions to control precedence and ends an argument list Starts an array argument list index values Ends an array argument list Starts an event block Ends an event block Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 157 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 colon Label introducer These may also appear as part of the Group Sequence and Resour ces primitives dollar sign Hex number introducer percent sign Binary number introducer double quote String introducer See also special characters within strings Numbers Numbers can be integers or real numbers Integers Integer numeric literals can be in decimal base 10 hexadecimal base 16 or binary base 2 form Integer numbers are internally represented as 32 bit signed values The decimal form supports a minus sign which is used to denote negative numbers The hexadecimal and binary forms are in twos complement form Hexadecimal numbers are not case sensitive Decimal Numbers Introduced by either a number 0 9 or a minus sign The number will continue as long as characters in the range 0 9 are foun
88. the XML element structure preview data and enables you choose which elements you want to map to ScalaScript variables with the default being All Check the panel to ensure that the definitions are what you need Should you need to change these details select the XML Element then you can modify Mapped Select whether this entry should be mapped to a ScalaScript variable the default value is yes Type Specify the type of the variable to which you are mapping The available types will depend on the data in your source file and one will be suggested If the variable is already used elsewhere in the script then this button is disabled since you cannot change the type Variable Lets you select the name of a new or existing variable or array to map the XML element to based on the XML element name and its position in the structure Loop Through Records e Disabled default Performs one read from the XML file and will attempt to read the number of records specified in the Mapping Dialog e Enabled Enabling Loop Through Records adds an additional option Max Loops which defaults to infinite in this case infinite is defined as all records in the XML file Alternatively specify the number of Loops to perform by adjusting the numeric value Resume At If Loop Through Records is off or the number of loops specified by Max Loops is reached then the next time this page is played you can choose e Next Record Data should pick up where y
89. the Windows file name to use windows file oScalaFileLock LockScalaFile filename Do whatever operation you need using windows_file as your file name MsgBox The Windows path to the file is amp windows_file Indicate we are now done with this file oScalaFileLock UnlockScalaFile In Python the ScalaFileLock interface is exposed through the FileLock object import Scalas try lock scala5 FileLock r Content foo jpg CEY windows_file lock realpath Do whatever operation you need using windows_file as your file name finally del lock except Handle file not found here Additional Python Considerations Use of sys exit SystemExit When running Python scripts using the Windows Scripting interfaces the Windows Scripting environment does not handle Python scripts that call sys exit or that raise the SystemExit exception If you are invoking Python code that uses those exit features you can wrap it this way Cry my_main_script Call your core Python stuff except SystemExit e Handle SystemExit exception return Text Style Tags Introduction You can use text style tags to change the appearance and style of the text in a text element or text crawl Simply include the appropriate tag in the text itself If a text element is displaying a a variable e g the text is myvariable you can even control style changes from a variable When using a crawl the style tags can be in the crawl text or in
90. the configuration scripts of other EX modules They are available in their own configuration script allowing the EX to be controlled by setting values in the configuration script Local Variables Declaration They must be declared before they are used and must always be declared in the group list of a block The scope of the variable is everything inside the block in which the variable is declared This is the same as the named event scope and includes every command in the block and every command contained within every block within the block Group Boolean bool_1 bool_2 bool_3 Integer int i Int 2 int 3 3 DEFO Str Ly Siete 2y G8 GF Sequence use the variables here or in the resources list Local variables may be initialized in the group list Group String str 1l 7 declare stri sce 1 Tinie rah values 7 2m tiralize str l Sequence stri will have the value initial value when the sequence executes Scope Local variable objects use group scoping This means that the variable becomes active when the group list is played and are deactivated when the block is exited after the sequence list completes Variable Notification Variables declared in the script as well as most of the variables supplied by the script engine and other modules support the concept of notification This is a procedure where a variable can tell another object that its value has changed The object may then update its d
91. the currently selected color chip and will be the selected color Colors which are located to the right on the color bar and those which are located in higher numbered color sets will be moved over one space e Initially the new chip is the same color as the previously selected color chip but it can be edited to reflect your choice of colors New colors should be added to the end of the current palette by first using the Color Set Switcher and then selecting the last color Copying Colors from the Background or Clip palettes You can transfer some of the clip or background colors in the User palette to color text blocks allowing them to match the background by e Switching to the Background or Clip palette by using the Palette pop up e Selecting the color on the Background or Clip palette color bar e Clicking the Add to User Palette button When you switch from the User palette to the Background or Clip palettes this button will replace the Add and Delete buttons e Every time you click on the Add to User Palette button the selected color will be copied to the User palette The color will immediately be selected in the User palette display Delete Deleting unneeded User colors will facilitate locating the colors you want to use in your production This can be done by e Selecting the color in the User palette e Click the Delete button You cannot delete colors from the Background or Clip palettes If you delete a color which is
92. the file feeding the crawl or in the cued expression that you set from a VBScript Python script etc Style tags are supported for text elements and can also be placed anywhere in a text crawl Style Tags You can use the following embedded style tags in Text Elements or a Text Crawl to change the text style Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 215 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 lt typeface typefacename gt lt typesize pointsize gt lt latintypeface typefacename gt lt latintypesize pointsize gt lt aslantypeface typefacename gt lt aSiantypesize lt caps Normal Small Al1 None gt Dointsize gt lt bold On Off gt lt bolddelta numpixels gt lt italic On Ore gt lt italicdelta numpixels gt lt under On Off gt lt undercolor rrggbb gt lt underposition numpixels gt lt underthickness numpixels gt lt underair numpixels gt lt underopacity percent gt lt face On Off gt or lt front On Ooff gt lt facecolor rrggbb gt or lt frontcolor rrggbb gt lt faceopacity percent gt or lt frontopacity percent gt lt outline On Off gt lt outlinecolor rrggbb gt lt outlinethickness numpixels gt lt outlinesoftness value gt lt outlineopacity percent gt lt shadow On
93. the results immediately and a message in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the specific change Use Undo to cancel the effect of the last Redo Page View Toolbar Element The Element button jumps to the Element Design panel for the selected element s and is particularly useful when alternating between the List and Element Views You can also use the keyboard shortcut F3 to access the Element button A more detailed discussion of each of these elements can found in Working with Design Panels Working with Design Panels Design panels are the tabbed panels at the bottom of your Designer window when you are editing a page You can easily move from one Design panel to another by clicking its icon in the toolbar or by pressing its F key shortcut In order to see the Design panel for a particular element first select the element and depending on the type of element selected the appropriate Design panel will automatically appear The Element icon in the toolbar will also be highlighted There is a corresponding Design panel for every type of created screen element To edit other aspects of the page such as Background Palette or List click on the desired icon After using a Design panel click the Element icon to continue working with an element s styles If an element is not selected when you click the El ement icon or you have selected multiple elements of different types you will see a Design Multiple Elements tab i
94. until either the player is reset or the calling script ends The async script will not have access to the calling script s variables Any variables to be passed must be explicitly specified on the command Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 186 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 AsyncScript Command syntax Sequencing Pick Sequential Pick Command syntax Pick Shuffle Pick Command syntax Other UsesFiles ViaExpression filename Scripts filename Has the following syntax UsesFiles ViaExpression filename filename Scripts filename filename This specifies files and other scripts that are used by this script This information is used by the authoring system to package the script and its support files for publishing It is mostly obsolete To include a file when publishing and to refer to it later declare a FileNameString with an initializer FileNameString myincludedfile C Files MyClip jpg Clip 20 40 myincludedfile Likewise to include a subscript when publishing and to refer to it later declare a ScriptNameString with an initializer ScriptNameString myincludedscript C Files MySubscript sca Scripc myineludedscripe UsesFiles Command syntax EX ex name Used to load EX modules Loading an EX module makes the commands variables and fun
95. upper right corner of the screen and is essentially the same as the Cancel button Nudge with Arrow Keys Ctrl Arrow Key allows you to move nudge elements by one pixel in whatever direction the arrow key is depressed Shift Ctrl Arro w Key allows you to jump 10 pixels at a time Tips and Tricks Page listed below can provide you with shortcuts to make usage of Designer easier e Context Menus e The F1 Page IS Your Friend Context Menus Designer has right click Context Menus which increases the ability to quickly access certain features For example right clicking on a thumbnail or list item in the Main View Headline This will reveal a context menu allowing you to Cut Copy Paste Delete Group Ungroup Bind to Data fields Disable and Preview in one motion Combined with keyboard shortcuts this will greatly increase your productivity The F1 Key IS Your Friend If there is a button you are not familiar with hover the mouse pointer over it to see the Tool Tip label For even more detailed information select Help from the Menu Bar or press the F1 key Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 8 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 SS ee ee a ee ee ee a The Help section on the Menu Bar also contains general information about Designer including your license information and for advanced users links
96. used both for assignment and as the equal to comparator There is no facility for multiple assignment You cannot say a b 5 to set both a and b to 5 Integer Operators Can be performed on integer expressions constants or variables Operator Meaning Example unary negation 3 addition 2 3 subtraction 5 3 i multiplication 2 3 division 12 3 MOD modulus remainder 9 mod 4 ii power 6 2 Real Operators Can be performed on real expressions constants or variables Operator Meaning unary negation addition Example 3 5 2 1 3 2 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners http docs scala com display D1 100 Result 36 Result 3 5 5 3 Page 162 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 subtraction or negation 5 3 3 2 2 1 multiplication 2 1 3 2 6 72 division 9 0 4 2 25 String Operators Can be performed on string expressions constants or variables Operator Meaning Example Result Concatenation Hello World HelloWorld Strings also support embedding of expressions within the string through bang expansion This is discussed later in the section on Strings Boolean Operators These operators can be performed on boolean expressions constants or variables Operator Meaning Example Result NOT logical not NOT False True AND logical and False AND True False OR log
97. which occur independently of the page transition These are known as independent elements They will appear in the List Panel following the passive elements In playback they will either appear during or after the page transition depending upon the status of the Wait option of the page transition Independent elements and events are listed in the order in which they take place Initially this is the order in which they were created or placed on the page To make an independent element passive remove the In transition You cannot move a passive element into the section of the panel which lists the independent elements Similarly you cannot move an independent element into the area of passive elements Changing the order of passive elements will not change the order in which they are displayed However you may want to change their order in the List panel especially if they overlap You may also change their order to place a particular element on top or to make the panel more closely resemble the Page View Changing the order of independent elements will also change the sequence of events and it will determine which element will be displayed first next or last Adding Elements on the List Panel Designer allows you to add elements to the current page directly from the List Panel Similar to the Design Text Panel click on the page and type to add text You can add an element that exists as a file in your system such as a clip or script or
98. while convenient is not recommended Depending on how you have Tools gt Options gt Authoring gt Automatically Edit New Page set up you will either enter the page for editing automatically default or remain on the Main View When entering the page for the first time you will either be placed into text entry mode with the Text cursor at the top left of the background or you will see the Background Design Panel depending on the type of background Subsequently when editing a page the first element on the page is selected along with its Design Panel Adding a Page from a Media File Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 38 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Add Page From Media File Add Page From Recent Media File gt Add Page From Recent Media Folder p Add Plain Page Add Special Event Add Streaming Video Page When you click the main part of the Add icon or choose Add Page From Media File from the Add pull down menu the standard Windows File dialog will open which enables access to all existing files including scripts backgrounds animations and sound effects etc To do this 1 In the File dialog click on the folder which contains the type of file you want to add or navigate through your file structure until you see the file name in the list box 2 Double click on the file name in the list box
99. widest dimension of the page Matrix You can specify the number of slides which will appear on a page and how they are arranged in columns and rows by using the Matrix value control The first value represents the number of columns of slides and the second is the number of rows of slides You can have as few as 1 slide per page a matrix value of 1x1 to as many as 100 slides per page a matrix value of 10x10 Obviously as matrix values increase the number of slides on a page will increase Subsequently there will be less room to display each slide ScalaPrint will reduce the size of every slide equally maintaining their original aspect ratios As you adjust the matrix values the page preview slides will change correspondingly To change the Matrix value use the value control You can use the arrows or enter the numbers manually Slide Order Placing multiple rows and or columns of slides on a page requires you decide their order Using this selector you can specify whether the slides order is e Across Default Filling each row to progress to the bottom of the page e Down Filling each column to progress to the right side of the page Scale Sometimes when printing a script you may need more white space around your slides whether for notes framing titles or labels or just aesthetic reasons Using the Scale option you can reduce slides to a percentage of their maximum size Keep in mind the maximum slide image sizes are ini
100. with them Click on a module name to open a dialog in which you can adjust the settings for that module Optional Modules Lists the modules that are optional These can be activated or deactivated by clicking on them i Deactivating a module may result in a column disappearing from the Main and List views Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 57 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 If the optional module has configuration requirements then it will also appear in the Modules Settings list such as the TV Tuner EX Module Modules e Timing Module e Launch Module e Schedule Module Optional Modules TV Tuner EX Module CORIOgen EX Module Leighttronix EX Module Queue EX Module Serial RS 232 Module VCR EX Module Weather EX Module Timing Module The Timing Options dialog primarily controls how the Designer system variables Time Date and Weekday display their information To choose time and date formats simply click the Timing Module button in the Module Settings column The variables dialog will appear with e Time Format e Date Format e Weekday Format With several options available you can use the formats best suited for your geographic region or the region in which your scripts will run Day date and time are displayed in scripts by embedding those variables in the normal text Always Upper Case lf you
101. yet grabbed this new revision of the Local XML File in which case the related media files are not yet locked e Player has grabbed this new revision and locked the related media files The player may be still in the middle of using one older revision of the Local XML File This may be the current revision one back or several back depending on update frequency loop length etc Whichever revision is being used its related files will still be locked Therefore the following cleanup rules are complete and safe e Any related files used by the current revision presented by the Fetcher must not be deleted e Any other related files are safe to attempt to delete Those that are still used will fail the attempt while those that are truly obsolete will be successfully deleted The above rules leave a potential gap if the Fetcher supplies a new revision while the Data Source module is starting to process the previous revision but the Data Source module has special handling to care for that Here are the details say the Data Source module is just starting to process revision x of a feed and the Fetcher supplies a new revision y of the feed By the above rules the Fetcher may clean up related files from revision x that are no longer used by revision y The Data Source module might then fail to find the related files for its revision x It has a special behavior in that case which is to loop back to pick up the newest revision Future Plans for th
102. you can add a special event which will insert a blank element into the List Panel For example you can define a pause setting to ensure there is a brief delay before the first element transitions onto the page To add an element to the page from the Page View Toolbar List click on Add The File dialog will appear Similar to clicking Add in the Main View you have access to the same folders and files To add a special event choose Add Special Event from the Add icon pull down menu list An event named lt untitled gt will appear in the List panel When you double click on a file name click OK or choose Add Special Event you will see the List Panel again The new event will be inserted below the previously selected event in the list or at the end of the list if a selection is not made Added elements are automatically selected on the page if the element is visible and in the List Panel If the new element overlaps any existing elements on the Page View canvas you may need to adjust its position Using Element Levels Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 124 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The List Panel contains the Level column The column button contains the current level number of each element Clicking in the Level column will open the Level panel which contains the Element Level control By default elements are c
103. you locally integrate a file and also use Content Manager to deliver a file of the exact same name the file delivered by Content Manager will take precedence Restart Playback As discussed in Locally Integrated Content newly integrated content is used the next time it is referenced In some cases this could mean the new content is not used until a script loops for example To force an immediate restart of playback use the RestartPlayback method implemented inside the Scala Player To restart the player engine from VBScript use Set obj CreateObject Scala InfoPlayer5 obj RestartPlayback lf the Player is not running the CreateObject will fail so you should plan to trap that error From Python use import scalas scala5S InfoPlayer5 RestartPlayback Check for New Plans Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 224 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The Player Transmission Client can be asked to check for new plans via a COM interface To check for new plans use Set obj CreateObject Scala InfoNetwork result obj CheckPlanNow If the Player Transmission Client is not running the CreateObject will fail so you should plan to trap that error From Python use import scalas scala5S InfoNetwork CheckPlanNow Accessing Player Variables and Metadata A number of Player and Channel va
104. 015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 220 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Presenting the Local XML File Once the Original Feed has been read filtered sorted and scrubbed and any related files fetched and placed locally the Fetcher needs to e Create an XML file that follows the form supported by the Data Source module e Use local file paths for any related files it fetched in place of the original URLs e Place that XML file as the Local XML File via locally integrated content Local XML File Revision Handling The Locally Integrated Content feature automatically handles revisioning meaning the ability to provide a new revision of the same file By using the Locally Integrated Content feature the Fetcher can update the Local XML File without worrying that Player is currently using this file Once Player is finished with the older revision of the Local XML File it will automatically switch to the newer revision and the older revision will be cleaned up Cleanup of Related Files For most data sources related files are similar to those in a news feed In the case of a news feed the associated pictures would typically be supplanted by a new set of pictures rather than by new revisions of the same old picture file names so using Locally Integrated Content would not take care of cleaning up no longer needed related files The Fetcher must
105. 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 b Media Item Name Name of the script currently being published Skip Cleanup Skips a step at the end of publishing which cleans up old files d Protect Media from Editing Adds a password to prevent the published version of the script from being edited by someone else with a copy of Designer e Advanced Options Extra settings controlling whether fonts and transitions are included with the published script It is generally recommended that you do not change these options f Remember Media Item Folder in Target Chooses whether or not to save the Media Item Folder in the target definition so it is already entered the next time you publish All other settings are remembered but this one is optional g Remember Target As Lets you choose a name for the target that is easy to remember e g Main Office Content Manager 9 To complete Publishing click the Publish button If you are publishing to a local or shared folder and there is another script of the same name in the publish folder a dialog will appear asking whether you want to delete the contents and continue publishing or abort If you see dialog click OK You must be sure to check the licensing requirements for any fonts you use The TrueType fonts included with Scala Designer are freely re distrioutable for any production you create but only for non commercial purposes TrueType fonts which you acquire from other sources ma
106. 23 04 09 23 or 21 23 9 23 04 or 21 23 04 9 23 or 21 23 Page 197 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation 100 101 102 TimeFormat Variable syntax Timing CustomTimeFormatString hh mm ss 12 hour am pm with leading zeroes with seconds hh mm 12 hour am pm with leading zeroes no seconds hh mm ss 12 hour am pm no leading zeroes with seconds hh mm 12 hour am pm no leading zeroes no seconds Windows time format with seconds from WindowsRegional and Language Options control panel Windows time format no seconds from WindowsRegional and Language Options control panel Windows time format customized using Timi ng CustomTimeFormatString String Timing CustomTimeFormatString http docs scala com display D1100 09 23 04 am 0r09 23 04 pm 09 23 am 0r09 23 pm 9 23 04 am or9 23 04 pm 9 23 am or 9 23 pm Used to format the time when TimeFormat is set to 102 See Windows KB 307938 for Windows date format notation Timing CustomTimeFormatString Variable syntax WeekdayFormat Integer WeekdayFormat The WeekdayFormat variable controls the time format used when evaluating the Weekday variable See also Timing Uppercase Accepted values are Value 0 1 2 3 100 101 WeekdayFormat Variable syntax Timing Uppercase Meaning Localized long form weekday Localized short form weekday English long form weekday English short form weekday Windows Long weekday form from Wind
107. Add Oval Creates an Oval inside a boundary box that can be drawn out with the mouse Add Line Creates a diagonal Line inside a boundary box that can be drawn out with the mouse Add Streaming Video clip Requests input of the Streaming Video URL Add Web clip Opens a dialog that requests input of the Web URL Add TV Clip Adds a Clip that shows the display of an attached TV Tuner type video source as controlled by the TV Tuner Module Add a Flash Clip Element Use the Add File option to select a clip Adding Elements using Drag and Drop When working in Page View Designer can add elements to a page by using Windows drag and drop feature Dragging the icon for a graphics file into the Page View canvas will add that file as a clip animclip or movieclip You can also add sound and text files in the same way They are added to the page as sound events or text elements after any existing elements and will appear at the bottom of the Page view List panel If you drag an icon for a type of file which is unrecognized or cannot be added to an Designer page into the Page view canvas you will see a message stating that it cannot be added Add a Clip Element Designer can import and separately position almost any image available as a graphic file even animations In Designer any graphic image placed on a page is referred to as a clip which is an independent element that can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background To be
108. Charis Pea Se ag and ek Wd decd ain E A E E 49 12 2 sing the File Menu in Main VIEW icc t G8 car he et anos ala E E wee Rane tated tee Moca ee aoe wage anew es 49 122k CONECING Ae SCIDU axtiahaiw iuted Waited e tates eA Gata tate t ned ada E ame ese Ga take 50 t222 Sing the Edit Men MANNIE eie a r A gate dade A E eer RR A E Maca eer ed cae a Rego aE ea 51 1 2 2 3 Using the Add Menu in Main View icscec tate tek teeatwed bbe btek ada deed baie teks ame tee hehe teks 51 1 2 2 4 Using the View Menu in Main View seca 3k coe keew aaa dane kan tated te Mana kaa edge ate weeks 52 1 2 2 5 Using the Tools Menu in Main View cc aie eked eh bate ek pada deed behr wks aaa bee ada te ky 52 1220 1 USing tne MONEE EAO sa tuceatut a Enn Sneek Geeta wie ee Magee whee ahaa eeke 53 i222 Using he Spell Gnecker ooreet iia uaa ad dana tok taka hed E E eae one Ge be ee 54 Tae 2 IO SSIGNIESR TOOL COUONS sero og ares acc Seater tee a Reap tan og tices a ada ae sR ad ag dhe iS Medal ate ee ute ts aaa tee Sa 56 1 2 2 6 Using the Help menu in Main View 20 0 cc nnn nn ten ttt e eet eens 60 14233 Columns EXisnSiOn MOGUIES circa oui A a EN E E a8 E na eka E ee tes Naat eae Begin eee get 61 Mees NOe 2 NUIT onrera ee tel Peet Gack Soa Mae Chae x eee Ss ee tigre Sg Micaela hs Bee ace gees So a Can ae nae eee aes Gee A ar 62 12o 2 NIME oh eco cat es acest Ng gs Nc ects Aa Gh iid etch te Stn eN tee a a et hs Mc Si he Ii es Suse Dee N Moher 62 Me se ACKNOWL hace A cic e
109. Content Manager for a 1920 x 1080 Channel might have the following frames Frame Resolution Aspect Ratio Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 36 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Main 1600 x 900 16 9 Sidebar 320 x 900 16 45 Crawl 1920 x 180 32 3 Remember that content created in the same aspect ratio can easily be played in either a frame or the full screen using Scala scaling properties without having to re author the content Create a New Script In this example you will create a 1920 x 1080 script for a full screen display 1 Click on the New button or select New from the File pull down menu 2 You should now see the Script Properties dialog Choose whether you want to author in landscape or portrait mode Select one of the preset resolutions such as 1920 x 1080 or type your own dimensions and then click OK 3 You now have an empty script and you can start composing your production Main View Toolbar Open Open You can easily open an existing or saved script file while in the Main View 1 In the Main View click Open which will open the Windows File dialog 2 Navigate to the folder on your hard drive containing the desired script 3 Scroll through the files in the list box that appears then double click on that name or select the script and click OK Thumbnails of the script you have just opened will appear
110. Control Crawl Design Table Appearance Position Misc Design Text Appearance Position Misc Field Entry Field Design Box Appearance Position Misc Design Oval Appearance Position Misc Design Line Appearance Position Misc Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 96 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Design TV Clip Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Process Video Design Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Process Video Streaming Video Clip Design Web Clip Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Process Web Clip Control Design Flash Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Process Flash Control Clip Understanding the Design Panel Tabs Panel Tab Contains Options That Appearance Can be applied to the element Position Control how elements are positioned on the page Misc Do not fit on other tabs including options to save and reset default values Chroma Key Let you make a particular Clip color transparent Process Allow you to change the appearance of Clips These changes affect the rendering of the images only not the underlying files and can easily be undone Video Assist in the playback of Anim Clips and Movie Clips Crawl Control Field Web Clip Control Flash Control Image Type Image Settings Allow the control of aspects of a Text Crawl element Define text entry characteristics of the Text Field element A
111. FT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the Oval s bounding box handles Size can also be adjusted in the Design Oval Panel s Position Tab e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the Oval s width and height radii using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust the width or height radii and using the opposite side as the anchor point SHIFT dragging a corner handle will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height radii and maintain the original aspect ratio of the Oval using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point SHIFT dragging a side handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the Oval using the opposite side as the anchor point CTRL dragging a corner handle resizes the width and height radii of the Oval from the Center CTRL dragging a side handle resizes the Oval from the Center in both directions of the side selected SHIFT CTRL dragging a corner or side handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the Oval simultaneously adjusting the width and height You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the se
112. Fat ERS e Chroma Key Controls that let you select a particular Movie Clip color and make it transparent 1em rm a n am e Process Enables real time color processing of the Clip during playback a kbi e Video Enables the clip to be trimmed in duration and loop control Design Text Box Panel The Design Text Box Panel is shown when a Text Box Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to Adjust Normal and minimum font sizes face color or fill type Set Typographical controls the In and Out transitions for the element Apply Color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element Add Inline images The Design Text Box Panel is accessed by Adding a new Text Box element Selecting a text element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Text Box Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page Mr lt 3 eae rrr I Fu e g mu ie mma ee E a ee eis ad T I Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 99 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com displ
113. Flash and ScalaScript Passing Data Into Flash The FlashClip and Flash commands support a FlashVars parameter that lets you pass one or more named variables and their values into the Flash clip For example FlashClip 100 50 test swf FlashVars foo l amp bar Hello would set the Flash variable foo to 1 and the variable bar to Hello Waiting for Flash Many Flash clips are designed to loop forever Scala playback does not wait for any infinitely looping media to finish because such media is Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 217 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 designed to never finish For linear movie like SWF files Scala playback can detect when the Flash has finished playing which lets you add such clips to a Content Manager playlist and playback will advance at the end of such a Flash clip Likewise such linear SWF files can be added in Designer and you can set the number of loops and the wait option and things work as expected i e the same as if using a video file More complex SWF files especially those that are driven by ActionScript rather than a timeline can make it hard for Scala playback to detect the true end of playback This is why Designer defaults newly added Flash clips to infinite looping which effectively lets the Flash clip play for as long as it wants Same as in a br
114. For example you can use Designer to Design and publish content for digital signage networks Engage your customers with an interactive customer experience Make advertising more compelling increase sales and grow your business Inform your patrons of the many services your business has available Distribute news and publicize products and events on your corporate information channel Because Designer productions can be transmitted and updated through the Internet up to the minute information can reach all your sites almost instantly The time and expense of sending people or bulky media to each site when the displays need to change is a thing of the past And your training and production costs for creating productions and managing a Designer installation are low thanks to Scala s easy to use graphical user interface The key to a successful production is to think about your audience and how and where they will interact with the content you create With Designer your can create productions that be displayed on a wide variety of display types of setups including but not limited to large format screens video walls outdoor billboards complex monitor arrangements Additional Introduction Topics The Primer section covers the essentials for working with Designer Installing Designer will help you to set up your version of Designer Getting Started is a simple walk though of using Designer to create a simple script through to publishing th
115. Function syntax Substring String Substring String S Integer P Integer N Return substring of S starting at position P containing N characters P should be in the range 1 Length S lf N gt 1 Length S P return as many characters as possible If P gt Length S return an empty string Substring Function syntax Length Integer Length String S Return the number of characters in S Length Function syntax Search Integer Search String S Integer P String T If Tis a substring of S starting at a position gt P return the position of the first occurrence of T within S else return 0 Search Function syntax Code Integer Code String S Return the ANSI Latin 1 code of the first character in the string S If Sis empty return 0 Code Function syntax Char String Char Integer C Return a one character string consisting of the ANSI Latin 1 character defined by the code C Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 189 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Char Function syntax Unicode Integer Unicode String S Return the Unicode code of the first character in the string S If Sis empty return 0 Unicode Function syntax Unichar String Unichar Integer C Return a one character string consisting of the Unicode character defined by the code C Unichar
116. G PNG GIF TIFF BMP H 264 MPG WMV SWF or AVI The Page View After choosing a background you will see the Page View where you can add elements from the Add pull down menu then edit their attributes using the Design panel at the bottom of the window Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 24 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The toolbar at the top of the window provides easy access to common functions Add Imports a photo graphic or animation onto the page The Add pull down menu lets you add additional types of elements Cut Copy Paste Standard cut copy and paste commands The Edit pull down menu has more tools for editing elements Undo Redo Undoes the last change made to the page Use Redo to cancel the effect of the last Undo Zoom Allows the user to change the sizing of the panel to preset percentages or to Fit Screen or Full Screen options Element Goes to the Element panel for the type of element you have selected giving control over color scale opacity etc for text clips animclips text crawls and drawing objects line box oval Background Goes to the Background panel where you set attributes for the background image and resolution e Palette Goes to the Palette panel where you set the selection of available colors for text shadow outline etc e List Goes to the List panel where you see
117. HER DailyET variable syntax WEATHER DewPt String WEATHER DewPt WEATHER DewPt variable syntax WEATHER HeatIindex String WEATHER Heat Index WEATHER HeatIndex variable syntax WEATHER InsideHumidity String WEATHER InsideHumidity WEATHER InsideHumidity variable syntax WEATHER InsideTemp String WEATHER InsideTemp WEATHER InsideTemp variable syntax WEATHER OutsideHumidity String WEATHER OutsideHumidity WEATHER OutsideHumidity variable syntax WEATHER OutsideTemp Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 208 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 String WEATHER OutsideTemp WEATHER OutsideTemp variable syntax WEATHER Rain String WEATHER Rain WEATHER Rain variable syntax WEATHER UV String WEATHER UV WEATHER UV variable syntax WEATHER WindChill String WEATHER WindChill WEATHER WindChill variable syntax WEATHER WindDirection String WEATHER WindDirection WEATHER WindDirection variable syntax WEATHER WindSpeed String WEATHER WindSpeed WEATHER WindSpeed variable syntax Windows Scripting Introduction The Windows Scripting Module lets you extend playback behavior by connecting a ScalaScript to additional code you create in your favorite scripting language This can be used for advanced control and customization data integration etc Windows Scripting
118. Hold the mouse pointer over the button icons to get tool tip information about which state each icon represents Both F12 and the button icons are available in any Design menu Most of the options in the Button Appearance and Action tabs can be applied independently to each of a button s states Toggle Buttons The states possible for Toggle buttons are somewhat different from those of Push buttons They are always in either an Off or On state Additionally for a four state button both the Off and On states can have a Highlight state as well as a Normal state A Toggle button is used to switch a logical variable between its two possible values on and off This makes it easy for a script to accept and respond to Yes No kinds of input from the viewer Unlike a Push button a Toggle button remains in its selected state after being clicked so that its value is obvious They can have either two or four visual states and require a Logical Boolean variable to be assigned to it The Variable List panel appears when first creating the Toggle button You can either choose an existing variable or create a new one as required 2 State Normal On and Off A two state Toggle button can be either Off appearing like a Push button in the Normal state or On appearing like a Push button in the Select state It does not respond to the mouse pointer until clicked on Selecting it triggers a change in the variable s value 4 State Normal On and Off Highlighte
119. Install Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners http docs scala com display D1100 Page 13 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Soup E m foods bo begin installing Sool Dagny on pour T Cid Orta bo continue with the inetalation of dick Bakit you wart fo resin or Cees Lage Wea CoProgram Fies eB Scale Designer ipai Loratan Cipra Fles Geaa pert matal Pp than 2 7 9 13 Installing You will see a progress bar like the one below while the installation happens Meas mait while Setup instil Scala Desgner on pour computer C Pray an Files Bea als ge choses he SP eave elie ere 14 Finish Page http docs scala com display D1100 This screen will given the option to View Update Notes and or start Scala Designer now Once you have un selected your choices click Finish Completing the Scala Designer Setup Wizard Se hup haa Greed miak Scala Demper na year computer The appicaion may ba launched Gy selecting he nesia DENI i Dick Minish io et Sou SCALAR E her she Updabe Motes CHE SE A l i giat gcas Deriger nce Wea Ss CELA com License Activation You will need a license file in order to run Designer This is an XML file generated by Scala that enables the software to run using a particular USB dongle It also contains information such as additional features or EX Modules that can be activated according to your license Co
120. Opens the Grid Editor where you can adjust the size origin and Snap setting of the layout grid This option is explained in greater detail in the Us ing Grid Points section Edit Guide Lines Opens the Guide Lines Editor where you can add adjust and delete layout guide lines This option is explained in greater detail in the Using Guide Lines section Save Element and Page Defaults Lets you save the current settings on the Design Panels as the default for new pages Restore Defaults Restores the default settings for new pages Options Opens the Options dialog which can be used to customize Scala Designer and control script performance This option is explained in greater detail in the Designer Tool Options section Using Grid Points Turning on the Show Extras option in the View pull down menu will reveal a grid of points representing the current grid settings Show Extras also shows any guides if set The default is a 10 x 10 pixel grid with the origin point at position 0 0 that is the top left corner of the page Turning on the grid will not cause elements to move or change size Grid Options You can adjust the size and origin of the grid in the Grid Editor panel Click Edit Grid from the Tools pull down menu to open the Grid Editor panel The Show Grid option is automatically turned on Within this dialog you can adjust the grid either graphically or numerically Re sizing the Grid The smaller the grid
121. Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the Options popup Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 106 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the outline e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the outline the level as well as the direction of the gradient e Allow Show Through Control whether the Shadow is visible through the non opaque and or transparent portions of the Face Outline Underline Area or Line e Offset Control the direction and depth of the drop shadow e Softness Adjusts the softness of the outline e Presets Glass Softer and Normal are preset combinations of softness and offset Backdrop Specify a colored or textured backdrop box behind the selected element Enable Disable the Backdrop The Backdrop is disabled by default but will show a color chip and the options popup button when enabled Fill Chip To change the backdrop color or texture click on the color chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the Options popup Opacity Set the overall opacity of the outline Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the outline the level as well as the direction of the
122. PEG video decoder library for improved performance and compatibility Updated for the video decoders are now included in the Player and Designer installers there is no longer a separate video codecs updater If for some reason you need the older behavior on a system that already has the MainConcept codecs installed use the MMOS INI setting DSHOWRENDER_EnableFFMPEG 0 When playing back H 264 or WMV VC 1 video on most systems with AMD or NVIDIA graphics hardware accelerated video is now used This results in better image quality and performance combined with lower power consumption This new capability requires Windows 7 or newer To Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 19 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 force software based video decode use the MMOS INI setting Al lowDXVA 0 Most graphics hardware has a resolution limit for hardware accelerated video beyond which things may not work or may even crash By default we limit hardware accelerated video to 1920x1088 or smaller If you Know your graphics card can go higher use the MMOS INI setting MM3D_MaxWidthForDXVA2 width MM3D_MaxHeightForDXVA2 height When Video files are not recognized by the new playback subsystem the system will attempt to play it using other Windows codecs This may be useful in rare or obscure cases In normal systems where you have good control over t
123. Page 59 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Weekday Format Weekday Format has 15 primary options using different combinations of separators leading zero and day month year order and a custom format The following Table shows the Weekday formats available and the value of the Scala System Variable weekdayformat Weekday Format Weekdayformat value Use Installed language Full 0 Use Installed language Abbreviated 1 Use English Full 2 Use English Abbreviated 3 Use Windows Regional Options Full 100 Use Windows Regional Options Abbreviated 101 Save To save these settings as your defaults and exit the Timing dialog click OK Click Cancel or the dialog close button to discard any unwanted changes Launch Module The Launch Module allows a Scala Designer script to launch other applications and commands under script control This capability may open security issues and possibly make the playback machine vulnerable to possibly damaging software and therefore care should be taken when changing this setting Security This drop list contains the three options Option Explanation Warn When Opening Default choice which causes a cautionary dialog to be displayed whenever you open a script that contains Launch events Use this choice if you may be opening scripts from sources that cannot be trusted Disallow Opening Prevents the opening or authoring of scripts that contain Launch events
124. RTL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original lf a clip was copied from an external package and added by pasting from the clipboard the Clip button will read lt embeddeds indicating there is no underlying file This can bloat your script file and on saving as you will also see a dat file associated to the sca file Additional Keyboard Shortcuts x Flips the selected Element horizontally around a vertical axis y Flips the selected Element upside down around a horizontal axis r Rotates the Element clockwise in 15 degree increments SHIFT r Rotates the Element counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Working with Off Page Elements Designer has the ability to show off page elements which is useful when laying out graphics or text that overlap the page boundaries The settings are found by selecting from the menu Tools gt Options gt Authoring There are three settings that control off page elements Element Function Show Off Page Elements If this option is selected the elements extending outside the page boundaries will fully show in the Page View If this option is off then elements will be clipped to the page boundaries Border Adjust the color of the 1 p
125. Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 169 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 commands and stuff here The outside block of a script is known as the main block of the script All scripts must have a main block and all statements in the script must appear inside of the main block All scripts must begin with the text ScalaScript file identifier The minimal script is lScalaScripr This is the minimal ScalaScript script Note that nothing is allowed to appear before the ScalaScript file identifier no comments blank lines etc This script doesn t do anything Only comments white space and the file identifier may appear outside of the main block of a script The If Parameter Can be added to many commands to make the command conditional on an expression For example a text element might be Text 20 20 Always shown By adding an If parameter you can make the element s presence conditional Text 20 20 Shown sometimes If mycondition See also the If command Event Names Labels are used to name events cmd_label command command with label my_event event end block with label Named events allow references to be made to specific commands or blocks They are primarily used for execution control but can also be used for element transitions That is the script may Goto an eve
126. Serial Close Function syntax Serial Send Sends the specified data string to the specified serial port that you previously opened with Serial Open Serial Send Function syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 203 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Serial Receive Lets you receive data from a previously opened serial port You can specify an optional string to wait for before receiving data and an optional end string that denotes the end of the sequence to wait for or the maximum number of characters to read Serial Receive Function syntax TV Tuner EX Module Functions TVTuner CurrentChannelName String TVTuner CurrentChannelName String deviceName Returns a string containing the current channel name for the specified capture device or an empty string if it cannot be determined TVTuner CurrentChannelName Function syntax TVTuner GetVolume Integer TVTuner GetVolume String deviceName Returns an integer containing the current volume for the specified capture device or zero if it cannot be determined TVTuner GetVolume Function syntax Extension Variables Billing Module Variabes Billing PlayerName String Billing PlayerName Billing PlayerName Variable syntax FilelO Module Variables FilelO Status Boolean FileloO Status FilelO Status variable syntax Queue EX Module
127. Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Start Time in HH MM SS hh Enables the Start Time value control allowing you to adjust the start time for the Streaming Video Start Time control The default is 00 00 00 00 the beginning of the Streaming Video Select a value and adjust it End Time in HH MM SS hh Enables the End Time value control allowing you to adjust the end time for the Streaming Video End Time control The default is the Streaming Video length indicating that the movie plays to the end Select a value and adjust it Loops Sets the number of times the Streaming Video Background should play The default value is one 1 Type Flash Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 120 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Flash Backgrounds have both a Face layer upper and Backdrop layer lower File Shows the current media asset being used and can be change by clicking the name to bring up the file dialog Face A Flash Background can have options applied to the face by selecting the Face button Backdrop A Flash Background can have a Backdrop Fill Type options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Loops Specifies the number of times the Flash Background should play Flash Variables Lets you specify a list of variables and their initial values that will passed to the Flash background file through the Flash
128. TE Goto Sequence Resources UpdateDisplay Text 10 10 Timing Seconds The main execution will transfer to the resource when Timing Seconds changes That is the sequence list will be stopped and the execution will jump to UpdateDisplay OnNotification can be used to react to environment variables that change asynchronously including device notification variables Other examples of asynchronous signals include button presses and hotkeys Lexical Rules When parsing tokens from a ScalaScript file the parser will gather the maximum possible number of characters to form the token which mean the next token will not begin until the end of the previous token has been found The only exception to this rule involves expressions that contain a minus sign immediately followed by a number If the longest possible tokens are taken then x and 3 are found on the right hand side of the assignment However this will actually parse to Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 156 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The end of the current token is usually identified by finding a character that is not allowed within the current token In some cases comments and strings the current token will only end when a specific character sequence is found Comments Comments are used when hand authoring scripts They allow the autho
129. The installer will run Designer for you the first time you use it but when you later want to open the program select the Windows Start Menu and choose All Programs gt Scala Designer gt Scala Designer Useful Tip While you are in the Start menu notice that in addition to the program there are shortcuts to the Linked Content folder the Logs folder and several links to Scala s Web site for your convenience Activating Designer In addition to the USB key Designer must be activated in order to operate If you have not activated Designer the following message will appear You must activate Designer with a license file You can install the license file now or choose to defer installing the file for up to 30 days If you select Get New License File Online Designer will retrieve it from the Scala license server You will have the option to save a copy of your license file in the My Documents folder Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 22 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 You can also select Have It if you have a copy of your license file or defer by selecting Get it Later Welcome to Scala Designer When the program opens and before you begin to create a new production you will see this message You can view the Getting Started Guide or to start using Designer click OK The Designer Interface W
130. The number of folders listed can be set in Too Is Options Closes the current script Clicking on this button brings up a dialog asking if you want to save changes Choose Yes to save and close the script or No to close without saving Choose Cancel to leave the script open Closes all currently open scripts For each script with unsaved modifications indicated by the next to the script name you will be asked if you want to save changes Choose Yes to save and close the script or No to close without saving Choose Cancel to leave the script open Saves the current script if it has previously been saved using its current name and location without opening the File dialog If the script has not been previously saved the File dialog opens for you to choose a location and script name The File dialog opens for you to choose a location and script name even if it has previously been saved Saves all open scripts Those scripts that have previously been saved will be updated under their current name and location without opening the File dialog which will open for you to choose a location and script name for those scripts that have not been previously saved Opens the on disk version usually the last version saved to the disk Discards all unsaved changes and cannot be undone A warning dialog will be shown before this action is taken Selects a publish location and opens the Publish to Scala Enterprise Content Manager option Selects
131. Variables Q Call Integer Q Call Q Call variable syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 204 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Q Counter Integer Q Counter Q Counter variable syntax Q Counter N Integer Q CounterN Q Counter1 through Q Counter9 are supported Q CounterN variable syntax Q Letter String Q Letter Q Letter variable syntax Q NewQueueType Integer Q NewQueueType Q NewQueueType variable syntax Q NewServiceType Integer Q NewServiceType Q NewServiceType variable syntax Q NewTicket Integer Q NewTicket Q NewTicket variable syntax Q NewTicketLabel String Q NewTicketLabel Q NewTicketLabel variable syntax Q NewWaitTime Integer Q NewWaitTime Q NewWaitTime variable syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 205 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Q NumDigits Integer Q NumDigits Q NumDigits variable syntax Q NumWaiting Integer Q NumWaiting Q NumWaiting variable syntax Q Print Integer Q Print Q Print variable syntax Q QueueType Integer Q QueueType Q QueueType variable syntax Q ServiceType Integer Q ServiceType Q ServiceType variable syntax Q ShowLetter Boolean Q ShowLetter Q ShowLetter variable syntax Q Ticket In
132. Vars method e Interactive Enables the Flash Background to receive input controls from an input device such as a touch screen e Mode Sets the Window Mode property of the Flash Background to either Opaque or Transparent e Quality Sets the quality of playback for the Flash Background Changing the Face options Selecting the Face button opens up the Face options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Changing the Backdrop options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following Corner Styles Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil Set the overall Opacity level Opacity gradient Sets the number of times the Flash Background should play The default value and the recommended setting is infinite Simpler Flash Clips do work well when you specify the number of loops More complex Flash Clips can interfere with the end of loop detection and may end up finishing prematurely or loop due to behaviors designed into the Flash Clip itself Flash Variables Lets you specify a list of variables and their initial values that will passed to the Flash Background through the FlashVars method e Each entry in the list is of the form lt variable name gt lt value gt e When supplying multiple values separate them wit
133. World amp var2 300 Quality Specifies the quality of the flash playback Each of the levels of quality has its advantages e Low Favors playback speed over appearance and never uses anti aliasing e Auto Low Favors speed and begins with anti aliasing turned off but if the CPU is powerful enough it will dynamically switch to a higher quality and turn on anti aliasing e Auto High Starts with higher quality with anti aliasing turned on but will dynamically turn off anti aliasing and cut back the quality to maintain reasonable playback performance e Medium Applies some anti aliasing and does not smooth bitmaps e High Favors appearance over playback speed and always applies anti aliasing It uses bitmap smoothing when there is no animation e Best Provides the best display quality without regard for playback performance All output is anti aliased and all bitmaps are smoothed Wait Controls the progress of the script e When On it prevents the script from advancing to the next event in the page s sequence until the current animation finishes e When Off it allows the next event to begin as soon as the animation has started Loops Sets the number of times the Flash Clip should play The default value and also the recommended setting is infinite Simpler Flash Clips do work well when you specify the number of loops More complex Flash Clips can interfere with the end of loop detection and may end up finishing prematurely or loop d
134. XML element can be relative to rootfolder Here is an example xmitext string lt content name NewsTemplate sca gt lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt lt content gt An example VBScript invocation might look like this Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 237 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Dim obj errormsg numthumbs Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer obj GeneratePreviewThumbnails C rootfolder lt content name NewsTemplate scb gt lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt lt content gt wee thumbnad long S12 384 TM numnchumMbs errornsG If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg Else MsgBox Generated amp numthumbs amp thumbnail s End If Set obj Nothing Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 238
135. Z Redo Ctrl Y Edit Page Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Del Select All Ctrl A Group Ctrl G Ungroup Ctrl H Bind to Data Explanation Reverses the last change that you made to the script Reverses the effect of the last Undo operation restoring an editing change you had made Allows you to make edits to the script Removes selected items from the screen and places them on the clipboard Adds selected items to the clipboard Takes the most recently cut or copied item s from the clipboard into the sequence of pages after the selected page Removes selected items permanently Deleti ng items from a script affects only the script and has no effect on the files an item may refer to Selects all pages in the script Groups all selected pages together into a single group It can be nested can contain sub groups Dissolves a group into its constituent pages Binds the current page or group to a Data field Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 51 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Using the Add Menu in Main View Fie gds AG View Tok Hap o Add Page Erom Media File y Hew Add Page From Recent Media File Uist Add Page From Recent Media Falder Add Plain Page Add Special Event Add Streaming Video Page The Add Menu has a number of functions available to assist you during t
136. a Gip Element seis LPs sp te es este ce Be tach a ep Skee tea ca a ta nag lt Ms le a i et te Sr ae Sant 80 13 2 Adda MOVIE Clip Element reece id wk eka tate WE ea ok tata tet aA eka teeta teks 82 Eo edigo PROAC a Special EVENE aasi ae sae ae eae ste ce civ cee a ca sn a ce i a te aes de utes tes ck ar dee 83 Wd Ora TOT EIGIIO I destine dicted Salk hee a d enc goes aap ene Se ge ars ae Ae ene as tere aoe Gur Sao ene ee 83 Toile Add ae lex BOX Elemen noei Aa E dt Nd GoM eka E A E Naat aed ae btee ahaa twine 84 1371 16 Adda Text Crawl Elemenk rennt iV hee oats tA Gate tata thet aA E A E tee Ga bees 85 123 1217 Adda Text entry FERT Elemen ts S058 cer cin cree e Sapte A E athe neha a eter hye Maater ei ed ee dae ee ete 86 123712120 AUG a Tape Element Anka de e tn bw hapa eh a WA ea Rahat aA kaa tee Ga be ee 87 Tie 2 PROC QS OX Element Sir ties crac tg Wd ie a pcs oc Sa esa a oie i a at gh deuce tes aa er 88 13a OAdG a Oval Element vaca nur iuted Nn wk eee eh A cao Ratatat bale E E tee oa bene 89 ko kkil Adda Ene EMEN eee me ee ee a ee eee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee 89 1 3 1 1 12 Add a Streaming Video Clip Element sient ieee a eh GRA we Ake bee POA Ye eos toes baw ew ey 90 Ta ldo Add Wep GIP Elemen Avent peed daiwa oeadete i cad eo eka E A E ated ae btee aha NN 91 ka lekis Add TV GHB EIGING IN crese sce Sale Hc a eed E sano hoped os cite aris Pa Agee Ok Ae Meter eo aes Gee ao ay hen 92 1233121 lovAddsa Fash CID EIGMECNL Snccsiddcatiwt tow tute
137. a Designer or wherever your Scala product s are installed Normally each installation folder can have its own MMOS INI file with its own settings It can be UTF 8 in which case it should begin with the UTF 8 byte order mark which consists of the hexadecimal values EF BB BF It begins with the optional byte order mark followed by the word Scala as shown inside square brackets followed by one or more lines of the form OptionName value Anything after a semi colon is treated as a comment and is ignored by the Scala applications Here is a simple example Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 16 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Scala Open on the desktop in a borderless window DESKTOP Borderless 1 Force the window to be topmost always DESKTOP_TopMost 1 and so on You may find you already have an MMOS INI file If you do you may wish to review which settings are already in force But remember anything after a semi colon is a comment and does not have any effect If you do not have an MMOS INI file it is a simple matter to make one in any text editor such as Notepad i Windows 7 and Newer Note Under Windows 7 and up if you try to create files inside the Program Files folder Windows will create a per user shadow copy inside the Windows Virtual Store Depending on your system configuration and user rights
138. a file Additional Keyboard Shortcuts e x Flips the selected Clip horizontally around a vertical axis e y Flips the selected Clip upside down around a horizontal axis e r Rotates the clip clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the clip counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Exporting Clip You can save a still image of a movie clip based on its current start position with your size crop and style changes simply by choosing Export fro m the Edit drop down menu In the File dialog choose a location and enter a name for the processed clip If several clips are selected they will be exported as one with any additional transparent areas and the resulting file is saved as a PNG file Add a Special Event A Special Event within a Page enables you to add events to a script which may not be associated with an element such as setting the value of a variable or changing the flow of the script within the page based on variable values To create a Special Event go to the Add drop down and choose Add Special Event This opens the Design List Panel and adds a line that contains the Special Event It is automatically assigned lt untitled gt as the name of the event As with any element you can click on the No button and edit the name in the Element Control panel You can then click the Timing Input Variable Sound or other Module columns to specify the action of the special event Special Events are often used to
139. a listing of all the elements on the current page The List panel is used to determine the sequence of events and object layering e Preview Plays back the current page of the presentation e Main Returns to the Main view There are additional options in the pull down menus Entering Text The most basic element is text You can click anywhere in the page and immediately start typing Each time you click on the background you create a new text element which you can drag to a new location on the page at any time To create a text element 1 Click anywhere on the page 2 Type your name or something like Welcome to Scala Useful Tip Pressing Enter will move the cursor to the next line and also create a new text element Pressing Shift Enter will move the cursor to the next line but keep within the same text element Text Boxes Text boxes are useful when you want to confine text to a specific area on the page and be able to align text within that area To add a Text box select it from the Add menu Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 25 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 An empty text box appears on the screen and this can be resized to fit your needs Text Box has a definable minimum size of the font This will cause the font size to automatically adapt to fit within the Text Box providing all t
140. aa oa inane E E eee cee 23 ERSS PADI SANI r ice ox r aiea ne mente te ina A ge ene E ea ee R E eae eae eee ee era eee eee 32 11324 Olan and Archiving a SCPE is cacecogeaeedi tn hte wh a a teh tn Aca EE eae teed ahah gv hae tae eels etna ae ate ey 33 115320 DONG MOLE WIT DESINE tisena aE en Rd Od wie doen hae Spt aden E er ea eee Se Meee eee won ear 34 113320 GOUNG WG ateS Garas asx te yar Stee A tg eh eo aon aed depen hee A cate Pole Ra Rae pane aoa teen Rare ate ah eae ie ay 34 HZ VOT TE US Man AGW ciones tataa a a are sce eg pec ag edie hee ane anes aero ag Rech eae a Packer ees 34 122 MAI OOO AN soca oct tre cde hie eee utd hs Mate Beams tat a opted BoM Ble cot aa he Be a aged eet ee hace Bo ey cea 35 EAT Man View FOolbarINGW 2 ivutao Einte ea EAT E ted pete aN oe nna ate Gen NaS eee Hie mam en hare ees 36 W212 lal VIGW 1 OOID AN OPEN des eA a E a A oy ends atk cate ecards aa nae ast aia Sg eae a ten Rae Gages ok tg ele 37 121 3 Main View TOODI AV C55 ey fa ss Se et a Os ce ate gh ng cS aD de ces eae AS tars Sac aps Uae NCE alae rod hf Mate ec A de Saga 37 124 Wall VIEW Toobar AGG arnser eed Ses Maat Sele he eo eet een PRA ae ee eo nate aA eee he eee eee ae 38 1 2 14 1 Addingia Page Troma Media File A N dotwkvotwiutnshieN dow soe oat ewiate tao taka etree ease a teks 38 12 k42 Adding a Plain Background Paga ie hcden ekcardenadive deo een ae A det ena nase hea ean bated aoe hey 40 1 2 1 4 3Adding a Special Event Page Aus paka en EE tsa e
141. ables This makes it possible for you to create flexible powerful scripts that can adapt themselves to respond to a wide variety of audiences Your interactive button then could be anything from a cat illustration that meows when clicked to a catalog of product photos and text that a potential customer can browse for information Buttons are created and edited in the Design Buttons Panel where you work with unique button features They can be used to Go to other locations in the script Link sounds to buttons Specify hotkeys for buttons Set variables based on button activity Use custom mouse pointers Independently set options for various button states Although buttons have special features they are elements that can be manipulated just like other elements using wipes cut and paste and the other Design Panels You have all the Element Design Options open to you to make the element look the way you want Designer gives you great freedom to design your own buttons but you do not have to do so The Buttons Panel also gives you the option of choosing from a selection of predefined buttons and button backdrops supplied with the Scala Clipart Library which have matched images for the various states There are three types of buttons you can create e Push Buttons e Toggle Buttons e Radio Buttons The Design Buttons Panel and the Design Text Entry Field Panel pages discuss these buttons in greater detail Plan Before making y
142. acted upon when running the script There are several uses for disabling a page including e It is a page that holds elements you want to reuse e It is a page that needs to be suspended for some reason but you do not want to lose the original information e To add a comment to your script to aid clarity To disable a page 1 Click on the page s No Number button opening the Page Control Panel 2 Uncheck the Enabled button 3 Close the panel 4 The disable page now appear grayed out or blank To re enable a disabled page use the same technique above but make sure the Enabled button is checked The first graphical page is used to generate the thumbnail for the script when published to Content Manager even if that page is disabled Knowing this allows you to create a disabled page whose thumbnail more accurately reflects the script Grouping Pages To help you structure and organize a script Designer makes it possible to organize pages into groups This can be especially useful in large scripts where grouping pages will enable you to get a better overview and be easier to manage A group may include any number or combination of pages scripts or other groups of pages Whether the selected pages are are not listed consecutively in the Main View the group s position in the script will be that of the first page you select Similarly within the group pages are sequenced according to the order in which they were selected e Thumb
143. ademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 173 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Declaring One Variable To declare a single variable you would write Group Integer myvariable Declaring Several Variables To declare several variables of the same type you would write Group Integer myvariable another variable Declaring Array Variables You can make a single dimensional array using square brackets Group Integer myarray 10 External Variable Declarations If a variable foo is created by script A which calls script B as a subscript script B can see and use the variable foo too But if you load script B into Designer it won t know that foo is a variable nor what type it is To handle this use the External keyword Group External Integer foo This lets Designer recognize foo when it is isolated in script B At runtime if foo already exists because of script A then script B will attach to the same foo If you omit External then script B gets its own private variable foo and script A s copy remains untouchable by B Initializers in Variable Declarations A variable can be given an initial value called an initializer by enclosing that value in parentheses Group Integer myvariable 7 An initializer not an array size An initializer is similar to an assignment such as myvariable 7 and is evaluated at run time An initializer
144. age continuously in the crawl as is typically seen for news feeds but can also be used to create credit scrolls like those used at the end of television programs In addition to having the attention grabbing element of motion a Text Crawl is more powerful than a simple Text Element It will allow you to specify different types of source for the text process the text for display and define a window where the text can freely move The source for a Text Crawl can be contained in e File Text file e Expression Expression entered into the Text Expression field below the Text Source selector e Cued Expression Expression which can be updated via a cue signal You can design Text Crawl elements to become global allowing them to run over every page within the current script Creating a Text Crawl A text element consisting of the word Crawl will appear by default and will inherit the current set of text styles However unlike a normal text element it contains graphic handles on its dotted frame indicating that it can be resized Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 85 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 A graphical separator can be inserted between text crawl segments which are defined as an expression of a single line from a file For more information please see the Design Text Crawl Panel specifically the Crawl Cont
145. ages When you share a ScalaScript array variable the variable on the Windows Script side is a Collection object of variable objects How you access this depends on the language you are using Arrays in VBScript In VBScript you must explicitly the Value method when writing to a shared array variable When reading you do not need to explicitly use Value but in this example it is shown for consistency and clarity Read a shared array variable myVBScriptString The value of the shared value is amp sharedarray 4 Value Write to a shared array variable here we must explicitly use Value sharedarray 4 Value new_value Arrays in JScript For languages other than VBScript and Python you have to explicitly use the Item n method to access the nth entry of the array then the Valu Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 211 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation e method to get at its value Read a shared array variable http docs scala com display D1 100 var myJScriptString The value of the shared value is sharedarray Item 4 Value Write to a shared array variable sharedvariable Item 4 Value new_value Arrays in Python The Python COM interfaces map ScalaScript arrays to Python tuples a sequence of immutable Python objects This will allow you to directly read from a shared array using natural syntax However a Pyt
146. ala com display D1100 tekee Scala cib GCOMMANOS 04 dats caaniadatwuve matahard dtae dant aac ae ta Sasa pte ne eee Ce Pape ged ae Meee as 180 1 7 1 7 Core ScalaScript Functions and Variables sdadsi2cdnie et beta eee eee ed eek PA wk eae ee eee ees 188 lh kO EXTON SION Ir UNCTIONIS And VW AI SS 2 erected eae E E ceca EE arc aig eaten dar Wt a hae gh Aap heel een 199 Teh 2 WWII OWS Scripting MF OCLUICTIO IN retirent te Se Scat ee acd afte Senet a Set casa ards Seka Sg eal canes neared een ete ae Bee 209 1723 Windows ocripliing DOCUIMENTAUON 4 0 5 lt pgecen aAa EE N Sptane ea career ea ance EA a E Sperone aan 210 Erate oyen ags lt 25 S325 Seen oe Gea oe Aes eae eee Galen tote ets Said hee gtd we ae ee eee 215 1 7 5 Connecting HIML5 Web Clips and ScalaScript ccdsicie ota ged pemtatetiekeeee see ieteteeka ee tetetadateeas 217 127 O COnneCING Flash anc SCalaOCriDl srenti ee A acces watt naraatee Wah oe ele kha dardutas A E wae ees a ae eae 217 eer Dale Biver WOK OWS 1c So Bec Dae wh cece ae E ae oye Sh a eg toons ce cd hen aan hee Sch deg Mec enna ang ah Dosen ow tech er aris 218 Rro Dalta SOURCE CICHI ON srren ering dopey weit eet oh cree We wesc E seepage ceased Wa cakes oh areca sacha dig ened E E E A AE aed EO 218 1 4 9 Reporting Custom Warnings and Problems 240 eek mee spin ee ha E a aa Seta hi ee ak eee nd aol ah age en ney 221 150 10 LOCAIY mtegrated CONNIE verderaan ee Som cacy a carpet nl ath SN ae ce eran pen aoe we eas Gate eas ea
147. alaScript the file that is referenced will be published too and can be referenced by that variable Group FileNameString mypicture C Photos MyFace png Circle 20 myolchurey 24 ScriptNameString The ScriptNameString type is like FileNameString but if you use an initializer then when you publish a ScalaScript the file that is referenced will be published too as a subscript ResourceNameString The ResourceNameString behaves like a regular String but for a ScalaScript template it denotes a page within this script that would be replaced by a playlist within Content Manager Object Object variables contain references to certain script objects When you create an element such as Text Clip etc you can remember a reference to that element which you can later use in a WipeOut command OBJECT myhandle Text 20 20 Remember me Handle myhandle Stores a reference to this text element in myhandle WipeOut myhandle Wipe Cut Scope of Variables Environment Variables Added to the playback environment when EX modules are opened They are available to the script through the entire execution of the script Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 176 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 There is a minor exception to this rule that EX supplied environment variables are not available in
148. alog Fonts Lists all fonts used in the script Variables Lists all variables used in the script along with their Type Scope and Initial Value Scope and Initial value are allowed to be edited If an array variable is selected the Max Index can also be edited Closing a Script Click on the Close button in the script title bar to close your script If a script has unsaved changes an asterisk is shown in that script s tab in the Main View When you attempt to close a script that has been edited since you last saved it you will see a dialog box asking if you want to save changes to the script you have made e Click Yes in the dialog to save the script before closing it e Click No if you want to close the script discarding any changes to the script you made since you last saved e Click Cancel to leave the script open Quitting Designer To stop working in Designer and quit your current session click on the Close button in the Title Bar or double click the Designer icon on the left hand side of the Title Bar If you attempt to close Designer when an open script has been edited since your last save you will see a dialog box asking if you want to save the changes you made to your script e Click Yes in the dialog to save the script before closing the application e Click No if you want to close the application discarding any changes to the script you made since you last saved e Click Cancel if you do not want to close De
149. am Vera Sans T DE vew Tek Hep Add Page Erom Media File Add Fage From Recent Media File list Add Fage From Recent Media Falder Add Plain Fage Add Special Evert Add Streaming Video Fage el F ile List Word Wrap http docs scala com display D1100 Closes the active panel or script with which the button is associated In the Main View the Close button is located in the upper right corner of the application window and choosing it quits the application The other smaller Close button is associated with the script you are working with and choosing it closes the script When grouping pages this allows you to move up one level out of an open page group Lets you cycle through a series of values or change a value directly Click the arrows to go to the previous or next value or click in the text box between the arrows type a value and press Enter Some value controls have more than one value or more than one text box between the arrows Before using the arrows click in the text box you want to change Pop up list allowing a choice from a series of option values The Selector Button will facilitate access to other functions and panels If the pop up list shows option values the current selection is highlighted when you open the list To choose a value or function click on the Selector button then click on your desired choice Or click and hold the mouse button while moving the po
150. ame e When the whole Text Element is selected you will see a dashed rectangular selection frame any changes made in the Text Design Panel will affect the whole element Typing Text when the element is selected will replace all of the existing text e When highlighted in a different color any changes made using the Design Text Panel will only affect that Text Segment Typing Text when a segment is highlighted replaces that section of text In either case the selected text is now available to edit You can change the color apply a style delete it and so on The selection frame also indicates the availability of options which are only available to text elements such as applying a transition specifying a pause setting changing the alignment or dragging the text to move it Editing text is similar to using most word processors including cut copy paste and delete To add more text to the element position the text cursor as desired and start typing Unless you have turned off Word Wrap in the Design Text panel as you type the text will automatically wrap onto the next line but ALL the text typed will be considered as a single text Element Breaking Joining Text Elements If you want to create a New Text Element while typing press Enter which will move the Text Cursor to the next line and a new text element can then be created To break an Text Element into two position the Text Cursor and hit Enter Text after the Enter will start on the
151. ame button The page may also be selected by clicking on one of its other module buttons When selected the corresponding panel of each button s function will appear To select multiple pages in either List Mode or Thumbnail Mode Designer uses the same controls for multi section as many Windows based programs You may select pages listed consecutively in the panel or randomly positioned in the list The following are several reasons for selecting multiple pages e Copy and paste them into another script e Move them to another location in the script e Group them e Delete them e Collectively apply settings such as a transition or timing This enables you to save time and effort because it allows you to modify the settings for several pages by selecting the module button for the setting you wish to change for all selected pages Module panels do not need to be closed before opening another Select a different column to open its module panel Note that the order in which you select the pages is maintained when they are copied moved or grouped Moving Pages You can quickly revise a production by changing the order of the script s pages whether or not a page in the Main View represents a page a group of pages or a script e Thumbnail View Point to its thumbnail and drag it to a different position With the exception of the page number in the No column all of the information defined for the page will also be moved All other pages
152. an data field and its value lt integer name fieldname gt number lt integer gt An integer numeric data field and its value lt real name fieldname gt floating point number lt real gt A real floating point data field and its value lt filename name fieldname gt path to filename lt filename gt A filename data field and its value which is the full path to the file Here is an example xmitext string lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt C images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt This sets the text data field named Headline to Breaking News and the text data field named Body to Scala announces a major new software release and sets the filename data field named Photo toC images ScalaLogo png An example VBScript invocation might look like this Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 236 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Dim obj errormsg numthumbs Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer obj GeneratePreviewThumbnails C rootfolder NewsTemplate sca _ lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name
153. an option to set a bookmark to allow resuming playback from the point of interrupt For periodic scheduled events the location of the event in the script will dictate when the event may run For interrupt scheduled pages the location of the page in the script is irrelevant to when the event will run It does dictate which page will run after the interrupt scheduled page especially if the bookmarking feature is not used Timeslot Scheduling Is similar to interrupt scheduling however timeslots are more structured than exact interrupts since playback respects them when determining what to play This is true even if the exact start time was missed due to a down time if the segment is temporarily interrupted by other content Ti meslots are more structured than exact interrupts Playback respects them when determining what to play even if the exact start time was missed due to a down time or if the segment is temporarily interrupted by other content This means a script with a Timeslot schedule applied will interrupt the current running script at the beginning of the Timeslot period and will continue until the end of that period More details on setting schedules is discussed in the Schedule Panel Many of the important issues in scheduling are related to issues in timing Timing of events is relative and neither type of scheduling will adjust duration lengths transition speeds or other factors which control a production s pacing To make the
154. ance on various user interface elements See The F1 Key IS Your Friend section for more details Scala Script Dialog where you can pick a command function or system variable to get syntax help on Text Style Tags Syntax document describing Embedded Tags supported by Text and Text Crawl elements About Scala Designer About Box that shows the version copyright and license information for Scala Designer You can use Ctrl c to copy this information to the clipboard should you need to contact Scala Support Check Support Online This will attempt to connect to Scala s License Server over the Internet to verify the subscription coverage information and then either download a new license file if one is available or take you to the Scala Maintenance Subscription web site for more options You must be connected to the internet for this to succeed Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 142 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Get License File Online This will attempt to connect to Scala s License Server over the Internet and download the latest license file associated with your Scala Designer USB Key and install it You must be connected to the internet for this to succeed Import License File You can use this button to install a license file you already have In the file dialog that opens locate your license file select it a
155. ar ede e eo cea ga acd epi Seog brs ao ce aig eda a yt nk Bape ca ar dea ide Shapes cee nae 145 TWOKO WILE ACG ONS protoner EA riche ed ances A cae 8 ah ac 2 ec E Se cata hws dae ae anda isda A een ete ao een 147 1 5 1 tLISINGANe scala Photoshop EXPO PIU IN Sux Se dcr ahie te E E ee Aceh A See Acca edt pence eee 147 1 5 2 Using Scala Publish Automation EX Module 202 5 iden te ctaa dane tnt RN ee eee ade tea ek eae eee ee ee ks 148 sows lalseto ge ale ty Dala reren Means meer eee ge E a ranean nee a E a ee eee ge eee E re ee E eee ee eet eee 148 sr SCipino andAUtomMmalon esanaia Rene ar mnt sear eg A e ae ete ee a ee me a ee eee eee ere ee a eee 149 LF TING SCAl ASCII Language 25 caesar eee Paes a es ce ae dee dah ceo Gees Shag ems N E ae eect cane ce Seta ts See Aces akc chef es Seep beens ot cd erage 150 ef Flee Scala CPE SUICIUIPSS fe Mech a Suter th Mate Wl ert Danone acd dap vane Soe Nate Sole Pa eae eptenk basen Lend ee ae ke ale eee 150 gay av d e gt b 10 cea ae ae Beane Om Rea tee rat at a ey nn et ak ge a eee eee Ra 156 VST ST Scala oD SYM A lt a Mice eter a Pcie cor tre Be can deed ae tet nce Soa Se car Oats Pendergast oe ee acd che fance eee Ro ede 163 lie EV ONES ANTS Sao sek sara deb cesarean ahah sk hess Se ce eh at ace See Sit es E as me a ane ecko a canal hte Pb digg Waren Meda eh 170 137 10 SaaS anaE S 4400 oe Aa mariuted ack Scat ee Daucus iene tok Macey Cele Pa Raed bane Ce pom eked tetas 173 Page 2 http docs sc
156. are ideal for use as text backdrops which must change size to fit their contents Spelling Begins checking the spelling of the text on the current page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 52 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Options Presents the Options dialog which you can use to customize Scala Designer and control script performance Using the Multi Tile Editor The Multi Tile Editor splits bitmapped elements into sections that can be stretched and scaled while keeping their four corner integrity in shape and resolution It will work with any imported JPG BMP or PNG image file and is a highly effective tool to quickly and seamlessly create scalable screen graphic elements Making a multi tile image from an ordinary one is accomplished by using the Designer Multi Tile Editor to slice the source image into nine tiling regions There are three slices in each direction The four corner regions will not change size and are not duplicated when the multi tile is sized The basic strategy to make a multi tile is to make the framing slices Left Right Top and Bottom just wide enough to contain the parts of the source image that form the borders of the image The Center and Middle slices contain the areas of the image which can be duplicated The middle regions of the four outer slices are duplicated in the appropriate directio
157. arency option Off you can see this color by turning the Chroma Key option Off If the Chroma Key tab is disabled then it is usually because the clip has a pre set alpha channel i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Clip x The Chroma Key tab has a set of sliders and associated value displays which reveal the chosen transparency or Chroma Key color You can select a Chroma Key Color by using either e Pick Click Pick then use the pointer to click on your desired color in the clip e RGB HSV Color Selection sliders or Numeric values The large color block will display your chosen color If the Transparency button in the Appearance tab is On your chosen color will become transparent in the clip You can switch between the RGB and HSV color models by clicking in the RGB HSV display box Range The Chroma Key Range control will allow you to specify a color tolerance so similar colors may also become transparent When the range slider is all the way to the left only the exact color on the color block will be affected Feathering The Chroma Key Feathering control allows you to adjust smoothness of the transition between transparent and non transparent areas You may need to experiment with the range value and the exact color to achieve your desired ef
158. arks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 116 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Controls the Composition Layers of the Web Clip e Opaque Mode Hides everything underneath the Web Clip e Transparent Mode Allows elements underneath to show through any transparent portions of the Web Clip Show Scroll Bars Sets whether the Web clip will be displayed with Scroll Bars which sometimes will appear because the underlying HTML page is causing them to be displayed Interactive Enables the Web Clip to receive input controls from an input device such as a touch screen Tab Flash Control i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Flash Clip x Appearance Position Mise Chroma Key Process ash Control i Flash Variables Wait Loops 4 CO gt Quality High Y Mode Opaque h d Interactive The Flash Control tab enables you to modify the following Flash Variables Lets you specify a list of variables and their initial values that will passed to the Flash file through the FlashVars method e Each entry in the list is of the form lt variable name gt lt value gt When supplying multiple values separate them with the ampersand amp character For example var1 Hello
159. artees E A E AE E tee aaa a teks 40 1 2 1 4 4 Adding a Streaming Video Page ssnaaaa aanne n nann 40 1 2 14 5 Adding a Fage using Diag and Drop vdavwkdoswigt thd A ER E A E E E E ER teks 41 k2 Lo Manew Toobar Edt Pago ereraa a a Re E E E i S eee S eee E ee ee 41 1 2 1 6 Main View Toolbar Cut Copy and Paste a4 civeivees ace anaana aa 42 121 7 Main View Toolbar Undoand Redo eic ngs he tok seconde bale tat E E AEEA AEE EA tee E 42 22120 Main Vew Toobar EIST cicta Ano Ree Aa a E ett eines E A E E a aa Meare ele fa E en ha ores 43 1221 9 Mai View LOolbar PUBIS 22s corte os a oases deat end Sea hook Rte thaws Bee on gta A E eae er eee TANE eee 44 121 10 Main View Toobar PHI esrara Sen Sr a tai dene ay tae EEA Sus Macatee Deeg apes ev eerie 45 k2 Ost SGalar tints Gem etal 2x25 ected ase My Sse die cca anda Wa dle ls ee ect de Men St ged nos Gah Sas Neate earns 46 21 10 Scalar iit Layout ak uta een tna a ignandagnn A E A a a etek tas Acne ete yea ae RS 47 k2 Ia O Res pacers fe e g1 91 Wee lors 811 10 mame meat a nr ec en a a E E A ee ee or ee 47 t2 a Oe Berets f aad A ako 06 ee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee eg ae ee 48 k2 AS ocdaPNINESPIMER tentesi e a ce sera a a ae nee ag ed Boe os Paw eae Sheed ns doar od tin pa aed Soe Mate hee 48 1 2 1 11 Main View Toolbar Preview and Play u2stdouwkw ocala d hat eedawtakeaentete dda Naat kag ede eat weeks 48 t22 Man NIG Wr MENUS seroren a oily ae Ae ace tics Seok Mk Blea N seeps eed Doe A ae
160. assignment Display Style displayl Texe 10 10 Hello world While x 1 greeting Hello world Integer temptime timeofday timeoffset 20 temptime timeofday timeoffset 12 Else Where a semicolon terminates each statement Assignments Simple statement that assigns the result of an expression to a variable x 10 Foo ControlValue LookupValue 123 32 Vite de oY Se ae A Ce Se oe Se Sas WC anale ye yg The left hand side of the assignment may be either a simple variable or an array The right hand side consists of an expression which may contain constants variables array references and functions Commands and Functions Commands and functions are very similar differing only in two respects e Functions return a value e Commands are complete statements terminated by a semicolon Functions are used in expressions Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 166 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Commands have two parts the command and the arguments The command itself is a simple identifier Prior to parsing the script the various modules within the Scala system register to parse the arguments for those commands they are responsible for When the Player encounters the command it passes control to the appropriate module which reads the argument list and builds an object in memory If no module
161. ate aA ae hes 68 1299 2 labo MOUSE FONET aei a term cared E E gosh Soeur ad etek tas E aie ete eta nea 68 142 3 0c0 Fads SUGCSNOW COMEOIS i nariutad Wit wk tet te ee AN aa EE A baat tee aoa bees 69 Ms ee OUI er Pia Se ce eas nectar a creas I ca E Set gy Berne CY heft aah ha Seni Bee Maite eect ae ta ae a hei 69 Ms ye 1 UIC Us x cea Scat cA Ss eg Acca a vee nt egal Son cats Naa vg eee aes Saag Mache eh hs E E Mea etn deacon ated Ses who T A 69 CASTRELO penne ane mee mre arr a rae eRe meme Rea cetee Brae eno ee age ee et ek eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eae ee 69 M21 SOMEONE ceed ete hae Clg cheese ects aS yg ada E te Deeps tard ak cde aa tached Bn nda ethno et ene aS eases 70 Page 1 http docs scala com display D1100 12 deel OCheOUle Panel saiwkcdta gated wae nad fated NG teehee Neha end ata GAMES 71 a ieee TOE S eee rac te eee ee ee ee CY See Pe ee eee OR SEY eR ea Oe ae AE eae eae ee eas 73 Ms eee TANASI siesta Meese Cee gh ee Aree E ea tae ed io ag Sc Ser Ace ocean cg ae ch Bun Mod a ee a Dy eh ogee et Sige cesar 73 M2 VON AV DAC AUCIE ere ne caine ected Bog Meee aoe Saadeh oS ase eee ee tae ath cial an ea er etree cen tar ee 74 LASA e Opina Module S i 3 6 cciert neta a A erie ks ad aa dahon teehee tek tanga A bee Mette ed ape E en ee eehe se 75 23h it CUStOMIZING COMAS to ete aE EE tea aa dae eA eu ok Ra Radek kai ema eek eee tle es 75 g eae he 4000 WIN RAGES a iinn en ese ee AE T ee a ee ee eee ee ae ee eee et 75 gee es Bey Vo
162. ation is included in the log and problem report Examples e XYZ Screen Monitor e ABC Data Fetcher e problemString A string describing the problem with as much useful detail on the impact of the problem and or how to resolve it This information is included in the log and problem report Examples e The lamp in projector 2 has failed e Unable to get data from newsfeed at hitp example com SignageNewsFeed rss Locally Integrated Content Scala Player makes it easy for custom applications running alongside to create deliver or install media files or other content in a way which allows them to be seamlessly introduced into a Scala script This is done through the IntegrateContentLocally COM interface provided by the Scala Player Transmission Client In Scala Designer if you add a piece of media from the Linked Content folder that creates a linked content reference This means that the file specified is not included when the script is published but is expected to be found on the player at run time One way to get that content to the player is to send it using Scala Enterprise Content Manager s Non Scheduled Content feature If you want to use a custom application residing on the player to fetch or create the linked content then use IntegrateContentLocally to locally integrate content which means that the file is placed correctly into a specific folder such as All Users Documents Scala LocallylIntegratedC Copyright 2015 Scala
163. ay D1100 e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings ts min a e i m TEF C Loos ata Design Text Crawl Panel The Design Text Crawl Panel is shown when a Text Crawl Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to Change Font size and face color or fill type Set Typographical controls In and Out transitions for the element Add Separator image between Crawl segments Apply Color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element The Design Text Crawl Panel is accessed by Adding a new Text Crawl element Selecting a Text Crawl element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Text Crawl Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page lca Co el Le kaat Lye Z z me EE E E oo ee x Fu fame ing Bane AE R m a E Fal E e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page a Fot A e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings LG Fihi A Ty BS m pom gpn i na mM e Crawl Contro
164. ay be interpreted as a command to start the icon moving Once the icon is running the command is complete and execution can continue with the next command The icon may depend on a second command executing or a change in the display to terminate its action The resources list of a block is identical to the sequence list however commands in the resources list are not executed by default These commands may only be accessed by a jump or call to the resources list Once control is passed into the resources list execution continues until the end of the list which terminates the block or control is passed back to the sequence list The execution of the block ends when either the end of the sequence or resources list is reached or when a jump is made out of the block Block Execution Control Execution of a block may be controlled through the following commands If Execute block if condition is True Elself Execute block if previous if condition was False but this condition is True Else Execute block if previous if condition was False While Repeat block while condition is True Until Repeat block until condition becomes True These commands are used in the group list of the block and they control the execution of the entire block For instance the If statement allows a block to execute only if the condition is True Group If condition Sequence LE Stur to execute if condition 1s TRUE lt Blocks that use If Els
165. ay be reported even in cases where the call succeeds In such cases the imagery for the missing files will be absent in the thumbnail that is generated GenerateThumbnail2 synchronously generates a thumbnail of the supplied media file or ScalaScript file For ScalaScript files the thumbnail is either of the specified page or the first page of the script The thumbnailfilenameparameter must contain the full path plus the filename and the extension of the desired image The resulting image can be in jpg bmp gif or png format based on the file extension the caller supplies If a non null mediainfofilename is provided then information about the duration and dimensions of the specified mediafilename will be written to the file specified by mediainfofilename in XML format Here is a sample result for a media file lt xml version 1 0 gt lt media items info gt lt duration gt 00 03 59 699 lt duration gt lt width gt 1024 lt width gt lt height gt 768 lt height gt lt media items info gt Only information relevant to the particular media type is returned For example images have no duration and audio files have no dimensions Note that if mediafilename points to an audio file then no thumbnail is generated in that case but media info is returned if the call succeeds Here is a sample result for a ScalaScript lt xml version 1 0 gt lt media items info gt lt min duration gt 00 03 59 699 lt min duration gt lt nax
166. ay may not be an existing name You can either edit the existing name of the script or type any name you choose If the script is new the File name text box is empty otherwise File name indicates the name you gave the script the last time it was saved e In Designer file names unlike page names must follow Windows standards and e Can have up to 256 alphanumeric characters which can be upper or lowercase e Must start with a letter or a number and it cannot contain any backslashes colons semicolons asterisks or question marks Designer adds the proper file type extension SCA for scripts unless you choose to include it in the name Auto Recover Under Designers Options there is a Auto Recover tab The option which can be turned on or off can be set to periodically save Auto Recover Information When the feature is Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 37 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 1 On Any unsaved changes will be automatically saved to a specific folder If Designer should be unexpectedly closed due to power loss machine crash or program crash offer to recover to the last saved recovery point upon the next start after the issue 2 Off No recovery information will be saved and if an unexpected situation happens and you had not saved your script then there will be no recovery files to restor
167. b or multiple sources e Scrub the data sort filter reformat content restructure as simple XML Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 218 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Fetch and stage any files associated with the data e g images Manage updates to the feed Present a simplified Local XML File to Player Manage cleanup of any files associated with the data Data Source Module Behavior The Data Source module allows the user to e Select a simply formatted Local XML File and see the various XML elements so that these can be connected to data fields ScalaScript variables and arrays of variables which can then be bound to text images etc or otherwise used within the ScalaScript e Select looping rules to automatically iterate through the records of a feed e Use ScalaScript for more advanced looping iterating and processing Supported Local XML File format The Data Source module currently supports only a fairly limited format for the Local XML File Here is an annotated example lt xml gt lt main node element can have any name gt lt main gt lt main contains zero or more top level elements These top level elements can have any unique names and simple values sub elements ignored gt lt top element 1 gt top value 1 lt top element 1 gt lt top element 2 gt top value
168. based on the file extension the caller supplies If a non null mediainfofilename is provided then information about the duration and dimensions of resulting entire message will be written to the file specified by mediainfofilename in XML format Here is a sample result lt xml version 1 0 gt lt media items info gt lt min duration gt 00 03 59 699 lt min duration gt lt max duration gt 00 03 59 699 lt max duration gt lt width gt 1024 lt width gt lt height gt 768 lt height gt lt media items info gt Note how duration is reported as a minimum and a maximum That is because duration for templated messages may not be a single constant value due to the presence of conditionals complex logic or other factors that can cause the ScalaScript template to run for longer or shorter In such cases a range is returned If it is possible that the templated message may run forever if it contains a loop an element of undetermined length such as a Flash file or a Wai t Forever ScalaScript duration command then lt max duration gt unbounded lt max duration gt is returned Note that resource playlist ingredients are not considered in the duration calculation An example VBScript invocation might look like this Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 233 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Dim obj errormsg numt
169. be used to tell when a given frame is playing fullscreen Player Metadata There are a couple of ways to learn the value of Player Metadata Player Metadata from Variables Player metadata appears as Player variables For example Player Foo contains the value of the Player metadata Foo for the current player This can be used as a variable in ScalaScript In your ScalaScript you should declare the variable as External To share this value to a VBScript JScript Python script etc pass it as as a shared variable in the Windows Scripting command In scripting languages where the period character is not legal in variable names use the shared name feature to share it under an adapted name Player Metadata XML Alternately to access Player Metadata from VBScript JScript Python or another scripting language the player can discover the settings of its player metadata Player metadata is written to a file Network metadata revision xml Using the ScalaFileLock interface this file can be located and then loaded Here is a sample VBScript to read the player metadata file Example to read local metadata file In this example there are two metadata values Player Location and Player Color Use SelectSingleNode entry name X to read metadata named X In ScalaScript make variables by those names and share them with the VBScript Running the VBScript will look up and fill in these values Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and
170. bs e Image Type Set or change the type of background to be used e Image Settings Contains options related to the dimensions of picture movie anim or streaming video backgrounds Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 97 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e Process Enables real time color processing of the background during playback i il EP 1 i i ii i E mE AT z Design Text Panel The Design Text Panel is shown when a Text Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Change Font size and face color or fill type e Set Typographical controls and In and Out transitions for the element e Apply Color and opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks Element backdrops can be applied and changed e Add Line images The Design Text Panel can be accessed by Adding a new Text element Selecting a Text element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables Remember whenever you click on an unoccupied area on the background the Text Cursor will appear allowing immediate entry of Text at that position The Design Text Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how
171. by entering the width and height or using the numeric controls Changing the width of a cell will adjust all cells in that column to the new width Changing the height of a cell will adjust all cells in that row to the new height The size of the cell may be bound to variables by clicking the right mouse button on a numeric control then choosing Bind to Data Scaling The Scaling of an element can be adjusted according to its bounding box size e Free Image will exactly match the bounding box which the element may be stretched or squeezed to fill e Fill and Trim Preserve Aspect Ratio Scales the image to fill the bounding box trimming either the width or height as required e Fit Inside Preserve Aspect Ratio Scales the image as large as possible while still fitting entirely within the bounding box letterboxing the element as necessary Scaling an element is especially useful when the Clip s filename is bound to a data field because it controls how the replacement Clip is scaled to fit the area of the placeholder It is particularly important to check when you bind the graphical element to a variable for use in a template Crop Selecting Crop it enables the crop position and crop size fields e Position Sets the upper left corner of the crop area initially 0 0 The first value is the distance from the left side of the original media asset and the second value is the distance from the top of the original media asset e Size De
172. cala Elements within the ScalaScript Using it will repeat if required the page s according to where the data source is applied and the parameters set within the Data Source Module It is possible to use ScalaScript programming techniques in conjunction with Data Source for more advance looping iterations and processing of the Local XML file XML File Structures Supported This module supports only simply formatted XML File structures It does not fetch the XML file which is done instead by a Data Source Fetcher that converts your original file to something simpler if it is in a different or more complex XML format Here is an example for your reference It contains comments but please note that your XML file should not Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 65 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt main node element can have any name gt lt main gt lt main contains zero or more top level elements These top level elements can have any unique names and simple values sub elements ignored gt lt top element 1 gt top value 1 lt top element 1 gt lt top element 2 gt top value 2 lt top element 2 gt lt main contains zero or more repeating items where the item node can have any name gt lt item gt lt item node contains one or more elements with
173. cala com display D1 100 To change the color of text click on the color within the Face button and choose a different color There are additional options in the Style pop up button next to the color Colors can be modified in the Palette panel Common text styles like bold italics and underline are also available the B and U buttons and options like Outline Shadow and Backdrop also have separate buttons Moving a Text Element When an element is selected you can click and drag it to any position on the page Make sure the entire text element is selected not individual letters You can set the pixel position directly from the Position tab of the Design Text Panel Useful Tip Ctrl Arrow Key allows you to move nudge elements by one pixel in whatever direction the arrow key is depressed Shift Ctrl Arrow Key allows you to jump 10 pixels at a time Importing a Graphic or Video To import a graphic to the page click the Add button the sign icon in the toolbar or select Add File s from the Add drop down menu You can import most standard file formats including JPG PNG GIF TIFF BMP H 264 MPG WMV SWF or AVI ls lej FS Yad bat a Navigate to a folder containing clips and double click on one of them You can apply styles to clips the same as text and you can resize the clip and try other options that apply only to clips Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respec
174. ced to progressive mode by setting the following MMOS INI flag DSHOWRENDER_ForceWMVProgressive l In the future this will become the default behavior Most WMV or WMA files use 16 bit audio Fixed a problem where WMV or WMA files that used other than 16 bit audio played back as noise To enable this change you must set the following in your MMOS INI Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 20 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 DSHOWRENDER_FixWMVAudioRemap 1 The User Agent string used for WebClip can be customized using the MMOS INI setting WEBCLIP_UserAgent string MEDIA_CachePath This path is defined by the user AND WEBCLIP_DeleteCacheOnShutdown 0 WEBCLIP_Sharelnput 0 This behavior is enabled by default You can disable it with this mmos ini setting The input system for the webclip is separate from the input system used by ScalaScript buttons and hotkeys When an interactive webclip is on screen it gets the opportunity to handle input before ScalaScript buttons and hotkeys even if there are ScalaScript buttons are visibly in front of the webclip In the past the webclip would consume all input so any ScalaScript button that overlapped with a webclip would never get any input The webclip will now provide the ScalaScript input system with its own copy of mouse and keyboard input so the same input goes to both the w
175. ckgrounds which consist simply of a solid color Any type of background other than a Plain background is referred to as an image background Selecting the Background Button in the Toolbar takes you to the Design Background Panel where you can make changes to the settings of the background or change the background Image type Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 122 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 If you are looking for information on adding elements please go to Page View Toolbar Add Page View Toolbar List List The Page View List Panel will give you an overview of the relationships between elements and events that take place on a page similar to the way the Main View presents an overview of how every page fits into the complete architecture of your script The List Panel arranges the events on a page in their specific order allowing you to change their sequence without affecting the position of the elements on the page It primarily allows you to apply and remove transitions and individually control the timing of events From here you can access the Sound panel to create a sound event specifically associated with an element You can also access the Timing pan el to allow you to define the pause setting of an element The Element Transition panel determines how elements enter and leave the page The List Panel can adjust t
176. com display D1 100 Headline Body text Laying out an individual page is accomplished in the Page View Here you are able introduce Elements on the page which can be positioned scaled and layered as well as setting the order timing and transitions for how the Elements appear on the page From here you can navigate to other Designer views necessary to create the script Additionally it is possible to perform tasks directly from this view to manipulate and refine the script Once your production is complete you can either publish it directly to Scala Content Manager for inclusion in a Playlist or collect it for others to use Scripts can be created in a text editor Many advanced users modify their scripts to perform additional functionality that otherwise is not available in the GUI graphical user interface Additional Topics e A general overview of the User Interface Ul is given in the section UI Overview e Get more details on media that can be used in conjunction with Designer in Media Formats Supported e Tips and Tricks provides you with helpful hints to be more productive when using Designer Ul Overview The options and commands available in any Designer panel depend on the purpose of the panel but most Main View elements have common features in Designer For example unlike other PC applications some choices in the panel are buttons rather than text items in a list while some buttons lead to other panels and dial
177. condary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Oval half its current width and height e d make the Oval double its current width and height Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 89 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Add a Line Element Lines and Arrows can be created using the Line Element which is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background To create a Line 1 Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add Line option 2 The Design Line Panel appears and the mouse pointed turns into a cross hair 3 Move the pointer to where you want the starting point of the line corner of the bounding box in which the line will be drawn then press and hold the left main mouse button 4 Move the pointer to the position of the end of the line and release the mouse button to complete the line While drawing you can hold down the the following keys to draw e SHIFT a line at 15 degree angle intervals e CTRL from the center of the Line with the center being the original position e SHIFT CTRL from the center of the Line at 15 degree angle intervals Two graphic handles will appear on the bounding box the start and end points of the line indicatin
178. continues here Resources res do everything in this event then return echo this is a test n Use Command syntax UseExpr Is like a Use but its argument is treated as a string expression the result of which is used to find the destination event For example Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 183 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Will Use a page called Resource5 UseExpr Resource Format n UseExpr Command syntax Return Will cause the execution of the current script to return to the position following the last executed Goto that pushed a bookmark This command only returns to gotos that include the option Bookmark True Return If the return attempts at any point to enter a block that has previously been exited then execution will resume at the start of that block This means that the Return command can never cause execution to be transferred to the middle of an exited block Return Command syntax Quit integer expr Will exit one or more scripts and return to the caller If a script calls another script with the Script command and that script calls a third then the third script may return to the first by executing the command Quit 2 Quit 1 Quit 5 Quit Command syntax Exit integer expr Used to exit from the current block If the block
179. cript xmltext String of XML that defines the template data field values to use thumbnailfilename Full path to desired image file The file name may end in the extension jpg jpeg png or gif Since templates may have multiple pages the actual file names will have a number appended For example if you specify C Temp Foo jpg then the thumbnail filenames will be C Temp Foo1 jpg C Temp Foo2 jpg and so on width Thumbnail width in pixels height Thumbnail height in pixels options String that can optionally contain one of these flags e rl Rotate 90 degrees left e rr Rotate 90 degrees right e ru Rotate 180 degrees upside down e k Keep aspect out_numthumbs Returns number of thumbnails that were generated from this template A multi page template will return a number higher than one out_errormsg Error message returned by GeneratePreviewThumbnails Note that errors such as missing files may be reported even in cases where the call succeeds In such cases the imagery for the missing files will be absent in the thumbnail that is generated The xmitext string defines the ingredients meaning the template data fields and their values This string consists of an lt ingredients gt XML ele ment containing one or more data field elements from the following supported types lt text name fieldname gt Text to use lt text gt A text data field and its value lt boolean name fieldname gt On Off lt boolean gt A boole
180. cript execution will normally continue with any pages which follow the interrupt scheduled page in the script If you want to resume the script from the point of interruption so the interrupt scheduled page works as a temporary detour rather than a branch two actions need to be taken e Enable this option e At the end of the interrupted scheduled page or sequence of pages use and set a Return to Bookmark in the Go To Tab Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 72 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 At Time Sets a precise time at which the event will run Repeat When enabled this allows the setting of a regular interval for the interrupted event Repeat Every and Repeat Until become enabled Repeat Every Set the time between repetitions of an Interrupt scheduled event using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Repeat Until Set a time of day after which no more repeats will take place using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Timeslot More structured than exact interrupts since playback respects them when determining what to play even if the Exact Time of Day start time was missed due to down time or the segment in turn is temporarily interrupted by other content Daily In Time Set the in time of a timeslot interruption using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Dail
181. ctions of that EX available to the executing script This statement is usually used in configuration files to load EX modules for the script Gro p button ex example ex EX EX EX console ex EX debug ex EX Screen ex EX EX 7 i Ciming ex touch ex EX Command syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 187 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 EX Reset Restores each module s settings to the default EX Reset Command syntax Core ScalaScript Functions and Variables Functions and Variables in ScalaScript The ScalaScript player engine supplies a number of useful core functions and variables Also there is a wide range of extension functions and variables for media timing and other additions beyond the core language The complete set of functions is given in the ScalaScript functions index The complete set of variables is given in the ScalaScript variables index The core functions and variables are outlined below Core Functions Conditional Functions Conditional anytype Conditional Boolean Expr anytype OnTrue anytype On False This function does not show up in the Branch menu list of functions The function is similar to the C C language construct Conditional Expr OnTrue OnFalse It evaluates the boolean expression Expr lf E
182. ctly in the media list while template scripts are added to the Template list where they can be used to make Messages A single Template can be used to generate any number of Messages It is useful to be able to present the fields in an order that is more friendly and also adjust some of the parameters of the fields To do this Login to Content Manger with an appropriate role Open the Content tab Click on Templates Select the Template you just created and Click Properties Change the field labels and order if desired and click Save Template Creation ORAON A template script can have one or more page s and must have at least one element variable bound as a template field It is this the act of binding a data field for use as a Template that changes a normal Scala Script into a Template Similarly the un binding of all the template data fields in a script will return it to a normal script The bound element variable will be used as the placeholder while working in Designer and may be replaced later during the creation of a message in Content Manager The same bound variable may be used in more than one location that is an image that appears on multiple pages of your template When publishing a template script it it will not appear in the media list in Content Manager but it will be in Template repository An explanation of the methods for publishing template scripts into Content Manager can be found in the Uploading Temp
183. d A711 ZS 09090911122344321 Hexadecimal Numbers Introduced with the dollar sign and continue as long as characters in the ranges 0 9 a f and A F are found Given that the value is represented as a 32 bit data type a maximum of eight hex digits should be presented in any number If the number contains less than eight digits it is padded on the left with zeroes S Tt SAc3 9dF SOOOOFFFF Binary Numbers Introduced with the percent sign and continue as long as characters in the range 0 1 are found Given that the value is represented as a 32 bit data type a maximum of 32 binary digits should be presented in any number If the number contains less than 32 digits it is padded on the left with zeroes 611010111 610101010101010101010101010101010 Real Numbers Real number literals are written in decimal form Introduced by either a numeric digit 0 9 or a minus sign The number will continue as long as characters in the range 0 9 are found and may contain a single decimal point character If the portion ahead of the decimal is zero and the number is not negative the zero may be omitted Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 158 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 lezo Due a m rY 1234 567 Strings String literals are always enclosed with double quotes The string continues until the next un esca
184. d On and Off A four state Toggle button works the same way but both the Off and the On positions also have a Highlight state to indicate when the pointer is over the button This button can change visually when the mouse moves over it and also when the button s variable changes value Selecting it triggers a change in the variable s value Panel Buttons Selecting a Toggle button adds 4 button icons to the Design Buttons Panel Title Bar These are also visible on the Element Design Panel indicatin g it is a Button and enables the setting of different visual appearances for each state At least one of these button icons is always selected indicating the current state of the selected button If you have defined a Toggle button with fewer than four states the title bar icon s for the unused state s are disabled Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 127 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 More than one state of the selected button s may be current at a given time so that you can apply the same styles and attributes to several states at once Select multiple button states to affect them all with the same attributes by Ctrl clicking as many title bar state indicators as desired To cycle through the states of the currently selected button use the F12 shortcut or click the button icons to switch directly to a particular state Hold the m
185. d aNd awa e eae tate eet earthed dee ANA ees 93 1 3 1 2 Page View Toolbar Cut Copy and Paste sand eicedwdw cadet Radek ada doe PAM eae tee ae es 94 1593123 F AGG VIEW Toolbar Zoom Level sixties octicelbiezeei ko rsh a Spit Heese as tes Aco aloe ens nid E e cada tee efits E dem ae eer 94 1 3 1 4 Page View T olbar Undo and Red 22444 doi taen ed bale tan tek ada det bedi E eae bee Rade ae es 95 ko bo Fage View Toolbar Element Sergein Shearer dere a Sut wnat eat ane tetas di tek ake ee dhe ae Lee ae 96 ka oct WVOLKING WIT DOSIOM FEN CISs sided ice Xceed arco aia dante Wea ws Pea ee tet ee tn die ced aga dae Baa ead 96 1293 les AGG VIEW Toobar DACKOEOUNAG Serete Septet we utah arareo gages E E te Ocoee ena nei a aig eats E sa ate tee Sf Sin wh ae eran doen Ween 122 bo let PaOe VICW MOOI LIST cca oe stance re Sep cchta hea ehcp a Bs AS ee Wes cae te died anak Ppa aa E A ne er sy ot See ig 123 Sk t VVORKING WIKAINEOLISE RANG eree erta i Ste eal a tad tea Mdina Maer ets an ae ghee Hak Maer cage aaa ee Ne ae eas 123 ko 20 AGG VIEW Toobar BUHONS serpe aris Sg cee Sore E Gener Be E a E EEE E Syn ead ee ate Boke Rees 125 koke DESIGN BUMONS allel cAr vis gecen tenner cote ecg yh E Sea ee Seeing ete ds tye cetera aed oe E roreaeam a heed 126 ko VDP aes WIG W Toobar UTS asrorni Se occa R Pom cdg se ac ge cag seas ae E nah Spe aa E A aise Ware ty ote Sah ag 131 to Osage VIEW Toolbar PreVIEW desear Se fice awh O gg es E gene AS EE ai a aig Read
186. d changing the numeric value The actual volume is in relationship to the master volume setting of the device e g If the Master volume of the device is set to 60 then setting the volume of the clip to 25 will result in the actual volume being 15 of the master volume Web Clip Element Controls File or URL e File Shows the currently selected HTML Widget wgt file It can be replaced by clicking the name and selecting a new HTML Widget from the file dialog e URL Shows the URL of the Web Page and can be replaced by clicking the URL The Web Clip dialog enables you to specify the URL and any credentials needed to view the web page Transparency Turning transparency On makes transparent any portions of a Web Clip defined as transparent using the controls in the Chroma Key tab Wait When set the playback sequence will wait until after the Web Clip has completed before continuing with subsequent commands Shape Element Controls For Box and Oval shapes the Face is broken into two parts Area and Line which enables shapes to have filled areas and or line art For Line Shapes only Line is available Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 109 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Area Lets you specify a colored or textured effect for the Area of the selected shape element Enable Disable the Area For Boxes and Ovals the A
187. d slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new Streaming Video Clip exactly in the same place as the original Addition Keyboard Shortcuts e x Flips the selected Clip horizontally around a vertical axis e y Flips the selected Clip upside down around a horizontal axis e r Rotates the clip clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the clip counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Exporting Clips You can save a still image of a movie clip based on its current start position along with any changes to its size crop and style applied by choosing Export from the Edit drop down In the File dialog choose a location and enter a name for the processed clip If several clips are selected they will be exported as one with any additional transparent areas The file is saved as a PNG file Add Web Clip Element A Web Clip is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background and has two forms e A URL pointing at a specific web content e AHTML Widget which is a ZIP compressed file ending with the extension wgt containing a top level file named index html plus any other HTML JavaScript and media files used by your content They are are added to the page using the Add pull down menu and select the Add Web Clip option to create a Web Clip which occurs at a resolution of 512 x 384 and a fram
188. d the On positions also have a Highlight state to indicate when the pointer is over the button This button can change visually when the mouse moves over it and also when the button s variable changes value Selecting it triggers a change in the variable s value Panel Buttons Selecting a Radio buttons adds 4 button icons to the Design Buttons Panel Title Bar These are also visible on the Element Design Panel indicati ng it is a Button and enables the setting of different visual appearances for each state At least one of these button icons is always selected indicating the current state of the selected button If you have defined a Radio button with fewer than four states the title bar icon s for the unused state s are disabled More than one state of the selected button s may be current at a given time so that you can apply the same styles and attributes to several states at once Select multiple button states to affect them all with the same attributes by Ctrl clicking as many title bar state indicators as desired To cycle through the states of the currently selected button use the F12 shortcut or click the button icons to switch directly to a particular state Hold the mouse pointer over the button icons to get tool tip information about which state each icon represents Both F12 and the button icons are available in any Design menu Most of the options in the Button Appearance and Action tabs can be applied independently to each of a but
189. d the Textfile and the same is true if the file is missing or contains all blanks Ensure you set the Update setting as mentioned on Tab Misc for the element to ensure they do not update prematurely Text File Panel File Opens the File dialog which is used to select the name of a text data file If you are going to replace the Text file by local version on the playback device then you can load the text file from the Linked Content folder Maximum Lines on Page This can sometimes be a little confusing as this specifies the number of lines read from the text file at a time default 1 as normally the value specified here should equal the number of unique LINE variables to be displayed on the page or group of pages Because your text file could contain lines that are not used for either display or programmatic usage it sets the block of lines to read on each pass Rules for Use You do not have to use line variables in order i e display lined before line2 You do not have to display or use all of the lines that are read The maximum number of lines that can be read in one go is 99 While you can Nest Textfile operations great care should be taken and remember that the values or Line1 99 will depend on the last file read ROD Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 73 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 WinSc
190. d thumbnails To view the column information of more than one selected item in the Main View switch to the List Mode Main View Toolbar Publish w Publish Use the Publish icon button on the toolbar to publish your script This publishes the script to a location that Content Manager can distribute for playback on Player systems The Publish button launches a dialog that asks for your target location Once you have your network set up it becomes a nearly instantaneous process to update your scripts The publishing process collects every file used by the script including graphics video sound and other files and puts them together in a portable form Whichever publishing medium you choose the procedure is basically the same Different available options will depend on the final destination of your published script Designer uses Intelligent file transfer methods to ensure that only the changed script and associated assets are transferred minimizing the data that is actually altered on subsequent publishing of a new version of the script There are three publishing methods and the one you use will depend on your Scala Enterprise network topology Publishing To Lets You Specify Content Manager Direct URL logon name and password for connecting directly to Scala Enterprise Content Manager Web or FTP Folder URL logon name and password to a web based Publish Location Local or Shared Folder Path to a Publish Location folder on your networ
191. d to that script itself Cross Frame Media Item Variables If you have a ScalaScript running in one frame you can read these ScalaScript variables to learn about the currently playing media item in another frame example given for a frame called framename framename Medialtem Title Name of the media item currently playing in frame framename framename Medialtem Type Type of the media item currently playing in frame framename framename Medialtem ModifiedDate Modification date of the media item currently playing in frame framename framename Medialtem Folder Folder of the media item currently playing in frame framename framename Medialtem Foo Value of media item metadata Foo for the media item currently playing in frame framename The metadata entry Foo and its values for each media item would be set up in Content Manager Use of Cross Frame Media Item Metadata You can also access the Media Item metadata for the media items playing in a different frame You could create a ScalaScript to play ina bottom frame that displays the song title of a video playing in the main frame by accessing the ScalaScript variable lt framename gt Medialtem lt metadataname gt for example Main Medialtem SongTitle You can display this in a text element by typing in Designer Song Main Medialtem SongTitle Additionally Playback xyz variables can also be used the same way the Medialtem variables are shown e g framename Playback Fullscreen which can
192. ded records or fields e Sorting records into the desired for playback order e Scrubbing any unusual formatting from the Original Feed e g there are various common errors or junk in RSS feeds that would need to be scrubbed e Formatting field values so they are ready for display or use by ScalaScript Fetching of related files Many feeds link to related files For example an RSS feed or a media RSS feed can have a picture associated with each story The Fetcher needs to e Fetch any related files and place them in a local folder chosen by the Fetcher This may be via locally integrated content but that is often not necessary e Clean up old related files After placing the related files locally the Fetcher needs to include the local path to those related files as the element s content e g lt xml gt lt main node element can have any name gt lt main gt lt item gt lt item name gt Apple lt item name gt lt item picture gt C temp Applel png lt item picture gt lt item gt lt item gt lt item name gt Banana lt item name gt lt item picture gt C temp Banana jpg lt item picture gt lt item gt lt main gt All related files must be placed locally before the Local XML File referencing them is presented to Player If processing a Media RSS feed the item images appear as URLs in the element s url attribute but the local files need to be presented in an element s content Copyright 2
193. dia folder Add Special Event Add an event such as a sound event or pause or some other non visual or programming event Add Text Enter free form text at the cursor position Add Text Box Define an area on the screen for text to be entered into Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 41 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Add Text Crawl Add Text Entry Field Add Table Add Box Add Oval Add Line Add TV Clip if EX Module enabled Add Streaming Video Clip Add Webclip The Page Already Has Elements on it http docs scala com display D1100 Add a Text Crawl element whose contents continuously move or crawl in a specified direction during playback Add an interactive text element that can accept typed input from someone running the script and store the text in a variable Add a grid of Text Box elements for the easy display of tabular data Draw open or filled boxes After choosing this option the pointer changes to a cross and you can draw the box on the page Draw open or filled ovals After choosing this option the pointer changes to a cross and you can draw the box on the page Draw a line After choosing this option the pointer changes to a cross and you can draw the box on the page Add a Clip that shows the display of an attached webcam or TV Tuner type video source as controlled by the TV Tuner Module Add a video clip whose
194. ding zeroes day month number 2 digit year day month number 4 digit year 4 digit year month number day leading zeroes Windows Long date format from Windows Regional and Language Options control panel Windows Short date format from Windows Regional and Language Options control panel Windows date format customized using Timi ng CustomDateFormatString http docs scala com display D1100 05 Oct 95 5 Oct 95 951005 95 10 05 05 10 95 9 10 95 5 10 1995 1995 10 05 Windows date formats are localized based on the Windows language The built in formats are localized based on the installation language of Designer or Player DateFormat Variable syntax Timing CustomDateFormatString String Timing CustomDateFormatString Used to format the date when DateFormat is set to 102 See Windows KB 307938 for Windows date format notation Timing CustomDateFormatString Variable syntax TimeFormat Integer TimeFormat The TimeFormat variable controls the time format used when evaluating the Time variable See also Timing Uppercase Accepted values are Value 0 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Meaning hh mm ss 24 hour with leading zeroes with seconds hh mm 24 hour with leading zeroes no seconds hh mm ss 24 hour no leading zeroes with seconds hh mm 24 hour no leading zeroes no seconds Example 09 23 04 or 21
195. ding to DateFormat and Timing Uppercase This variable updates when the date changes Date Variable syntax Time String Time Returns the current time according to TimeFormat and Timing Uppercase This variable updates every second Time Variable syntax Timing Seconds Integer Timing Seconds Returns system time in seconds This variable updates every second Timing Seconds Variable syntax Weekday String Weekday Returns the weekday as a string e g Tuesday according to WeekdayFormat and Timing Uppercase Weekday Variable syntax DateFormat Integer DateFormat The DateFormat variable controls the date format used when evaluating the Date variable See also Timing Uppercase Accepted values are Value 0 1 Meaning day month name year day month name year month name day year month number day 2 digit year month number day 2 digit year leading zeroes day month number 2 digit year leading zeroes Example 5 October 1995 5 October 1995 October 5 1995 10 5 95 10 05 95 05 10 95 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 196 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation 10 11 12 13 100 101 102 day month shortname 2 digit year leading zeroes day month name shortname 2 digit year Packed 2 digit year month number day 2 digit year month number day leading zeroes day month number 2 digit year lea
196. dural1on gt U0 03559 699 lt max durarion gt lt width gt 1024 lt width gt lt height gt 768 lt height gt lt media items info gt Note how for ScalaScripts duration is reported as a minimum and a maximum That is because duration for ScalaScripts may not be a single constant value due to the presence of conditionals complex logic or other factors that can cause the ScalaScript to run for longer or shorter In such cases a range is returned If it is possible that the ScalaScript may run forever if it contains a loop an element of undetermined length such as a Flash file or a Wait Forever ScalaScript duration command then lt max duration gt unbounded lt max duration gt Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 231 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 is returned An example VBScript invocation might look like this Dim obj errormsg Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer ob Generaltethumbnall Tor test sca The Mor thumonail Jpg er medueinftocxml 5i2 384 errormsg If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg BAG LE Set obj Nothing GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 Method The GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 can be used to create thumbnail images from a template ScalaScript where the template will use the text and media files that you supply At the same time it can retrieve related informat
197. e Tab Repeat Use Repeat While and Repeat Until when an action must be repeated several times You can use these events to repeat a single event several times or repeat a series of events This is easily visualized Script execution runs through the series of events then at the end of the series jumps or loops back to the top of the series to repeat the loop The difference between the two types of loops is the point in the loop where they evaluate whether the while or until condition is true Repeat While evaluates the condition before executing the contents of the loop Repeat Until evaluates the condition after each time through the loop R epeat Until will always execute the events in the loop at least once Repeat While will look at the condition before starting the loop If the condition is not true when the script first reaches the loop it will be skipped Another way to think of the difference is that Repeat While loops will continue while the condition is TRUE but Repeat Until loops will continue while the condition is FALSE until it becomes TRUE Repeat While Repeat Until This drop menu allows you to choose the type of looping to apply e Repeat While e Repeat Until Expression Enter in the prompt the expression to test whether to continue looping Generally if the value of the variable used in the condition is set somewhere earlier in the script it is easier to use Repeat Until If the loop is s
198. e This feature works for all scripts when enabled but how it works depends on how many scripts you have If you have 3 scripts open and all of them have been modified and auto saved and either your PC or Designer crashes the next time you start Designer you will be asked if you want to recover the auto saved scripts If you choose to defer the recovery process you can do something else and then open one of the scripts that have a auto saved script At that point you will get a dialog asking if you want to Recover Open Original or Cancel the operation If you chose to open original then the auto saved version will be deleted Auto recover also works if you have a single script but the unsaved script will be called lt untitled gt If you defer recovering it then later in the same session create a new script you will not be asked if you want to recover the unsaved script Only if you exit Designer and start the program again will you have the chance to recover that unsaved script again For unsaved scripts there is a limit of one auto saved version For all already saved scripts they can potentionally have their own auto saved version Whenever a script is successfully saved its auto saved version is removed When the user makes changes to a script it will get auto saved after a period of time If multiple users have access to scripts located on a share drive they cannot share auto saved scripts Main View Toolbar Add To add a ne
199. e The Outline is disabled by default but will show a color chip and the options popup button when enabled To prevent elements from becoming invisible you cannot disable the Outline unless either the Face or Shadow is enabled Fill Chip To change the outline color or texture click on the color chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the Options popup e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the outline e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the outline the level as well as the direction of the gradient e Thickness Set the thickness in pixels of the outline Softness Adjust the softness of the outline e Presets Glow Edged and Solid are preset combinations of softness and thickness Shadow Lets you specify a colored or textured drop shadow behind the selected element Enable Disable the Shadow The Shadow is disabled by default but will show a color chip and the options popup button when enabled To prevent elements from becoming invisible you cannot disable the Shadow unless either the Face or Outline is enabled Fill Chip To change the shadow color or texture click on the color chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters
200. e 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the clip s bounding boxes The size can also be adjusted in the Design TV Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the TV Clip to its original size e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the TV Clip half its current width and height e d make the TV Clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the TV Clip without having to resort to editing in a external video editing package e Use ALT to Drag a handle on the side or corner of the clip until the edge s enclose only the portion of the TV Clip you want to keep e Use ALT to Drag the clip itself to re position the cropped area
201. e 50 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 ck allows embedding of fonts for playback but not editing If a user does not have those fonts on their system they cannot edit the script If you choose Authoring this limits embedding only to fonts that can be included with editable documents 4 Click on the Folder button to select where the files will be collected e g the Desktop 5 Click the Collect button The ideal situation is that the other user already has the necessary fonts installed and embedding is not needed Some fonts may not allow embedding at all You must be sure to check the licensing requirements for any fonts you use The TrueType fonts included with Scala Designer are freely re distributable for any production you create but only for non commercial purposes TrueType fonts which you acquire from other sources may have licensing restrictions which vary from manufacturer to manufacturer It is your responsibility to comply with their requirements Sharing Scala Scripts You can copy and distribute the script and its folder to other users As long as they are kept together Designer will be able to read them successfully Using the Edit Menu in Main View List Select All Group Unosaup Bind to Data The Edit Menu has a number of functions available to assist the designer during the creative process and enables quick access to Function Keyboard Shortcut Undo Ctrl
202. e Data Source Module Extended Format Support The Data Source module may grow the capability to handle additional things such as more complex XML structures XML attributes etc The Data Source module may grow the capability to handle JSON formatted data When this support arrives the Fetcher will have more flexibility in how it presents the Local XML File Extended Script Playback Support The Data Source module may grow additional looping policies This would not tend to affect the Fetcher Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 221 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Reporting Custom Warnings and Problems Scala Player makes it easy for custom applications running alongside Player and for Windows Scripts run from a ScalaScript to report custom warnings or problems into the log which can also appear on the Content Manager Player Health screens and trigger an email alert to the network administrators This is done using the LogExternalError method which is available in two forms e Windows Scripts run from within the Windows Scripting Module should use the LogExternalError method of the Scala Player interface which is always available from playback e Custom applications running alongside Player should use the LogExternalError method of the Scala InfoNetwork interface which is always available when the Player Network Client is
203. e Designer DVD i Note Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 147 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The plugin is compatible with Photoshop CS4 and newer Tested with the current version of Photoshop CC CC 2015 16 0 or 20150529 r 88 In Photoshop CS5 there are some inconsistencies problems due to Photoshop bugs that can be fixed by upgrading to CS6 or newer Background and Elements If you name the bottom most layer Background or background it will become the background of the page Otherwise the plug in will automatically generate a plain background Any visible text or image layers become elements on the page Each clip is saved out as a separate file The plug in can export grouped elements as a single image file as well Text Text layers can be preserved as editable text in Designer To accomplish this the layer name must be prefixed with TXT_ If you use any effects that are not supported by Designer those effects will not be exported You will need to allow the text to be rasterized to a clip by removing the TXT_ prefix Layer Effects Layers can have virtually any of Photoshop s effects applied to them such as drop shadows bevels and gradient fills Those effects will be rasterized converting of an image from a vector graphics format to a raster image at export time Adobe Photoshop has ma
204. e Image button popup menu enables images to be embedded into text based elements with controls for scaling and positioning of the embedded image based on the typographical size ranges of the current font e Insert Image Brings up the file dialog to select an image e image Range Can be set to one of the following ranges e Cap Height Scaled and positioned between the Baseline and the Cap Height of the current font e Ascender Height Scaled and positioned between the Baseline and the Ascender of the current font e Cell Height Scaled and positioned within the cell height of the current font e image Alignment The image can be aligned at the Top Middle or Bottom of the range set in the Image Range An embedded image that is larger than the specified range will be scaled smaller to fit the range If the image is smaller than the specified range will not be scaled but will be positioned within the range based on the current image alignment Caps The Caps button opens a popup with controls for the capitalization style to be applied to the text which is shown e Normal As typed default option e Small Caps Any lower case letters replaced with reduced size upper case letters e All Caps All upper case Word Wrap Word Wrap enabled by default is the distance in pixels between the left and right text margins of the element Text will dynamically wrap to the next line when the right text margin of the element is reached To disable Word Wrap
205. e Use command Simple Chapter Sequence Blocks can be nested any number of levels Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 154 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ScalasScripe Chapter1 Sequence Page1l Group Picture C Pictures Photol jpg sequence Text 120 40 Some text Page2 Picture C Pictures Photo2 jpg Page3 Picture C Pictures Photo3 jpg gt Chapter2 gt Pagel Group Picture C Pictures Photo4 jpg Sequence Text 120 40 Some text Note It may not be desirable to nest the script a great deal even though it is possible Nested blocks restrict the scope of the label names defined within the block It is often useful to be able to jump directly to any page from any point in the script This is not possible if the script uses chapter nesting as shown above How Things Happen in Parallel Here we describe how the script engine interacts with the modules that actually handle most ScalaScript commands to enable the desired parallelism Player Threads The script engine progresses through a ScalaScript by using a single thread that invokes each command following the rules for events scoping group lists sequence lists etc In a configuration with multiple frames each frame has its own script and each script has its own script engine t
206. e drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected then they move as a group and maintain their relative positions Cut Copy amp Paste A Table can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 87 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Changing Table Size You can quickly adjust the size of the Table by clicking and dragging one of the handles on the bounding box e Dragg
207. e example schedule has an overall Valid Range setting of one week with Monday Wednesday and Friday selected in Valid Days and periodic enabled daily in and out times of noon and Midnight Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 70 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ait hamper REF P Posble Event Times Fiir tA im b fii aid eT ay mahi omn miaii bini pi EN weri Pu Ai Interrupt Scheduling This type of scheduling can be applied to any kind of page including special event pages groups and sub scripts but not to elements on a page and not to pages within groups The Valid Range Valid Weeks and Valid Days levels of scheduling are active and work for interrupt scheduling just as they do for periodic scheduling However in contrast to periodic scheduling at the daily level interrupt scheduling is definite When the scheduled time arrives playback will interrupt whatever is happening in order to run the page which is interrupt scheduled for that particular time En aes PTS ATIE TM i Tiii ree AY ee During normal running of a script Playback will skip over interrupt scheduled page s After running an interrupt scheduled page Playback will continue by running the next page in the script after the interrupt scheduled page It will not automatically return to the interrupted page There is
208. e from that stream is used at the cursor position If the URL of the Web Clip cannot be reached Designer has no reference to draw the Streaming Video Clip You will not see anything on the screen but the Element will be listed in the Page List View After returning to the Main View a warning triangle can be observed on the page s thumbnail indicating a problem Previewing the page and pressing E SC may provide additional information as to exact nature of your issue After successful creation the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel appears and contains numerous options when working with Streaming Video Clips Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 91 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 For a more detailed discussion of the Web Clip formats supported by Designer click here General Visual Manipulation When the Web Clip is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge The handles are an indication that a Web Clip has been selected You can continue to work with the Web Clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the Web Clip to deselect it Moving the Web Clip With the Web Clip selected simply drag it to a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in
209. e it for each time the page has played and display its current value on a page at any time by referring to its name There are four variable types in Designer which also contains various system variables e Text Text of any length Any literal text must be enclosed in double quotes e g Oscar Designer will preserve any capitalization or spaces e Logical ON or OFF You also can use TRUE or FALSE which are synonyms for ON and OFF respectively e Integer Any whole number between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 or any expression which evaluates to a number within that range e Real Any number between approximately 3 40298 and 3 40298 or any expression which evaluates to a number within that range Designer also contains various system variables Set Variable In the Set Variable prompt box enter the variable name followed by an equals sign and an initial value for the variable Examples Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 63 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Name Fred Flint Quantity 5 67 If the variable does not exist then a dialog will appear asking you to confirm the variable type If you do not know what the initial value will be you can enter e 0 fora numeric variable interger e two double quote marks for a text variable also known as a Null String e FALSE for a logical variabl
210. e panel as usual 1280 x 768 74 t X When you are done click on the Script Up button in the script title bar as necessary until you see the top level of the script structure Ungrouping To dissolve the group and leave its contents as individual items in the script select the page representing the group then click on the Edit pull do wn menu in the Main View and choose Ungroup The items in the group are listed individually and consecutively beginning at the position in the Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 77 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 script previously occupied by the group Adjusting Script Properties Script properties can be accessed from the File Menu and selecting Script Properties or via the Script Properties button next to the script s dimensions This opens a dialog allowing you to view and edit specific properties related to the current script There are three tabs Tab Function Dimensions Allows you to change the dimension of the pages in the script All background images videos or other types will be sized relative to the dimensions specified using user specific rules If different dimensions are used for full screen playback in the Options dialog the elements on the script pages are rendered normally but the page will be stretched shrunk to fit the dimensions specified in the Options di
211. e production Glossary of Terms defines the terminology used within Designer Primer In Designer your production is defined by a script which is defined as a file that specifies a series of events and their timing The events in a script are the individual image files sound files text lines and other items that appear in the final production The events in a script contain all the settings and options that describe how and when things happen in the final production Scala Script L Page 1 5 sec Page 2 15 sec Page 3 10 sec N CUT T s gt L N ais Elements Elements Elements However you do not have to work with a Designer script the way a programmer works which is through a series of text commands You may write and edit the script entirely through the Scala graphical user interface It shows you the script as one or more pages of information each of which can be created or designed graphically and arranged in any order you choose As you work with a production and compose the script each page is listed separately in the Main View A page number is assigned based on its position in the production sequence including a short title for easy identification Thus the Designer Main View shows you an outline of your script and an overview of its structure Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 5 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala
212. e scheduled entries for the selected events or for the whole script Use multiple entries to create complex schedules for an event You can combine entries which use different types of scheduling periodic enabled periodic disabled interrupt freely and timeslot When the periodic enabled and periodic disabled types are combined the valid period s created by the cumulative effect of all enabled entries will be determined first then the disabled entries are will be used to cut holes in the valid period Explanation Creates periodic schedules with Valid Time of Day ranges within which the event may run Set a time of day after which the event can run using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Set a time of day after which the event cannot run using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Creates periodic schedules with Valid Time of Day ranges within which the event may run Set a time of day after which the event cannot run using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Set a time of day after which the event can run using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Creates an Exact Time of Day event interrupting whatever else happens to be running at that time This option appears and is enabled by default when Event Interrupts Exactly is chosen An interrupt scheduled page will disrupt the normal script flow effectively acting as a branch to that page and s
213. e typical usage of this action would be as the Select Action of a Return or Back interactive button you would place on a page that was the last in a series branched to by a Go to Event button Exiting from a Script Although most productions are designed to run continuously some need to allow the viewer to exit from the script Creating a button to do this is simple Give a button the Exit from Script action as a Select Action ending the script and returning the viewer either to Windows or to the Main menu if the script was run from within Designer Show WWW Page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 129 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 i Option Superceded The Show WWW Page option has been superseded by using Add Web Clip Element and is the preferred method for displaying a web page The option remains for legacy purposes only It allows the viewer to jump out of the playback environment You see the URL text box when Show WWW Page is selected Enter the address of the desired Web page there for example enter http www scala com to jump to Scala s Web page When someone clicks a button that has this as its Select Action Designer attempts to launch or activate the preferred Web browser If successful it then tries to connect to the Web page specified If playback is setup to run full screen playback is minimized so that t
214. e tyr ae Packie wi Ainge a eet E 133 ES 141 age View Toobar MAIN genrene Seiad ar ew net age Garand Beale Gea a aed Sen ade Raa age hs Gites 133 Agee AOS VIG W MENUS mesane aoe tyr ceria n ces tine areca oe E ate ito a dee em on Ger tg anna ee sin ds Sere ce E ee ae ah Spoon Raa 133 1 3 2 1 Using he File Menu in Page VIEW secie nade teeta ade ad reia e ake Sada ded tad eke aa ae eee ees 133 1 3 2 2Using the Edit MenwiniPage View secetei mirn naa aan EE ENA EE AAR E tate e tet Nagra ane Beem ER es 134 1 3 2 3 Using the Add Menu in Page View sa c2344dedwkoedd ban dein Ua ek ada deen EE A eae tee eee 136 1 3 2 4 Using the View Menu in Page View cce tirdr eryece kastr ni une kee ie sha Nae a E a eke 137 1 3 2 5 Using the Tools Men in Page View 22344 tok cocaine EEE E E E ERA E EE ERA aa E tees 139 Toe Ol USiNG Ond PONS 1 kann tan ee e aa E apna ended Ga eae eta ee A E A E E A a aewing 140 Toe Oe USING GUI LINCS cca notae tA wee nether RA Ga ek Sade Res astute A E ane T dat ees 141 1 3 2 6 Using the Help Menu in Page View cco chow kwew a gaiaan teh wie keaen dated da Naa koe adetowsatew eles 142 1 3 3 Element Selection Moving and Manipulation 0 00 ccc eens 143 134 WORKING WIth ORF age Elements tasrerigre hivd rirka r e Meee a ar ee eg anid Seah ak Mote eee keep dae wb agian teen on EE 144 TAWONG WITH T emps deserenan cae osha ok Mudie Chere eed egestas Bea Cena a detent Aes heehee OREO A Ce ee 144 TAT Template Crealo cgi cick Spe caes
215. ebclip andany ScalaScript buttons that overlap with the webclip WEBCLIP_DisableAccelerated2DCanvas WEBCLIP_ DisableGPU and WEBCLIP_Disable3DAPIs These three boolean variables are used to disable different aspects of hardware acceleration used by webclip They assist the user with potential compatibility driver bugs or performance issues introduced by the introduction of hardware acceleration for 2D and 3D in Scala Release 11 The mmos ini options are These all default to off These control the corresponding disable chrome command line flag respectively disable accelerated 2d canvas disable 3d apis sable gpu WEBCLIP_IgnoreCertificateErrors 1 This passes the command flag ignore certificate errors to Chromium It disables the security features related to certificate verification If a web page fails certificate verification it tells the browser to show the page anyway During testing there are times where this flag is helpful to either diagnose certificate problems or lift restrictions during development when the web server is not available or may not be production ready Warning Because leaving this flag in place has significant security risks if you use it we provide a strong warning against it You are using an unsupported webclip flag Stability and security will suffer This will appear as an error in logs and is intended to be obvious so the end user won t forget to disable it Scala Designer MMOS INI Op
216. ed by Scala A VBScript example to sleep for a 3 seconds would be oScala Sleep 3000 In Python you would write import scalas scalab ScalaPlayer Sleep 3000 Log Method To log a message to IC log say oScala Log the message to write In Python you would write import scalas scala5 ScalaPlayer Log the message to write LogExternalError Method Your script can report a custom warning or problem into the log which can also appear on the Content Manager Player Health screens and trigger an email alert to the network administrators To do this use the LogExternalError method To report a problem say oScala LogExternalError 1000 my module name the detailed problem to report In Python you would write Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 213 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 import scalas scala5 ScalaPlayer LogExternalError 1000 my module name the detailed problem to report ScriptDir Property The ScriptDir property returns the name of the folder containing the Windows Script The ScalaFileLock Interface Note The ScalaFileLock interface is available when the Player Network Client is running That means it is available under the Scala Player product but it is not generally available during playback from the Scala Designer product Scala uses normal Windows paths to acces
217. ed information such as dimensions and duration about that media file or ScalaScript Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 230 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Publisher GenerateThumbnail2 mediafilename As String pagename As String thumbnailfilename As String mediaintofilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_errormsg As Variant mediafilename Full path to the source media file or ScalaScript file pagename Name of the page to generate if omitted the first page is used thumbnailfilename Full path to desired image file The file name may end in the extension jpg jpeg png or gif mediainfofilename Full path to desired XML file that will be written to contain media info Use a null string if you do not wish this information to be written out In VBScript use the special vbNullString constant The empty string may be used as an alternative to the null string e width Thumbnail width in pixels e height Thumbnail height in pixels e options A string that can optionally contain one of these flags e rl Rotate 90 degrees left e rr Rotate 90 degrees right e ru Rotate 180 degrees upside down e k Keep aspect e s Skip calculation of duration for ScalaScripts e out_errormsg Error message returned by GenerateThumbnail2 Note that errors such as missing files m
218. edo The Undo command undoes the last action you performed while Redo restores that action Undo and Redo are multi leveled meaning you can repeatedly step backward through the sequence of your changes by continually choosing Undo or step forward in your sequence by choosing Redo Undo Page This is whole page undo Choosing this option will revert the current page to the state it was in when you last entered it from the Main View or from another page in any Design Panel For example if you ve just made several changes to a page and realize that it has all gone wrong Undo Page lets you start over more easily than using Undo repeatedly Cut Deletes information from a page which is then placed on the clipboard and can be pasted into any script Any information located on the clipboard is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Copy Copies information to the clipboard which can then be pasted into any script Any information located on the clipboard is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Paste Paste inserts information from the clipboard which has been cut or copied The position of the information after it has been pasted depends on the current status of the page e f you click on the screen and see the text cursor the information will be inserted at the cursor position e f one or more elements are selected the information will be placed down and slightly to the right of the currently selected it
219. elf and Else must be contiguous to operate as expected White space and comments between the blocks does not matter For instance Group Et Iif conaitiony Sequence execute if condition is TRUE Group ElseIf elseif condition Sequence execute if if condition was FALSE but elseif condition is TRUE Group Else Sequence execute if if condition and elseif condition are FALSE Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 165 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The While statement repeats the execution of the block while the condition is True Group While while condition Sequence stuff to execute while condition is TRUE The Until statement repeats the execution of the block until the condition is True Group Until condition Sequence stuff to execute until condition is TRUE Ay The While statement tests the condition before the block is executed so the block may not even execute once The Until statement tests the condition after the block is executed so the block is always executed at least once Execution order in a script may be controlled using the Goto Use Jump Exit Quit Return Script and OnNotification commands See the reference later in this document for more information on these commands Statements A statement is either a command or an
220. elf contained or its condition variable is created and set within the loop Repeat While may be easier to use The two types are mutually exclusive a loop cannot be both a While and an Until loop Tab Go To Go To actions are the most powerful of the branching instructions because they can remove all linear sequential limitations to the order in which events are executed This will allow much more flexibility in your script Designer also has the powerful capability to set a bookmark when you use a Go To action allowing you to return at a later time and continue running the script from the point after the action Go To branches should be used sparingly Overuse of such actions especially Go to event can make a script difficult to understand and edit Before you use a Go To branch see if there might be another way to accomplish your objective by rearranging events to make the branch unnecessary The Action pop up on this tab has the following options None Go to Event Return to Bookmark Exit from Script Show WWW Page The three Go to actions allow you to make script execution move to some other location in the script from which execution continues You can return to the original location after a Go to by setting a bookmark None This removes the Go To Event Go to Event This is the most flexible branching action Consequently it requires you to specify both the destination itself and the level of the script where the Co
221. elf to re position the cropped area seen The cropped area can also be adjusted in the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as reverting to the Streaming Video Clip to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A Web Clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Addition Keyboard Shortcuts e x Flips the selected Clip horizontally around a vertical axis e y Flips the selected Clip upside down around a horizontal axis e r Rotates the clip clockwise in 15 degree increments e SHIFT r Rotates the clip counter clockwise in 15 degree increments Exporting Clips You can save a still image of a movie clip based on its current start position along with any changes to its size size crop and style applied by choosing Export from the Edit drop down In the File dialog choose a location and enter a name for the processed clip If several clips are selected they will be exported as one with any additional tra
222. em 1 Insert the Designer Installation DVD If auto run is disabled on your PC open Explorer to access the DVD and run setup exe Mame Size Type a Un specied 6 fp ardParty File folder iL Clipart File folder AL TORUALIME LEE Setup Information copyrightit WEE Test Derumernt TO ScalaScriptExpesterPluginManual pef 458568 Adobe Acrobat D alt setup ene 66 655 KR Applicaton 2 Welcome to the Scala Designer Setup Wizard Notice the button to view the Getting Started Guide online This has installation steps similar to these which can help you in a live installation Click Next Welcome to the Scala Designer Setup Wizard Tha val retal Scala Deere Release 11 00 50 on yar mub Ik a recomnended that pou dar all other apobcadens before Tombnuing SCA LAR mk Hest bo otme or Canel to ent Setun tt SHUNEH eras Cal COM Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 10 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 3 Third Party Components If any third party components are already installed those steps will be skipped by the installer Otherwise answer Yes to install components if requested 4 License Agreement Accept and click Next 5 Select Language Click Next sabat Language Hease sikt a aiaga for Sol Dengi 6 Select Destination Location Click Next Phe dauk Sods Deore be baled
223. ements depth arrangement Working with Elements in List Panel View In the Page View List panel page elements and events are listed in order according to time Later events are further down in the list Depending on how you arrange them this sequence can be quite different from the top to bottom arrangement of the elements as they are positioned on the page itself Changing the Order of Events You can change the position of an element in the List panel by pointing to its Element button and dragging the row to a new position but will not change the position of the element on the page The freedom of movement of an element within the list depends on whether it is either a passive or independent element Passive and Independent Elements Passive Elements When the script is running elements which do not contain an In transition will simultaneously come into view with the background They are also collectively affected by any settings that apply to the entire page If they are global elements they will be displayed over every background These are called passive elements meaning they are not separate events in time They cannot have special module column events such as a sound or pause and are always listed first in the List panel When you assign an In transition to an element it becomes an independent element and is no longer passive Independent Elements Elements with transitions and events created as special events will produce effects
224. ems upper left corner e f nothing is selected and there is no cursor visible Designer will remember the last position the text cursor occupied and will insert the information into that position Having copied an element it is possible to paste it exactly on top of the original using the keyboard CTRL ALT V You may continue working with any pasted information Paste Special For special options when pasting material placed on the clipboard from an external program It is available only when there is material on the clipboard apart from plain text which Designer will interpret as graphics When you choose Paste Special you will see a dialog offering two options e Paste as Clip Embed the pasted image into your script e Store as a Separate File Use when you do not want the pasted object to be embedded into the Designer script file Instead it will remain a separately referenced file which will will keep the script file from becoming too large especially when you are using several copies of the same item When you choose this option you will see the File dialog Enter a location and filename and Designer will create a file containing the clipboard object with the name and location you assigned and will display the object on the page The script will reference the file in a manner similar to Adding a file For example copying columns out of a spreadsheet program to be included in a page If pasted normally the spreadsheet data wou
225. ent Manager changes to WIN32_RootDataFolder must be done using the installer rather than by hand editing the MMOS INI files i Note This option is not yet supported for the Playback Audit Reporting Module WININET_EnableServUDirectoryCacheKludge The directory caching of the Serv U FTP server can return incorrect results Scala recommends that directory caching be disabled when using the Serv U FTP server However if this is not possible you can enable a workaround by adding this to your MMOS INI WININET_EnableServUDirectoryCacheKludge 1 The workaround will hurt media transfer performance TCPIPTOOLS_FTPClientKeepAliveCommandChannel Setting this instructs the FTP client to set the socket keep alive option on the FTP command channel This can resolve certain Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 17 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 command channel timeouts that can sometimes be caused by intervening firewalls or routers To enable this add the following to your MMOS INI TCPIPTOOLS_FTPClientKeepAliveCommandChannel 1 Scala Designer and Scala Player MMOS INI Options These MMOS INI Options apply to both Scala Designer and Scala Player Path Options MEDIA_Content You can override the location of the Content folder by setting MEDIA Content path MEDIA_LocallntegratedContent Normally when a Scala scri
226. ents will be managed through Content Manager However you can still use the creative scheduling features built into Designer Scheduling works the same with pages special events elements sub scripts and groups Some types of scheduling will not apply to elements and will only be able to be applied to pages You can schedule events to be run according to various criteria e At regular intervals hourly daily or weekly e Continuously between two given times or dates e Once at a specific date and time By default all events are available to play with no scheduling restrictions What Can Be Scheduled The Schedule panel can be used for all of the following although some have limited scheduling options as explained later in this document A page consisting of a background and all its elements Individual elements on a page such as text clips and sounds A group or collection of pages which you can treat as a unit Sub script another script which is run from within the current script There are essentially three types of scheduling in Designer e Periodic e Interrupt e Timeslot Each contains its particular uses depending on your production needs Periodic Scheduling Periodic scheduling can be applied to any script event It creates windows of time which are defined as valid time periods It uses four successively more specific levels which you may use to define a valid time period e Valid Range Overall sched
227. er upper and Backdrop layer lower e File Shows the current media asset being used and can be change by clicking the name to bring up the file dialog Face A Streaming Video Background can have options applied to the face by selecting the Face button Backdrop A Streaming Video Background can have a Backdrop Fill Type options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Loops Specifies the number of times the Streaming Video Background should play Start Time in HH MM SS hh To have the Streaming Video Background start playing at some point after the beginning use the Start Time control to set the position in hours minutes seconds and hundredths HH MM SS hh End Time in HH MM SS hh To have the Streaming Video Background stop playing at some point before the end use the End Time control to set the length of time from the beginning to the desired stop point HH MM SS hh e Volume Specifies the volume level using a range of 0 255 with the default set to 255 Changing the Face Options Selecting the Face button opens up the Face options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Changing the Backdrop Options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e
228. esign Flash Clip Panel consists of following tabs a ror e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page a io a e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings TTE Par E rg r m e Chroma Key Controls that let you select a particular Clip color and make it transparent a FaF e Process Enables real time color processing of the clip during playback bami roe e Flash Control Sets Flash clip variables and other parameters Design Panel Tabs These panels house the functions and settings you will need to compose individual pages in your script There is a specific Design panel associated with every major type of design task The name of a panel reflects its purpose or the type of element with which it is associated The tabs containing common functions between elements are on the left most tab and the unique functions for the element are on the right Each Panel Tab is described in general and some options may not be available depending on the Element Panel Tab Function Appearance Basic style options that can be applied to the element Position Control how elements are positioned on the page Misc Various options that do not fit on other tabs including options to save and reset default values Chroma Key Make a particular Clip
229. esigner 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e Scaling provides you with 3 choices for default playback e Fill Display Exactly Fills the entire display or window when playing back a Scala script The default setting of Fill Display Exactly is recommended You may choose Fit Inside Display if the script has an aspect ratio other than 16 9 e g portrait or designed for a sidebar frame e Fit Inside Display Choose if the script has an aspect ratio other than 16 9 e g portrait or designed for a sidebar frame as this setting will preserve the media item s aspect ratio e Fill and Trim to Display Will also preserve the media item s aspect ratio e Playback Advanced Modify advanced options to conserve video memory for playback in Designer e Network Contains options for Designer to connect via a Proxy server to Scala Enterprise Content Manager e Authoring Modify the options that control the UI including e Toolbar By Defaulting to Text and Icons you can minimize this to icons or text only once you are familiar with the Ul e Skin Determines the icon sets and color scheme used for your interface e Show Off Page Elements Extends your work surface by allowing you to work with elements outside of the page boundaries Auto Recover Allows you to modify the options that controls the Auto Recover feature including the time interval between check points Modules Shows the Scala modules installed and allows you to modify the co
230. ession the result of which is used to find the destination event For example Integer n n D Will go to a page called Page5 GotoExpr Page Format n GotoExpr Command syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 182 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Jump integer expr Used to jump a number of events The direction may be either forward or backward with positive numbers indicating a forward jump Jump 2 Jump 95 Jump 1 does not skip any events it just jumps to the next event Jump 2 skips one event Blocks encountered are considered a single event Jump 3 sample_command first event skipped second event skipped events within the block are ignored another_command jump to here third event Jump Command syntax JumpPage JumpPage Command syntax Use eventname Executes the named event then returns when the event completes The named event may be a block in which case the entire block will be executed If the named event is not a block then only the single event will be executed as a subroutine Often events referenced by a Use command are kept in the resources list but this is not required They may also be in the sequence list Use name execution continues here name echo this is a test n Sequence Use res execution
231. eters in the selected elements Insert Image Inserts the given image into the text or text box element at the current location as an embedded image Using the Add Menu in Page View Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 136 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Aad Files Add Recent File d Add From Regent Folder b Add Special Event Add Text Add Test Box Add Text Crawl Add Text Entry Field Adhd Table Adi Box Add Oval Add Line Add Streaming Video Clip Add Web Clip The Add menu enables you to add to the page any of the available designer elements at the current selected position indicated by either the Text cursor or the first selected Element After adding the element the appropriate Design Panel opens allowing you set various attributes for the element It enables quick access to Menu Item Add File s CTRL D Add Recent File Add From Recent Folder Add Special Event Add Text Add Text Box Add Text Crawl Add Text Entry Filed Add Table Add Box Add Oval Add Line Add TV Clip Add Streaming Video Clip Add Web Clip Using the View Menu in Page View Explanation Add a new element by opening the File dialog where you can choose from among Clips Anim Clips Movie Clips HTML Widgets Multi tile Clips Buttons or other files Choose from previously used media files
232. existing variable Repeat Conditions under which the page or group of pages will be repeated Go To Allows the script flow control to be adjusted from playing the next page in the sequence of the script Tab Condition The Show If Expression literally translates into words and action If this condition is true then show this event If the condition is not true the event will be skipped and the script will continue with the following event The condition can be any logical expression allowed in Designer Because expressions in Designer can use logical operators you can also use the condition to make more complex comparisons Show If may also be combined with the Go To and Repeat branches to make those operations Show If Expression Enter a valid Expression for testing either by e Typing the expression in the prompt e Selecting Variables Functions and Operators from the list to build an expression For example the condition might be the expression Quantity lt 5 that is an event having this condition would execute if the value in the variable QUANTITY was less than 5 Tab Set Variable A variable is a container for a quantity which can change within a script Because you can name variables you can refer to what they hold by their names regardless of the actual value For example you can create a variable which keeps track of how many times a page has been played with a name such as iterations You can also increas
233. f the original name of a page is Info the name of the first copy is Info 1 If the page is copied again the second copy will be titled Info 2 and so on O l A copy of the original selection s will remain on the clipboard and may be pasted as many times as necessary until the next time you choose Cut or Copy from the list of Edit options Deleting Pages Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 76 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 To remove a page s from a script 1 Select the page or pages you want to delete 2 In the Main View click on Edit and choose Delete Del Delete or Cut Ctrl X If you choose Cut the pages will be placed on the clipboard If you choose Delete the pages will not be placed on the clipboard The only way a deleted page can be recovered is by using Undo If you used Cut then the page can be moved to another position in the same script or moved to a different script by using Edit from the menu and choose Paste If you selected and cut several pages they will be inserted in the order in which they were selected Information which is cut or copied to the clipboard will remain there until you choose Cut or Copy again When you quit Designer the clipboard is automatically cleared but any text that exists will remain Disabling Pages A page can be disabled and will not be payed or
234. f the screen will provide a graphical representation of how your script s slides will be positioned on a sample printed page You will not see your actual script page s images or content on the screen Instead you will see boxes which represent the size and position of each slide The tabbed options panels will allow you to select the options which control the layout of your slides on each page and choose the destination printer to generate the hard copy As you change most layout options the page preview update will automatically reflect your changes Remember the slides are only a representation of the physical position of your script pages They are not a preview of what will actually print Reset Settings Clicking this option changes all of ScalaPrint s settings back to their defaults Any selections which have been made will be discarded Print When you have made your choices for your print job s content layout and destination you are ready to print Click the Print button to send the currently configured print job to the printer you have selected Close Selecting Close exits ScalaPrint and will return you to the Main View All settings in the tabbed panels will automatically be saved when you close the ScalaPrint view ScalaPrint General The General panel options deal with the overall arrangement of the script pages you want to print Slides This selector allows you to choose whether to print slides for all scrip
235. fect Tab Process Designer allows you to make real time changes in the overall color balance and tonal qualities of a clip or background since it is not uncommon that they may need some touching up Some examples may include tinting an image a particular color for an artistic effect or reducing its contrast to make it work better by allowing it to blend more effectively into a background Adjustments made in the Process panel will not alter the source image You can always return to the original unprocessed image with a single click i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Clip x Appearance Position Mise Chrora Key Process i Hue O Red 0 Green 0 Blue 0 p i J T ae TE Rar aes eee Reget Gamma 0 Saturatio 0 Brightness 0 Contrast 0 ae eee I aaa eee as Me a eee Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 113 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Types of Image Processing The image processing tasks which you can accomplish in the Process panel can be distinguished within two general types e Color Processing Deals with adjusting hues which make up an image You can apply minor alterations in the strength of a particular color component in order t
236. ffect of the last Redo Main View Toolbar List This button toggles the view between Thumbnail Mode and List Mode Thumbnail Mode In this mode you will see thumbnails of each page group sub script or special event in the script Page Thumbnails have the page name shown underneath them to help distinguish the different types of thumbnails in the Main View A page group of pages sub script or a special event reveal different thumbnails In the Main View every item listed regardless of typoe page group sub script or special event is represented by a row consisting of a separate columns When you select the thumbnail of a page the column buttons for that page are shown above the rows of thumbnails The size of the thumbnails can be adjusted using the slider List Mode The script in the Main View is presented as a list of page names The List icon in the Main View toolbar enables you to choose how the pages of the script appear Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 43 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Details and columns are the same as in thumbnail mode However the column buitons of all the visible pages are readily available for each page making it easy to apply adjustments to your script rapidly Note Rows are the same for either List Mode or Thumbnail Mode Columns represent previously selecte
237. fine the size of the area visible after cropping initially lt full width gt x lt full height gt The first value is the crop area width and the second is its height You can revert to the uncropped state by turning this button Off Flip X When enabled the media asset is flipped horizontally around the vertical axis The keyboard shortcut for this option is x Flip Y When enabled the media asset is flipped vertically around the horizontal axis The keyboard shortcut for this option is y Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 111 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Locked When enabled this locks the element in position and prevents any editing of the element A small lock indicates the element is currently locked Element Level The visual order stacking of elements is controlled by the Element Level Normally the elements are placed on the page in the order they appear in the list view of the page This means elements that appear later will be on top of other elements that appeared earlier The level number enables the visual ordering of the elements to be adjusted independently from the order the elements appear on the screen Elements with a higher level number always appear on top of those with a lower numbered level regardless of when they appear on the page By default all elements are created on level zero 0 and in
238. ful companion application Content Manager lets you easily publish and distribute your productions across the internet to networks of Scala Players located around the globe Designer was created specifically for visual communication and has many publication and playback options that make the environment a powerful creative composition tool to add to your existing toolbox Designer provides users with the ability to create and publish content to Content Manager for Scala Players in a Scala Enterprise network Content created with Designer ranges from dynamic presentations to interactive applications to data driven information Although Scala supports a wide variety of media formats from images to streaming video only Designer has these benefits e Creates content in the native Scala format e Can be used to create Scala Templates e Can mix high quality motion with dynamic data Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 4 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 In a Scala Enterprise network Designer is part of a workflow process allowing users to create scripts and templates manage them in Content Manager and play them in Player An illustration of this process is below EE ee eee Scala Scala Deslgeer Designer can work for you Designer offers you a variety of presentation formats so you can use whatever fits your purpose
239. g Only the first 1000 characters are imported Exporting Text Text can be exported either as text or as a clip which contains an image of the text To export text 1 Select the text you want to save If you select several elements to save as text Designer will save them in the order selected You can also save a selected segment of a text element 2 Click the File pull down menu and choose Export Selection as Text If you want to save the selected text element as a graphic clip then select Save Selected as Clip from the File pull down menu Any selected elements other than text will be ignored if you have chosen to export as Text The result is either a plain ASCII text file containing your selected text with carriage return line feeds at the ends of text elements or a PNG image file Add a Text Box Element To add a Text box and enter text into it 1 Position the text cursor where you want to insert the Text Box 2 Either use the Add Menu or Drop Menu option and select Add Text Box Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 84 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 3 Asemi opaque rectangle appears with the text cursor ready to enter text 4 To exit cursor mode press the Esc key which will remove the text cursor Your element can now be resized or other styles applied though the Design Text Box Panel The Text Box is a useful
240. g Clips You can save clips with your size crop and style changes simply by choosing Export from the Edit drop down menu In the File dialog choose a location and enter a name for the processed clip If several clips are selected they will be exported as one with any additional transparent areas and the resulting file is saved as a PNG file Add a Movie Clip Element A Movie Clip is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background For a more detailed discussion of the Movie Clip formats supported by Designer click here It can added to the page using these methods e Position the cursor at the point on the page you want to insert the Movie Clip e Then either e in the toolbar click on the Add icon which reveals the File dialog e Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add File s option to select a Movie Clip The Movie Clip imported at full resolution at the cursor position After importing the Design Movie Clip Panel appears It contains numerous options to use when working with Movie Clips which are discussed further in the section associated with a specific type General Visual Manipulation When the Movie Clip is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge The handles are an indication that a Movie Clip has been selected You can continue to work with the Movie Clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the Mov
241. g it is selected and allowing you to change its shape General Visual Manipulation Moving the Line e With the Line Element selected simply drag the Line to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging either the Start or End point of the Line Size can also be adjusted in the Design Oval Panel s Position Tab e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the Line s width and height radii using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point e SHIFT dragging a corner handle will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height radii and maintain the original aspect ratio of the Oval using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point e CTRL dragging a corner handle resizes the Oval s width and height radii from the Center e SHIFT CTRL dragging a corner or side handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the Oval simultaneously adjusting the width and height You can cancel a draggi
242. g the Data Source module the actual data retrieval and preparation needs to be done by an external program or script the Fetcher For this document Python is assumed but any suitable language could be used The following is what the Fetcher must do Feed Source Connection Management The Fetcher is responsible for the connection to the Original Feed source and to connect in a suitable way handle errors etc It needs to handle all the aspects needed for correct behavior including Frequency of checking Use of HTTP conditional get notification APIs or other optimized ways of detecting changes in the Original Feed Use of proxies where required Local caching of feed data Error detection Error handling e g how to inform playback that a feed is unavailable or stale Feed Retrieval The Fetcher must retrieve the data from the Original Feed This could involve reading data from a local file from the web from a database from a spreadsheet from hardware interfaces such as the serial port etc It will have to deal with whatever format is being offered e g RSS XML JSON Database CSV proprietary etc In some cases the Fetcher will have to read data from multiple places and combine that into a single Local XML File for Player Filtering Sorting Scrubbing and Formatting Although some filtering sorting and formatting is possible within the ScalaScript the Fetcher normally would do things like e Filtering out unnee
243. g the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Text Entry Field Element Field Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page gt ta tn x Fe Teer m He ji Jal lE rh 5 i e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page ta Fim IN P E 1 d iih b i _ eter O T T L bh i sa e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings wea FIT N a LE r a Pa TEF E e pn er se TETT rle aaa O e Field Defines Text Entry Field attributes mm miT N a Ts E E yr arny a rr mg Ere T Pai iia ir ekg Design Box Panel The Design Box Panel is shown when a Box Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Change Box size and the area color or fill type e Add An outline e Apply Color gradients opacity gradients and corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element e Set In and Out transitions for the element The Design Box Panel is accessed by e Adding a new Box Element Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 101 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e Selec
244. ge will display for a fixed period of time Any elements still in motion at that moment will disappear when the page transitions to the next b Wait Forever Page will not advance on its own Some other method such as clicking the mouse or using the keyboard is needed to advance c Record Time with Mouse Sets the page s timing interactively the next time you play the script d Wait For Elements Page will wait for all the elements on the page to complete Note If none of the elements have transitions or durations of their own e g a video the page will effectively have zero duration and will only appear briefly Use the Duration option to specify a value 4 Acommon choice is to select Duration and enter a value such as 10 seconds the units are HH MM SS hh When you have completed setting the timing click Close Adding Sound Sounds can be added within a page such a sound effect or to a page itself such as background music To add sound to a page 1 Select a page 2 Click on the Sound button for the page CC ry p Pa HOEFT min Se ETET 0 m I 3 ige i tabi ri gh Ee Ee eee ee ee BEE i Fi 5 Navigate to a folder containing WAV or MP3 file and double click on one Notice the Sound button for the page reflects that a sound has been added If the sound is longer than the duration of the page it will continue to play over other pages The Sound panel has additional c
245. gle to open the options popup e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the Bevel e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the Bevel the level as well as the direction of the gradient e Thickness Sets the thickness in pixels of the Bevel Transitions e In Shows the current In transition for the element e Out Shows the current Out transition for the element These can be changed by clicking the button to open the Element Transition Panel Opacity Sets the overall Opacity of the Element The overall opacity effects any opacity level already set in the Face Outline Shadow Backdrop and or Bevel Options Page Alignment The six 6 page alignment buttons adjusts the position of the element in relation to the page margins The upper group align the element to Top Middle or Bottom of the page while the lower group align the element to the Left Center or Right of the Page Margins Text Based Element Controls Text Text Box Text Crawl Table Cell and Text Entry Field Elements Font Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 107 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The Font button has the currently selected font shown and lets you change the typeface of the selected text based element Click on the name of the current typeface to change it and the shown is in two parts the top section has the recently used fonts
246. gradient Corners Corner Styles can be applied to this part of the element Mask Choose an image file to use as a mask to determine the opacity for this part of the element Padding Adjust the height and width of the background box by adding padding to the Top Left Right and Bottom Linked Padding When enabled allows all the padding sliders to be adjusted simultaneously Bevel Specify a colored or textured effect for the bevel around the selected elements bounding box Enable Disable the Bevel The Bevel is disabled by default but will show five 5 color chips and the options popup button when enabled Fill Chips The five 5 color chips are e Bevel All Edge Fill Automatically populate all the bevel fill chips with an appropriate color or image Colors are added to the User Palette Bevel Top Fill Adjust the fill type settings for the Top bevel Bevel Left Fill Adjust the fill type settings for the Left bevel Bevel Right Fill Adjust the fill type settings for the Right bevel Bevel Bottom Fill Adjust the fill type settings for the Bottom bevel It is recommended to change the Bevel All Edge Fill color or texture first by clicking on the color chip to open the Fill Options popup After this has been set change the individual Bevel edges if required Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the trian
247. gt tags are synonymous For typefacename specify the typeface as generally seen in saved ScalaScripts e g lt typeface Arial Western gt e To specify a color use either a hexadecimal value rrggbb or its decimal equivalent e The lt extragap gt option specifies the number of extra pixel rows of gap that should be added before the next segment is crawled This option is useful to increase spacing when using scrolls i e vertical crawls Connecting HTML5 Web Clips and ScalaScript Passing Data Into HTML5 Web Clips The WebClip command creates an HTML5 environment that supports a JavaScript accessor function to read Scala Player variables and Metadata Here is some sample JavaScript a window ScalaGetVariable Player PlayerName b window ScalaGetVariable MediaIltem Description c window ScalaGetVariable Foo Alternately you may use window ScalaGetMetadataValue as a synonym The values from window ScalaGetVariable are not live they are the values at the time the Web Clip was started Also there is not currently a function to set Player variables Waiting for HTML5 Web Clips Normally Scala playback advances at the end of a media item such as the end of a video Since HTML5 can encapsulate complex behaviors there is as JavaScript function the HTML5 can use to signal that it is complete and that Scala playback should advance Here is some sample JavaScript window ScalaDone Connecting
248. h the ampersand amp character For example var1 Hello World amp var2 300 Interactive Enables the Flash Background to receive input controls from an input device such as a touch screen Mode Controls the Window Mode property of the Flash Background e Opaque mode hides everything underneath the Flash Background e Transparent mode allows elements underneath to show through any transparent portions of the Flash Clip including any alpha channel transparency Quality Specifies the quality of the flash playback e Low Favors playback speed over appearance and never uses anti aliasing e Auto Low Favors speed and begins with anti aliasing turned off but if the CPU is powerful enough it will dynamically switch to a higher quality and turn on anti aliasing e Auto High Starts with higher quality with anti aliasing turned on but will dynamically turn off anti aliasing and cut back the quality to maintain reasonable playback performance e Medium Applies some anti aliasing and does not smooth bitmaps e High Favors appearance over playback speed and always applies anti aliasing It uses bitmap smoothing when there is no animation e Best Provides the best display quality without regard for playback performance All output is anti aliased and all bitmaps are smoothed Tab Image Settings i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features desc
249. has registered to parse a command then an error will be displayed when the script is loaded Arguments to commands are enclosed in parentheses and multiple arguments are separated by commas Arguments may include named options such as this Text command which has a Style and an Outline option Text0 Of Outline Sey levrz Outlines on Thickness 2 Peng l 5 Options may be embedded within options as in Outline This may go arbitrarily deep For instance the Text command shown has an Oultline option which has a Pen option Commands with no arguments have an empty set of parentheses following the command identifier Expressions May appear in two places e Right hand side of an assignment statement e Argument list of a command function or array That is the following are all valid x x 1 CesesConmmand y 3 x 2 val Sin 2 theta next_channel_name channels_array channel 1 Variables and functions are often used in expressions foo x temp 100 Random 1 10 Expressions may also be used inside quoted strings using a special notation called bang expansion This uses the exclamation point character which is also known as a bang character to introduce an expression embedded within a string substitute the variables x and y in the string plus use an expression string var XxX value 1S lx Y value rs ty product 2s f x vy The expression is evaluated when the s
250. hat references a variable Group Integer x x 3 SLEING CSL Yr gt See Wey aS ees And then within that script there are two different uses of that string Group Integer x x 9123 Sequence Text 10 20 str Texte 10 20 SCEIJ If strings used static binding then the string would bind the value of x to 3 when the script is parsed If this were true then when if the script were run it would print x is 3 twice However strings use dynamic binding to resolve internal variable references so each use of the string once in each of the Text commands will bind when it is encountered Thus the script will print x is 9123 and x is 3 The location of the Use command in the script does not change the binding of names in that the called subroutine This is best shown through Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 172 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 examples Group Integer x x 100 Sequence Use foo Group Integer x x 123 Sequence Use foo Resources TOO Tesch ioe 15 Loe This script will print x is 100 twice The resolution of the name x does not happen from where the subroutine is used it happens from where the subroutine is defined in the script Therefore the name x referenced in the resources list will be found at the outer level regardless of whet
251. he text can fit based on the minimum size This is useful when the text is dynamically created either as a template field or program variable In text cursor mode you can now type in your text When the text box is full the onscreen font size reduces as you continue to type On reaching the minimum size the Text Box will overflow When you select another element or hit ESC the text will be trimmed to the box Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 26 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Tmn ian rind tt EH IA cA hA o ee Jrk ri de dr Spe eee at et be ae hr wie JL AALA Se ee reri eer oe in ian a ure y and F awl bhite Changing Font Color and Style You can change the font color and style of the text depending on what is selected If the text has a selection border around it the entire element is selected Any style changes will affect all the letters in the element To select the entire text element press Esc or double click the element To change the font click on the Font button with the name of the font in it You see a list in which you can choose from any TrueType fonts installed on your system Select a font when you are done Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 27 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs s
252. he Web browser window is visible on the desktop Tab Other Action The Other Actions tab provide actions that take place when a button transitions between selection status Transition From the Transition pop up choose the selection status transition for which the additional action s should apply The action which changes the button from it s Normal state unless noted to will take place when Status Function Makes Changes To Button Selected Button is selected Select On state from the Normal or Highlight states Mouse Off Button Moves off a button or otherwise becomes Normal state from the Select On state idle Mouse Over Button Passed over by the mouse pointer or Highlight state from the Normal state otherwise is highlighted Selection status is closely related to a button s visual state with the distinction being that any of the selection status transitions can occur regardless of how many visual states you have defined for a button For example a 1 state Push button can have secondary actions defined for a transition to the Highlight state regardless of the fact that the button itself does not have a visual Highlight state Sound Each selection status transition can have a different sound When the selection status transition for which you have set a sound occurs the sound event plays It plays to completion even if the button does not remain in the state that triggered the sound Clicking the Sound button opens the Sound
253. he creative process and enables quick access to Function Explanation Add Page From Media File Add a new page by opening the File dialog where you can choose backgrounds or sub scripts Add Page From Recent Media File Choose from previously used media Add Page From Recent Media Folder Choose media from a previously used media folder Add Plain Page Add a page with a solid color background Add Special Event Add an event other than a background such as a sound event or pause or some other not visual event Add Streaming Video Page Add a page whose source is a video stream Using Drag and Drop Alternatively you can drag media files into the Main View from your desktop and pages will automatically be created for you and the media will be embedded into the script Using the View Menu in Main View The View Menu has a number of functions available to assist you during the creative process and enables quick access to Function Explanation List Toggles between Thumbnail and List Views Preview Previews the currently selected page s Play Shows the entire script from the beginning Using the Tools Menu in Main View The Tools Menu has a number of functions available to assist you during the creative process and enables quick access to Function Explanation Multi Tile Editor Allows you to create and edit multi tiles graphic objects that are similar to clips They may be resized without distorting their contents and
254. he current page e None Does not update at all When using Textfile it is recommended that Update be set to Normal for the text variables Line1 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 112 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 I Line2 LineN to avoid premature updating of the display On Replay Note This is intended for advanced scripting only This feature allows you to control what should happen if the element is run again as part of some scripting in your page e Add Makes a new element leaving the existing element present It can be used in a scripted loop to create several copies of an element e Replace Makes a new element replacing the existing element It can be used to update the image file used by a clip e Ignore Will not make a new element after the first time Tab Chroma Key Transparency is generally handled for clip formats containing a pre set alpha channel For those that do not support alpha channel the transparent area can be associated with a selected color called the Chroma Key Any particular color in the clip s palette which has been defined as transparent will determine which areas of the clip will disappear when Transpa rency in the Appearance tab is turned On You can also specify which color in a clip is transparent using the Chroma Key tab in the Design panel By turning the Transp
255. he designer during the creative process and it enables quick access to The primary Design panels of Element F3 Background F4 Buttons F5 Palette F6 and List F7 Hiding the Design Panels Hiding Elements Hide Show Global Elements Hide Show Off page Elements Extras Grids and Guide Lines Show Extras Snap to Snap Zoom Control Preview Page Play Script Hiding the Design Panels To see the covered portion of a page obscured by a panel without scrolling press the secondary Right mouse button and select Hide Design Panel When the tab is hidden press the secondary Right mouse button to make it visible If your keyboard is not globally programmed with another feature or you have reprogrammed it for accessibility in Designer you can also use the F11 key to Hide Show the Design panel If you are running in a window and your desktop is large enough you can enlarge the window so that the Design panels do not obscure the Page View canvas Hiding Elements It is useful to be able to hide elements while working on a page since typically when designing several elements are arranged one on top of another Hide Selected Elements Select the element either by clicking it in the design canvas or from the List Panel then choose Hide Selected Elements from the View pull down menu Hide All Other Elements Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 138 Scala
256. he media formats used it can be a good idea to set the M MOS INI setting DSHOWRENDER_FFMPEGFallbackToDirectShow 0 Media Handling Options If a video stream has multiple audio tracks we select the one whose language matches the system s language This can be overridden with the M MOS INI key DSHOWRENDER_IPTVISO639LanguageID O0xnnnnnn where nnnnnn is the hex representation of ISO 639 language code e g 0x737061 corresponding to spa for Spanish DSHOWRENDER_UseSafestRecognition When Scala tries to identify files as video it sometimes needs to invoke third party CODECs installed on the system Rare combinations of these CODECs with certain media files can crash By setting DSHOWRENDER_UseSafestRecognition 1 Scala will only use more conservative ways to identify video files FLASHLOADER_MaxTextureSize Limits the maximum texture size resolution used for Flash clips that effectively gives better performance for slightly fuzzier visual quality for large Flash clips Set FLASHLOADER_MaxTextureSize n Where nis at least 400 If the Flash clip is larger than n in either dimension playback will cut its size in half repeatedly until both dimensions are less than or equal to n The Flash clip will be drawn at its correct size but with reduced detail enabling higher performance A small number of WMV videos are encoded interlaced and interlacing artifacts could be visible when played in Scala Playback of WMV files can now be for
257. he order of existing events on a Page It can also create a special event which may not be associated with a visual element If you are currently working in a Design Panel click on the List icon on the toolbar If you are in the Main View select the page you want to edit before you choose List from the toolbar You will see the Page View List Panel complete with text and clip elements If the page has more than a few elements you can use the scroll bars to access different parts of the list or you can click on the Normal Full Size button in the panel title bar to enlarge the panel to full screen size This allows you to see multiple events in the list thereby realizing their relationships to one another Clicking the Normal Full Size button a second time will reduce the List Panel to its standard size You will also be able to view both the Page View canvas and the panel simultaneously When the panel is normal size you can press the secondary mouse button to temporarily hide the List panel If the panel is hidden press the button again and it will appear You can easily move between the List Panel and the current page while you are working Any selections or changes which are applied in one area will immediately be reflected in the other Unlike settings defined in most Design Panels you will not be able to see or hear the results until you preview the page or run the script Any changes made in the List Panel are timing related and
258. he screen For instance a Television tuner might change the channel when the value of the channel variable changes If a script must execute an action when the value of a variable changes it may choose to use the OnNotification command to call the action and that commandwill take the specified branch when the value of the variable changes Group OnNotification my_var Use foo OnNotification follows group scope rules that is the command is placed into the group list of a block It is then active throughout the execution of that block It is capable of taking any branch action including Use and Goto The use of OnNotification in this example cause the resource foo to be executed asynchronously every time the variable changes If the asynchronous behavior is not desired then a Goto may be used in place of the Use branch It should be remembered that the OnNotification will remain active if the Goto does not exit the block String Features Bang Expansion Strings may also contain variables or expressions that are expanded when the string is used The variables or expressions are introduced with the bang operator Text l0 10 X as ix Y is ly array index 10 is array 10 The bang operator actually introduces a full expression Parentheses must enclose the expression if it is anything other than a simple variable Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective t
259. hen you open Designer you will see the Main View which is initially empty Once you start creating with Designer more items on the screen will become available The key parts of the Main view are Menu Bar Contains pull down menus for opening saving and closing files as well as editing and viewing options Tool Bar Contains buttons for common functions Script Bar Just below the toolbar when scripts are loaded this area shows their names Page Area The larger area of the window is where your content organized into pages will appear as thumbnails Status Bar The bottom of the window displays messages related to the actions you have done in the program Creating a Script oRWND In Designer your productions are called scripts a file that specifies a sequence of pages containing audio and visual elements Each page is represented by a thumbnail image However you can toggle the display between thumbnails and text only columns by clicking the L ist button in the toolbar Defining the Script To begin work you need to either create a script or load an existing script To create a new script 1 Click New from the Toolbar 2 Choose or enter a Page Size The size to be used depends on the use of the content such as landscape or portrait screens crawls sidebars or other smaller portions of the display or a video wall For example 1368 x768 for a typical landscape LCD screen You can also enter custom
260. her static or dynamic binding is used This script shows the same effect Sequence Sequence Use foo Resources bar Text inner level Resources TOO Goto bar bar Text outer level This script will print outer level Again this is because the Goto is resolved from its actual location in the script and not where it is used This has nothing to do with static vs dynamic binding but is determined solely by the way events in the resources list are handled ScalaScript Variables A variable is a named object that can store a value that can be changed or used elsewhere within a script There are several types of variables which are discussed in grater details later on in this discussion Using the variable typelnteger as an example here is how you can declare a variable called age Integer age Most variables and arrays must be declared although there are built in variables often added by EX modules that are available without declaration Variables that do not need to be declared are always global in scope They are known as built in global or environment variables Global variables do not have to be declared or created by the script However variables that are created within the script must be declared before use Variables that must be declared in the script are known as local variables There are several types of variables Variable Declaration Forms Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and tr
261. hese blocks When the Player must search for an event name to resolve a reference it searches the parent block of the event that has the reference The block is searched from the beginning to the end and the first name that matches is the one that is used If a match is not found in the block then the Player searches the parent of that block from beginning to end This continues until the Player has searched all containing blocks including the main block of the script If the event name is still not resolved then the environment will be searched Different tyoes of name references will search in different areas of the script For instance it does not make sense to jump into the group list of a block so commands like Use orGoto will not look in the group list Variables on the other hand must be defined in the group list of a block as they rely on the group scoping Thus variables will be resolved by searching the group lists of the containing blocks When the Player is searching blocks to resolve names it always searches the group list first followed by the sequence list and finally the resources list Again certain commands do not search the entire block For instance the Goto command does not search the group list ScalaScript allows names to be reused in the same scope That is aname may be used even though it has already been defined within that scope Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the res
262. hon tuple cannot be modified it can only be replaced in its entirety In order to write individual values to a shared array first copy it to a Python list then manipulate the list and finally copy it back This example shows how Import the Scala support module from scala5 import sharedvars Retrieve Scala shared variables scalavars sharedvars Read a Shared array variable can be done directly mypystring The value of the shared value is scalavars sharedarray 4 To write to a shared array first copy to a list mylist scalavars sharedarray Modify the list mylist 4 new_value Finally copy back to the shared array scalavars sharedarray mylist Synchronization Techniques A Windows script starts when the Window Scripting Module event is encountered in playback There are various ways to synchronize the Windows script to the ScalaScript Many of these techniques are illustrated in the advanced scripting examples Technique Wait On Free Running Polling Synchronization Cued Expression Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Explanation The simplest form of synchronization is to run the Windows script with the Wait option set to on The script will run to completion before the ScalaScript resumes Alternatively the Windows script can be free running launched with the Waitoption set to off and no particular synchronization
263. hread Internally the AsyncScri pt command is used to achieve that Such a configuration has multiple ScalaScripts running at the same time each with its own script engine thread and execution context Command Handling Most ScalaScript commands such as those that display pictures draw text play videos play sound handle serial input and output etc do their heavy lifting using their own threads That means the script engine thread does not have to wait for a picture to be displayed before it can process the next command This is how many things can happen in parallel and how a ScalaScript can react rapidly to asynchronous signals while other things are occurring Asynchronous Signals Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 155 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 It is also possible to cause script events to execute in response to asynchronous signals That is an event can execute out of sequence and then playback will resume with the original sequence Q Warning Information below relies on concepts covered later in ScalaScript Language The reader may wish to skip this section on first reading Alternatively try to grasp the concepts of the examples without worrying about the specifics of the implementation The simplest example of responding to asynchronous signals uses the OnNotification command and a system prov
264. http docs scala com display D1100 t Desgner TROO eh 5s scat hn Pe ha sc Paes cc ce lt P eck cog as Paar ean pd ged eels eas fared E gaara Maceae eben dt aoe eee hee tpt N ates 4 ed mrodicing Designen exc cet 2 ct anaes ices cect Star ducted Boa ee wn aad eae a Ge ha ante ah eh oar en nes eek ae 4 ENRIC iener facades pe a a ice hea aca ap Bc ar Wer NS gt N E science ech Sap se cee ened edocs ce ets Mace 5 EPT CV SRI siege erate Mice la Reena gh seu Sou Mace ah tate A A dene ares Bm Mackie hn Bee age gh aisle Madore eg heres ate Sa ae cea 6 PREZ TPS and APLC Sf sated cesar aceon a hase Se ce ah ead ac apa Ai haa aoe asa ma eg ake N Wt a ey gp Acne E eet 8 Til ds COMLEX MENUS avemr haat Gece Med we nhentwad cid tuted ace Meta tw nha tt ae takki ee epee Ree eA Sete ee 8 Tela TROP AUKEVIS YOURFRCAG eaer ea NE E aos Meat ae eho an ata phere des Metered ao Batons A eden 8 tele Stal DESgne sesers nsa Bane ais che aca teme sy gic ane eae N iy Row ee ae aut aetna ek E nee Stes Bey eee 9 1 1 2 1 Advanced Configuration Options for Designer 0 0 ccc ett ett ttn ees 15 Te Med SUING SUIS Acta cee Stee SiS A eter he wed cdg E coreg we ahd A Sing and Wa cake ahaha 2a cae that Sig cide A E E A eaters aed aa then 22 MTs FUE UIIICL LOSING secara ms a ake tec A aber tenet gh ig Vrs eta Ace Sale eds SA nae gee Sis ce aC We ta aed gh ws Agen Ea ase 22 PRIZ LO AUMG ey OCI ae aa e east a roe a gig cae ah aidan N Gey ter eh cae ecards Sa nae togtangh
265. humbs Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer obj GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 C rootfolder NewsTemplate sca _ lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt C images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt es Vehnumbneal gong Ce mediariro xml 512 3264 TMy MUuMehuMbSs erroris If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg Erse MsgBox Generated amp numthumbs amp thumbnail s End If Set obj Nothing Alternate Use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 Sometimes an alternate way of calling GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 can be useful Here you pass a root folder as the first argument and the xmltext additionally provides the path to the template ScalaScript and any media files in the ingredients can be specified with paths relative to the rootfolder Publisher GeneratePreviewT humbnails3 rootfolder As String xmitext As String thumbnailfilename As String mediaintofilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_numthumbs As Variant out_errormsg As Variant e rootfolder Full path to the template ScalaScript e xmitext String of XML that defines the template script and the data field values to use The syntax is slightly different than above All other parameters are the same as above The xmitext string defi
266. ical or False OR True True Comparators Comparators can be used to compare two values The result of the comparison will either be True or False The two values being compared must be of compatible types That is you can compare a boolean to a boolean a string to a string an integer to an integer or a real to a real If you compare an integer to a real the integer is treated as a real for purposes of the comparison Comparator Meaning Example Result lt less than 2 lt 7 True lt less than or equal to 2 lt True gt greater than 2 gt 7 False gt greater than or equal to 2 gt 7 False equal to 2 False lt gt not equal to 2 lt gt 7 True Remember that the equals sign is used both for assignment and as the equal to comparator ScalaScript Syntax The various commands and functions follow certain general syntactical style However certain commands especially legacy ones may have some minor variations Case Scripts are case insensitive That is WHILE is equivalent to while these three lines are equivalent DISPLAY STYLE DISPLAY1 Display Style Displayl display style displayl Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 163 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Naturally case generally matters in string constants What you use is what will be displayed or used Byte Order Mark Mo
267. ich is not in either the main or the user dictionaries for that language is a panel that resembles a regular Design panel The page currently being checked is displayed with the Spelling panel at the bottom of the screen The unrecognized word will be highlighted in the text element on the page If you do not see a highlighted word the word is hidden beneath the Spelling panel As with a Design panel you can temporarily hide the dialog to see the word in context by clicking the secondary Right mouse button and select Hide Design Panel or by pressing F11 The highlighted word will also appear in the Not in Dictionary text box If the word is similar to a word in one of the dictionaries the spell checker will offer a suggested replacement in the Change To text box Additional possibilities for the intended word may be offered in the Suggestions s crolling list You have several options e Accept the suggested correction Can be done either for this occurrence or all occurrences e Make a different correction You can either use one of the suggested alternatives or type the correct spelling yourself e Tell the spell checker to ignore the word Can be done either for this occurrence only for all occurrences in the current session or always by adding the word to the user dictionary e Delete the word from the page e Go to the Design Text Panel to edit the page e Preview the page e Move on to check the following page e Close the spell
268. ided variable that changes value every second called Timing Seconds The OnNotification command executes a branch whenever the value of a variable changes Using this command it is possible to execute a subroutine whenever our example variable Timing Seconds changes value Group OnNotification Timing Seconds Use UpdateDisplay sequence Resources UpdateDisplay Text 10 10 Timing Seconds Whenever the variable Timing Seconds changes value the UpdateDisplay text command is executed It is important to recognize here that the execution of the command does not change the current execution sequence of the script The script continues running as though nothing had happened and there is no break in the playback of the sequence list of the block However at the same time the sequence list is executing the update display subroutine will also run This playback of the subroutine is asynchronous to the normal flow of the program That is the normal playback of the sequence list is not paused or notified in any way The subroutine just executes The UpdateDisplay action in the example executes out of sequence without disturbing the original sequence because of the way the Use branc h operates If the branch had been aGoto then the script would behave differently Using the Goto branch will change the main execution flow to the target location Thus in the script Group OnNotification Timing Seconds Goto UpdateDisplay NO
269. ie Clip to deselect it Moving the Movie Clip With the Movie Clip selected simply drag the clip to a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging on the clip s bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the clip to its original size A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Movie Clip half its current width and height e d make the Movie Clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the Movie Clip without having to re
270. iew where you can edit elements on a page To return to the Main View click the Main button in the Toolbar Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 29 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 You should see your new page as a thumbnail image In the Main view you can adjust the size of the preview thumbnails with the slider bar EX Columns There are several attributes shown as a row of boxes next to the page name Some of them are e No Clicking on it lets you change the page s name and enable disable it from playback e Name Name of the page e Background Changes background settings for one or multiple pages e Transition Apply a page wipe Like elements a page can have a wipe which controls how it first appears e Timing Sets how the page advances which can be after any of several things have happened Changing the Timing The Timing button allows the user to set timing for the page To change the timing 1 Select a page 2 Click the Timing button for the page to open the Timing panel at the bottom of the window 3 The Timing pop up you see here lets you choose several different choices Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 30 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 a Duration Pa
271. ill break the current playback thread and exit the current script OnNotification Command syntax Notification Used to turn variable notification on and off To disable notification for a specific variable myvar use Notification Disable Specific myvar To re enable notification use Notification Enable Specific myvar If the value of myvar changed while notification was disabled no notification will occur To defer notification until a subsequent Enable use this instead of Disable Notification Defer Specific myvar If you omit a specific variable notification for all variables is affected for example Notification Defer Notification Command syntax Subscripts Script scriptname KeepPlaying Boolean expr Used to load another file and then return when it is done Scripc Cs Scala seripus rest scr execution continues here when test scr is done The KeepPlaying option allows the called script to loop if the argument is True Script filename KeepPlaying Boolean execution continues here when test scr is done This will only happen if the script exits such as through a Quit command a Script Command syntax AsyncScript Launches an asynchronous Player thread to play another script independent of the calling script The calling script will continue as soon as the async script is launched Unless it ends on its own the async script will continue running
272. inal size of the multi tile cannot be filled by complete tiles partial tiles will be used The size of the partial tiles can vary in granularity sized increments Some multi tile images have a large scale pattern or shape and will simply look better with a large center middle tile However the nature of some large scale patterns may allow a small granularity Save To save a multi tile which you have created or edited simply click the Save icon in the Multi Tile Editor toolbar to open the File dialog You can also save the multi tile to any location Regardless of the format of the source image multi tiles will be saved as PNG files Close Click Close to exit the Multi Tile Editor and return to the Main View You will be prompted to save any unsaved changes Using the Spell Checker Designer includes a full featured multilingual spell checking tool that can quickly and automatically examine every text element in a script and allow you to correct misspellings manually or by choosing from a list of suggested alternatives Configuring the Spell Checker The Designer Options dialog has a panel dedicated to the spell checker Click Tools and choose Options to open the dialog then click the Spelli ng tab to see the spell checker options panel Starting the Spell Checker You can access the spell checker from the Main View or Page View Starting the spell checker from the Page View will only apply to the current page until you advance to the
273. ing Video Type Flash Type Plain Plain Backgrounds consists of only a Backdrop layer lower e The Fill type is defined by selecting the color clip e A Plain Background can have options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Changing the Fill Type of the Backdrop Plain pages start with a Solid Color as can be seen in the Color Chip To change the type of fill being used click the Color Chip to access the Fill pop up panel The Fill Type selector has four style options Solid Color Fills the backdrop with one single color selected from the palette Color Gradient Fills the backdrop with a linear color gradient from one color to another To change the From and To colors select either or the color chips and then click one of the colors from the palette The direction of the gradient can be adjusted by changing the direction of the arrow or by typing the numeric value of degrees Image Fills the backdrop with a image file which will be stretched to fill the area it will cover Tile Tiles the specified image to fill the backdrop Tiled images have additional controls that allow for the adjustment of e Primary row of tiles to be aligned to the Top Middle or Bottom of the page or the primary column of tiles to be aligned to the Left Center or Right of the page using the alignment buttons e Vertical When this button is off Offset specifies a horizontal offset for successive tile rows When this button is on Offset specifies a
274. ing a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip Cell sizes are adjusted by selecting and dragging one of the grid lines or intersection points of the grid This can also be done in the Design Text Cell Panel s Position Tab Column Size When re sizing the Table the minimum size for any column or row is 3 pixels The height of a row is common to the whole row in the Table The width of a column is common to the whole column in the Table Context Menu The context menu for Table allows you to Insert a Row Above the selected row Insert a Row Below the selected row Insert a Column Before the selected column Insert a Column After the selected column Delete Row Delete Column Text Cell A Text Cell has the same basic functionality as a Text Box and is added by clicking inside the empty grid cell To exit cursor mode press the Esc key which will remove the text cursor the Text Cell Element and other styles applied though the Design Text Cell Panel Add a Box Element Rectangles and Square can be created using the Box Element an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background By applying Corner Styles to boxes you are able to create a variety of shapes e g simple boxes with rounded corne
275. inter through the list then release the mouse button when the desired choice is highlighted Opens a pull down list of options or functions from a top menu item allowing your choice of a particular function or navigation to another panel Lets you either choose a default action or select from a list of actions A single click on the main part of the icon will choose the default action By clicking on the down arrow d part of the icon a drop down list of related actions will be displayed Lets you choose how you want to view pages in a script Normally you would see thumbnails When the icon is depressed the List mode is opened with pages listed by name When clicked this button will turn an option on or off If the label for this type of button ends in a question mark 7 then a check mark appears after the label when the option is on Some buttons of this type can be pressed in to turn their option on and released with another click to turn it off Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 7 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Close and OK Buttons All panels and dialogs have a Close button Cance When the button is pressed any changes made to the settings are saved rather than undone The OK button will accept any changes you make in the dialog then the dialog will close The close button is located in the
276. ion Integer Scala Revision Integer Scala Build Returns the version revision and build of Player Scala Version includes 500 for the generation Scala 5 plus the major release number Scala Revision is the minor release number Scala Build is the hotfix number So Scala 5 Release 4 1 7 would be e Scala Version 504 e Scala Revision 1 e Scala Build 7 Scala Version Variable syntax Scala Revision Variable syntax Scala Build Variable syntax Memory Integer Memory Environment variable containing the total amount not necessarily free of RAM in bytes Extension Functions and Variables The ScalaScript player engine supplies a number of useful core functions and variables There is a wide range of extension functions and variables for media timing and other additions beyond the core language The complete set of functions is given in the ScalaScript functions index Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 199 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The complete set of variables is given in the ScalaScript variables index Many extension functions and variables are outlined below Extension Functions FilelO Module Functions Close Integer Close Integer filehandle Closes a file Note that Close is a function and must be used that way For example x Close n rather than Close n Close Function
277. ion such as dimensions and duration about the resulting message Typical Use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 The typical use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 is Publisher GeneratePreview Thumbnails3 scriptpath As String xmlitext As String thumbnailfilename As String mediaintofilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_numthumbs As Variant out_errormsg As Variant scriptpath Full path to the template ScalaScript xmitext An string of XML that defines the template data field values to use thumbnailfilename Full path to desired image file The file name may end in the extension jpg jpeg png or gif Since templates may have multiple pages the actual file names will have a number appended For example if you specify C Temp Foo jpg then the thumbnail filenames will be C Temp Foo1 jpg C Temp Foo2 jpg and so on mediainfofilename Full path to desired XML file that will be written to contain media info Use a null string if you do not wish this information to be written out In VBScript use the special vbNullString constant The empty string may be used as an alternative to the null string width Thumbnail width in pixels height Thumbnail height in pixels options String that can optionally contain one of these flags e rl Rotate 90 degrees left e rr Rotate 90 degrees right e ru Rotate 180 degrees upside down e k Keep aspect e s Skip calculation of duration for ScalaSc
278. ion Angle of an Element to a Data Field Where available the Rotation Angle of an Element can be bound so that you can adjust the angle of the Element during Message Creation With the Design Panel open for the Element select the Position tab 1 Right click on a Rotation Angle numeric and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Unbinding Elements Removing a Data Field To remove the data field binding from an element right click on it and select Bind to Data then Unbind This removes the connection between the element and the data field Once any element has been assigned to a data field the script is will be considered template script You would need to remove all data fields to convert it back to a normal script Working with Add ons The Scala Photoshop Export Plug In allows you to examine individual layers within a Photoshop document and use it to generate a ScalaScript The Scala Publish Automation EX Module is an additional software component that supports external applications that want to represent and publish content to a Scala network It is a Windows service that allows an external program to perform the equivalent of the Publish to Scala Network function of Designer Using the Scala Photoshop Export Plug In The ScalaScript Export plug in works by examining the individual layers within an Adobe Photoshop document and generating an equivalent scalaScript The installer is located on th
279. ion Description Cut Deletes the selected element or elements The information is placed on the clipboard and can be pasted into any script It is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Copy Copies information to the clipboard which can then be pasted into any script It is available until the next time you choose Cut or Copy Paste Inserts elements from the clipboard that have been cut or copied which are inserted after the currently selected element If you click on the screen and see the text cursor the information will be inserted at the cursor position but if one or more elements are selected the information will be placed after the first selected page Page View Toolbar Zoom Level Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 94 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 100 Zoom In Out The current zoom level is indicated on the Zoom icon which allows you to pick a predefined zoom level from the popup when you click on it You can also use these hotkeys to choose zoom level ALT CTRL 0 Return to 100 zoom CTRL 0 Fit the space in the menu SHIFT CTRL 0 Fill the space in the menu SHIFT ALT CTRL 0 Shows the pages off page elements in the menu CTRL PLUS Attempt to keep the selected items visible CTRL MINUS Zoom out of the page ALT WHEEL Zoom in out around the po
280. ion Modules No Name Background Transition Timing Variables Data Source Input Sound Launch Log Schedule Textfile 1 Page Picture fa 1 00 7 00 The first two columns in the row are identified by number and name and the remaining columns to the right are Module columns The column buttons open different panels at the bottom of the Main View allowing you to create settings associated with the entire script Settings made in the Module panels are reflected in text or graphic form on the Column buttons This will allow a quick overview of the various settings such as transitions and sound effects or to examine the settings in greater detail and make changes to refine the script which can be done by clicking the Column button to open the associated panel Some columns only appear if the EXtension module has been enabled in Options For example the Series EX column has to be enabled in order for you to enter Serial commands and depending on the resolution of your screen you may have to scroll to see the additional columns using the scroll bar 1 Apart from column 1 Number and column 2 Name the column order may be adjusted by selecting the column header and clicking and holding down the left mouse button then dragging the heading either to the left or right Similarly the column width can be adjusted by selecting the column spacer found at top right of the column header This allows
281. ioned anywhere This can be done by selecting Edit Guide Lines from the Tools pull down menu and opening the Guide Lines Editor panel They will automatically be turned on when you open the panel You can create and move lines by clicking and dragging directly on the page or by using controls in the dialog to make more precise adjustments Creating Guide Lines There are two ways to create a guide line 1 Click anywhere on the canvas while in the Guide Lines Editor The new guide line will be vertical or horizontal depending on whether you clicked closer to the sides of the canvas area or the top bottom 2 Click Add Line Your line will be positioned relative to the side of the page specified by the Edge pop up The line is vertical if Edge is set to Left or Right or horizontal if it is set to Top or Bottom The new line will appear solid indicating that it is the current selected line Any other guide lines will be dashed A small arrowhead in the middle of the current line will point to the left side right side the top or the bottom depending upon which edge represents 0 for that line s position value You can create any number of guide lines Selecting Guide Lines Guide lines are individually numbered Each Edge setting Left Right Top or Bottom can have a series of lines associated with it regarding its numbering and position The numbering starts with 0 and represents the order of the lines in terms of how far they are from the
282. is assumed that this folder is set up in Content Manager as a Remote Publish Location Content Manager polls the folder periodically for updates and retrieves the script c Local or Shared Folder Copied to a local or shared folder It is assumed that this folder is set up in Content Manager as a Remote Publish Location similar to Web or FTP Folder Choose Content Manager Direct 6 Click on the Content Manager Address button A dialog will appear to allow you to select the connection protocol and enter a URL and or folder of your connection as well as a User Name and Password When publishing to Content Manager the URL is case sensitive Depending on how Content Manager was configured you may need to specify a port in the URL e g http localhost 8080 Con tentManager 7 The User Name and Password will be an account created in Content Manager e g Designer Click OK 8 Click Refresh and Designer will query Content Manager for the name of its network If this step is successful you Know you have entered the correct settings in order to publish to Content Manager If not you will see an error message Other options in this window include a Media Item Folder Specifies a sub folder to publish the script in the Content Manager media or template library A folder will be created if it does not yet exist O1 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 44 Scala Designer
283. is centered vertically within its bounding box e Bottom Text is bottom aligned within its bounding box e Baseline Text is justified to the baseline specified with the baseline button below Horizontal Text Crawls Only Cursor Use the color chip to set the color of the Text Entry Field s blinking cursor Direction of Text e Left to Right gt fl Sets the default text direction for left to right languages such as English e Right to Left f lt Sets the default text direction for right to left languages such as Arabic or Hebrew Image Movie and Flash Element Controls Clip Shows the name of the current clip or blank if nothing is selected The current clip can be replaced by clicking the name which opens the file dialog and selecting a new file Transparency If a Clip has an alpha channel then Transparency is automatically turned On For other clips turning transparency On makes transparent any portions of a Clip defined as transparent using the controls in the Chroma Key tab Adding Transparency and Chroma Key to Movies and other animations require additional CPU usage and can result in poor performance on low specification playback devices When Transparency is On the Shadow and Outline styles follow the edges of the visible areas of the Clip rather than the rectangular shape of the Clip Volume For a clip where the audio volume is set to to the maximum value This setting can be adjusted by either using the slider or select an
284. isplay or internal state based on the new value of the variable For instance the Text command supports notification on variables that are referenced within strings using bang expansion This means that a string may displayed with variable references that will update as the values in the variables change Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 177 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Group Integer X Sequence X Q0 Text Lo 10 x 19 1X Group While X lt 100 Sequence Pause 1 X X 1 Here the variable X follows the block scope rules while the text object does not Text objects are a part of the Element class of the Screen book and these object follow a different set of scope rules The Text object will remain active until the next Display command is executed this script assumes that a Display command has already been executed See the Element Selection Moving and Manipulation for more information So what does this script do It displays x is 0 Then after one second the value of X on screen changes to 1 then to 2 and so on This is because the variable is notifying the text object that its value has changed The text object then updates its display to show the new value Other types of objects can implement notification in their own way notification doesn t have to involve the updating of t
285. it For example given a simple path of Content data xml LockScalaFile might return C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Scala Content data 12345 xml You would then use this result within your Windows script and when you were done with that file you would call UnlockScalaFile The ScalaFileLock interface supports the following methods LockScalaFile Method The LockScalaFile method returns a normal Windows path you can use anywhere in your Windows script This method will resolve any special locations such as Content will locate the newest revision of the file and will ensure that the file will not change out from underneath you UnlockScalaFile Method The UnlockScalaFile method indicates you are done with the file After you call UnlockScalaFile it is no longer safe to use the filename you previously obtained from LockScalaFile unless you call LockScalaFile again Note that if a new revision of a file arrives while you have one revision already locked the new revision is still installed and will be given to you the next time you inquire all without disturbing the current revision VBScript Example Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 214 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Dim oScalaFileLock Set oScalaFileLock CreateObject ScalaFileLock ScalaFileLock 1 Resolve and lock the file name and return
286. it is transitioned In and Out of the page a a mms P 4A ee SOULE TE OOCUMT ee ee Eha s mpe 5 Bey Mes ppe i jai a eTe I e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page 1r v rana d n b myd CE r e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings m i F a CE r1 e rest Ty By om Lor ily en Design Clip Panel The Design Clip Panel is shown when a Clip Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Adjust Size and cropping areas for the Clip e Apply Color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element Set In and Out transitions for the element The Design Clip Panel is accessed by Adding a new Clip element Selecting a Clip element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Clip Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page 1r ra Ts mp P ma J na a me I e Ia ok Be SP lki i Se Pe Pn m e Chroma Key controls that let you select a particular Clip color and make it transparent Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property
287. it to a boolean and returns the boolean ReadBool Function syntax ReadChars String ReadChars Integer filehandle Integer numchars Reads a number of characters from an open file and returns them as a string ReadChars Function syntax Readint Integer ReadInt Integer filehandle Reads a line from an open file converts it to an integer and returns the integer Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 201 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 ReadInt Function syntax ReadStr String ReadsStr Integer filehandle Reads a line from an open file and returns it as a string ReadStr Function syntax Rename Boolean Rename String from String to Renames a file Rename Function syntax RmDir Boolean RmDir String dirname Removes a directory RmDir Function syntax WriteBool Boolean WriteBool Integer filehandle Boolean value Writes a boolean value to an open file The boolean value is written as a complete line with CR LF appended WriteBool Function syntax WriteChars Integer WriteChars Integer filehandle Boolean value Writes a number of characters to an open file Only the characters are written with no trailing CR LF WriteChars Function syntax Writelnt Boolean WriteInt Integer filehandle Integer value Writes an integer value to an open file
288. ixel border around the page when the Show Off Page Elements mode is On The default border color is black Off Page Elements Opacity Adjust the off page elements opacity to adjust the difference between what is visible on the page and off it Working with Templates One of the most common uses of Designer is the creation of Templates Designer defines the structure and layout of the Template and specifies elements or variables that can be changed by binding them to a data field Templates are filled in via a simple web form in Content Manager to cr eate a Message by changing media assets or adding text as defined by the template and template administration restrictions in Content Manager It is presumed you are already familiar with the the basic creation of pages and layout tools If not see the Getting Started Section of this guide for quick overview Templates can display one or more pages and you can use the same Data Field Name variable more than once to show the same information Please bear in mind this warning when creating templates i Renaming Variables You can correct a spelling mistake of a variable name by either 1 Unbinding and then rebinding to a correctly named variable the misspelled version will disappear if not used elsewhere 2 Hand editing the Scala Script Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 144 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http doc
289. ized by the spell checker To prevent the need to continually use Add for such words the spell checker allows you to add them to a special user dictionary This is similar to the Ignore All list but because the user dictionary is a file stored on your hard drive once entered a saved word is ignored in future Designer sessions as well as the current session To add the highlighted word to the user dictionary click Add in the Spelling panel The word is then considered to be spelled correctly in this and any other script Any variant forms of the word such as plurals or those with different verb endings will have to be added separately You can see the contents of the user dictionary and delete any words on the Spelling panel of the Designer Options dialog Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 55 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Multiple Language Dictionaries The custom user dictionary is language specific There can be several user dictionaries each of which may contain only the words which were added when a particular spell check language was selected in Designer Options Editing the Page during Spell Checking At times spelling corrections may change the lengths of words and the layout of text on the page may be disrupted as a result If this happens simply navigate to the Page Views to adjust the layout while in the middle
290. k In the last two cases the destination should be a Publish Location defined in Content Manager Designer stores publish settings in what is called a target When you click the Publish icon from the Main View toolbar the script is published using the previously configured options If you have not published the script before or if you click on the small down arrow to the right of the icon in the toolbar a popup list will appear This allows you publish to a selected target location or create a new target You can also publish through the File menu Publishing a Script To publish a script 1 Create or open a script 2 Click the Publish icon select lt New Target gt and click OK 3 Notice the Script Information box This box on the right provides information about the script which you have chosen to publish such as the approximate size in megabytes Designer will automatically scan your script and display its information in this box It will also display information regarding data which is currently being processed 4 Notice the Target Options Located under Target Options is the Connection Type button Selecting it lets you choose the type of connection you will publish to a Content Manager Direct Published to Content Manager s Media or Template library where it can be used in playlists or as a template depending on how it was authored This is the most commonly used option b Web or FTP Folder Uploaded to a folder on a server It
291. k They remain active until the block is exited Objects created in the group list will exist throughout the execution of the block s sequence list Certain commands take advantage of this fact For instance the Player supplied variable commands are placed into the group list of a block The variables declared will then be available anywhere within that block Blocks should not be placed within the group list of another block If a block is placed into the group list of another block then only the group list of the contained will be played the sequence list and resources lists are ignored Commands in the group list may not be named by labelling them Labels may only be used in the sequence list or the resources list of a block Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 164 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 This is because commands in the group list execute in parallel and there is no meaning to jumping into the group list or only executing part of the group list The sequence list of a block contains commands that conceptually execute in order The commands in the sequence list may be designed such that they continue to perform actions after their turn in the list For example a command that displays an animated icon may simply display the icon and start it moving This action may continue while other commands played That is the command m
292. l Event A Plain Page or a Streaming Video Page Edit Page Selecting this Icon will open the currently selected page for Editing Cut Deletes the currently selected page s from the current Script and places them on the clipboard Copy Copies the currently selected page s to the clipboard Paste Pastes the most recently cut or copied item s from the clipboard into the sequence of pages after the selected page Undo Erases the last change s and reverts your script to an older state Redo Restores the last change s and returns your script to a more current state List Toggles between Thumbnail mode images and List mode rows of pages Publish Publishes a Designer Script to Scala Content Manger for inclusion Playlists and distribution to Players Print Lets you print the script Preview Previews the selected page s Play Plays the entire script from the beginning Main View Toolbar New Setting the page dimensions of your production is the first part of creating a new script The dimensions will depend on how the content will be displayed i e is the content going to be shown over the whole display or in a portion of the screen inside a frame zone Two important concepts need to be explained at this point 1 You are not limited to screen resolutions such as 1280 x 720 or 1920 x 1080 you can work in any native portrait and landscape resolutions but more importantly you can work pixel for pixel when necessary for i
293. l Controls how the Crawl is fed the direction and the speed of the crawl Uim To lur vam i et ie L em eel Foo f Design Table Panel The Design Table Panel is shown when a Table Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Add Text Cells to the Table e Apply color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element e Set In and Out transitions for the element The Design Table Panel is accessed by e Selecting a Table element on the page you want to change e Selecting the name of the element in List View e Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Table Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page Fu ujua 5 p I e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page een a CL Pu 5 F LF e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings a Ch r1 e pra T yy L e pet er ey d BI iny rn a TS ce TT Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 100 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Design Text Cell Panel The Design Text Cell Panel is shown when a Te
294. l 9 8 gl coil t 1a 1 ML cate 0 2 rae eam rae er ee cer gg ee are ee ae ae ee ee ee 75 T24 k A s SISO UTICA US orreen ea yah hc ea ego ce ca esa a ag ee a Ma te aah os ecco ae ae ate Se 76 kat ce OWING Pages aeea fer ace epee Seneca avec A eg a ss eaten tne Ave ec Gon eee ed eens Due ee ee 76 k24 Gli COPYING AGES Mccain age ein A aaa wal aya aaa item aca ear nares aad deh alanine deen eaten se 76 kaAi lg ICISUIIG AOS fa ice ea ascent tects chy ht antec ep ce cad eh ag iat ee E E E E A E ended enon Due ote eg 76 kaAi o DISAB PAGES nee ee eee eee ea er ee ae ee ee ee ee ee ee a RE 77 RAA FOGOD Pages reri E taeda dad wide hut let A Ga ea hat hat DA whan E cates 77 FZ AC USUNG SCIP Erropen ES lt 5 Scerein eda a seater dekh anger dare Sphere ace ea ee near sete Bee Mee ee ae ws Bape os Maced 78 TZ OKCIOSING A SCAPE e Score cee tects Occ tenia hears Speer E Wwe ahd dackd sega E Sa cake ah arse da cae that ig caus a Aaa are enact eens Geeta aa thw 78 12 FUMIE SIQINC I nests ceed Sug Mca ee ape were es a cca R ey cece A oy alae aaa ete Ses Mer ete hae a pena Sag ee 78 Med VOT TEV ine TRAC VOW gorane hte ic cans hh cc AE cag eager eh cee as atc E Nc ee a andes at RR Ree ey 78 Vegi ACS VIG WW TOODA serei e Riccar ce bce A ce ce aa eee ced ceva a eres Meets ace ce San et tS irene E Sege Ace Sate E Seapets eared 79 kork Rage VIEW TOODA ACG circ erick 5 thes opted Sin cite A a E E E dente aids aaah Gee oe Reheat aka ar eg 80 kotik trAdd
295. lace it into some folder you manage Then by using the correct technique below you can install that file into the LocallyIntegratedContent folder which automatically cleans up any earlier revisions of the same file name that are no longer needed For example if the file is C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg and you wanted to make it available in the root of the LocallylntegratedContent folde r you would say in VBScript Set obj CreateObject Scala InfoNetwork result obj IntegrateContentLocally C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg or equivalently in Python from win32com import client as ax obj ax Dispatch Scala InfoNetwork obj IntegrateContentLocally r C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg A script can reference this media by using the path Content foo jpg If instead you wanted to install foo jpg to a subfolder then you would say in VBScript Set obj CreateObject Scala InfoNetwork result obj IntegrateContentLocally C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg mysubfolder or equivalently in Python Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 223 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 from win32com import client as ax obj ax Dispatch Scala InfoNetwork obj IntegrateContentLocally r C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg mysubfolder In that case a script can reference this media by using the path Content mysubfolder f
296. lates section The basic steps to creating a template are Create a Script Bind Elements Save e J e e Publish to Content Manager Scala recommends that you first create a non templated version of the script before commencing the binding process as doing this will make reverting to the original version easier should you need to do so Subjects to Consider When Creating Templates Before you start the creation process there are a few choices to consider in regards to what to use in the Template Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 145 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Text Box Element vs Text Element For templates the Text Box Element can be more versatile than using a Text Element This is because the e Font size of the text will reduce in size to accommodate more text into the area if set e Visible area for the copy is limited to the bounding area of the element to avoid overflow Conversely should you need fixed font sizes then you might want to consider using the Text Element Text Word Wrap When using a Text Element as a template file it is important to ensure that the Word Wrap option in the text panel is set correctly for the behavior you need Remember the Text Element is of a fixed font size Typically the following are the suggested settings for Word Wrap e Headings Word Wrap Off e Body copy Wo
297. ld The Field tab enables you to modify the following Setting Explanation Pointer Shows the current mouse pointer and when selected opens the file dialog This will allow you to change how you want the mouse pointer to appear when the Text Entry Field is accepting keystrokes Clear Resets the pointer to the default Field Length Defines the number of characters the text entry field accepts which can be adjusted using the numeric controls If the user attempts to add more characters than this limit those characters will be ignored Password Conceals its contents by displaying an asterisk for any character typed into it Decimal Only Restricts the user to type only the decimal characters 0 through 9 into the Text Entry Field and will ignore all other keystrokes Variable Shows the current variable and enables you to select another variable or create one to store the text typed into the field during playback Tab Web Clip Control i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Web Clip x Appearance Position a Misc ul Chroma Key Process Web Clip Control Mode Opaque Y Show Scroll Bars Interactive v Wait For Done The Web Clip Control tab enables you to modify the following Mode Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and tradem
298. ld appear on the page as a single text element and the data would most likely not be arranged in columns Using this option you can paste an image of the copied columns into the spreadsheet For it to work properly the application from which you cut or copy must be able to create the bitmap image when it places the data on the clipboard something that not all applications can do Reset Format Resets the selected elements to the defaults which are controlled by the Save Element and Page Defaults in the Tools Menu Delete Removes any selected elements and may be recovered by choosing Undo Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 135 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Select All Automatically selects every element on the page For example if you wanted to apply the same pause setting to every element you would use this option In some situations it is faster to select all elements on the page and then Ctrl click on the elements you want to exclude rather than individually clicking on every element Appear Later Appear Earlier Appear Later causes the selected element to appear on the page later than other elements while Appear Earlier causes the selected element to appear on the page earlier than other elements This will effectively move the element to the top of the Page View Toolbar List mode These options also have the
299. lement and how the it is transitioned In and Out of the page Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings Ls Tn l ke z zF iN Leos pm d BI aa F Chroma Key Controls that let you select a particular Clip color and make it transparent bami ee l 1s rE Te i er Ea mad Process Enables real time color processing of the clip during playback aa at a Lhe P e 1mm k mpe Pm Web Clip Control Controls parameters associated with a Web Clip Sale oe 7 DE a am m e Ps T T toms Design Flash Clip Panel The Design Flash Clip Panel is shown when a Flash Clip Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Adjust Size and Cropping areas e Apply Opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element e Set In and Out transitions for the element and the Start and End Times The Design Flash Clip Panel is accessed by Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 104 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Adding a new Flash Clip File swf Selecting a Flash Clip element on the page you want to change selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The D
300. lish Scriptlist As String targeturl As String logfilename As String editpassword As String options As String out _handle As Variant or Publisher GoPublishFolder scriptlist As String targeturl As String targetfolder As String logfilename As String editpassword As String options As String out_handle As Variant Where e scriptlist String containing the filenames of one or more script files to publish one script per line e targeturl Publish location path or URL with username and password Can be one of e A UNC path server share folder e An FTP URL ftp user password hostname portnumber folder e An HTTP URL htip user password hostname portnumber virtual folder networkname e An HTTPS URL htips user password hostname portnumber virtual folder networkname Examples e ftp administrator test myftpserver foo e http administrator test myserver 8080 ContentManager Scala e targetfolder Only for GoPublishFolder method Sub folder into which to publish e logfilename Path to log file to write information to e editpassword Optional edit password to apply to published script s Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 228 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e options String containing zero or more of the following option flags e d Show progress dialog not supported when Publish Automation module
301. llel with Sound1 Once these have completed Photo2 and Photo3 will display sequentially Alternatively the sequential pictures may be placed into the same block as the parallel events as long as they appear before the Group directive LsGalascripr Picture C Pictures Photo2 jpg Picture Ci Piectures Photo3 jog Group Picture C Pictures Photol jpg Sample Play C Sounds Sound1 mp3 This script will have the same behavior as the preceding example that is the pictures will be shown in the same order This is because the group list of a block executes first before sequential events in that block To better highlight which events are sequential and which are parallel the Sequence directive is available This directive is placed before events that are to be executed sequentially SCaLascrape Group Picture C Pictures Photo1l jpg Sample Play C Sounds Sound1 mp3 Sequence Pictur C Pictures Photo2 Jpa Picture C Pictures Photo3 jpg Events following the Sequence directive are known as the sequence list of the block This list is played immediately following the execution of the group list and the contents are played sequentially By default an event is placed into its parent s sequence list The first example relied on this fact placing the three Picture commands into the sequence list The example could just as well have read Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the prope
302. llow the control of aspects of a Web Clip element Set controls related to the playback of flash files Choose a type of background image and set certain options for that image type Control the size of the background image and other background settings Design Background Panel The Design Background Panel gives you the the ability to make special adjustments to the background of a page The adjustments and options available will depend on the type of background you are working with Some of the actions you can perform with this panel are e Change Background type without affecting elements on the page Color or image processing e Adjust How the image or video used for the background is scaled to fit the page and background size to ensure that it matches the page size e Crop Trim Graphic areas you do not want to include e Apply Color and opacity gradients as well as corner styles and alpha masks e Make Full page background from a smaller image by tiling Because the Background consists of two layers the Background Face upper and the Backdrop Lower the tabs and options available accessible are dependent the background type selected The Design Background panel is accessed from e Main View Select the page you want to change and click on the Background column e Page View Click Background icon or use the View Menu gt Background Panel or use the keyboard shortcut F4 The Design Background Panel consists of these ta
303. m of data integration and one that needs little to no previous experience of programming It provides easy to repeat pages of information based on the content of the text file Data Source Module Lets you map data from XML files into Scala variables with flexible control over data mapping and iteration Data Driven Text Crawl Drive the contents of a text ticker from a Python or Windows script that connects to a data source and prepares data for display Text Style Tags Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 148 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Scala supports inline text style tags to format text in Text elements and TextCrawls For example Hello lt facecolor ff0000 gt world changes the color of world to red You can reach this by using the Help pull down menu Connecting Flash and ScalaScript When including a Flash object in a ScalaScript you can pass data to the Flash clip and have the ScalaScript wait for the Flash object to decide when to advance Connecting HTML5 Web Clips and ScalaScript When including an HTML5 object in a ScalaScript you can pass data to the HTML object and have the ScalaScript wait for the HTML object to decide when to advance Scala supplies a JavaScript file called scala js that lets you access certain features independent of whether your HTML JavaScript is running on a classic Scala PC
304. mand or block Disabled my_command 1 Foo on disabled command my_label Disabled cmd disabled command with label smy_event Disabled disabled block with label Optional Commands may be marked as optional by putting the directive Optional in front of them This directive follows any label but precedes the command optional my_command 1 Foo on this command not required An optional command is one that is not required for the execution of the script If the module that handles the command is available then the command should be normally processed If the module is unavailable then any errors will be quietly suppressed and the script playback will proceed without the command If a command is not marked as optional and the module is unavailable then Designer will present an error message to the user and Player will log an error into its log file The Optional directive also comes after any label NoAuthor The NoAuthor directive prevents Scala Designer from attempting to interpret the event This is usually used on hand authored scripts that Designer wouldn t understand allowing such hand authored scripts to be loaded into Designer for editing NoAuthor my_command 1l Foo on j Events marked NoAuthor will be unchanged by the authoring process The NoAuthor directive also comes after any label Scripts A script consists of a single block contained in a file A script might be Copyright 2015
305. menu Using the Add icon in the Toolbar the following elements may be utilized Custom Select any type of file which is supported Images Narrows the choice of selection of items in the dialog to just image files Animations Available animation files Video Available video files Sounds Available sound files All Files Select any type of file whether or not it is supported Using the Add Pull Down Menu The following choices are available Add File s Allows you to select any type of importable file such as a Clip Element Flash Clip or Movie Clip Element Add a Clip Element Use the Add File option to select a clip Add a Movie Clip Element Use the Add File option to select a clip Add Special Event Opens the Design List panel and adds a line to select Timing Branch Sound Launch Log Schedule or WinScript Add Text Adds an empty text element to your page which can be useful when you can not select an open spot on the canvas area especially if you have full screen elements on your page The text cursor will also appear Add Text Box Empty text box element will be placed on your page e Add Text Crawl Element which can be positioned and edited will be placed on your page Add Text Entry Field Interactive text element that can accept typed input from someone running the script and store the text ina variable Add Table Adds a Table of text boxes Add Box Creates a Box element that can be drawn out with the mouse
306. mitext string Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 232 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt C images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt resource name Showcase gt C images FeatureA mpg lt resource gt lt ingredients gt This sets the text data field named Headline to Breaking News and the text data field named Body to Scala announces a major new software release and sets the filename data field named Photo to C images ScalaLogo png For the Showcase ingredient since it would be hard to pass in an entire playlist a convention is used instead You provide the full path to the playlist s first media item or the media item you wish to use to represent this playlist in the thumbnail in place of the playlist itself in this case C i mages FeatureA mpg GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 synchronously generates a series of thumbnails for the templated message generating one thumbnail file for each page in the template with a number appended to the filename For example if you specify C Temp Foo jpg then the thumbnail filenames will be C Temp Foo1 jpg C Temp Foo2 jpg and so on The resulting image can be in jpg bmp gif or png format
307. modules use this description to build an object model of the script When the script is played the objects are activated and deactivated according to the structure of the script However they may also react to external stimuli Such as input events or hardware interrupts to asynchronously cause changes in the playback of the script That is these script objects may perform operations even if they are not being directed by the Player to do so Also keep in mind that the ScalaScript language was designed primarily to be authored in a graphical user interface It would certainly look different if it was intended to be programmed directly Table of Contents ScalaScript Structure Lexical Rules ScalaScript Syntax Event Names ScalaScript Variables Core ScalaScript Commands Core ScalaScript Functions and Variables Extension Functions and Variables ScalaScript Structure To introduce the ScalaScript language a number of simple scripts will be presented These scripts will highlight certain features of the language and give an overview of how scripts are constructed and how they execute The details of the language will be presented on other pages of this wiki Note The examples presented in this section are simplified for illustrative purposes That is they are strictly examples and may not be complete enough to actually play in Designer or Player Simple Picture Sequence The first example script consists of three commands that execu
308. more specific in the case of animations as an animclip movieclip webclip or Flashclip Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 80 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 For a more detailed discussion of the Clip formats supported by Designer click here All clips are added to the page using these methods e Position the cursor at the point on the page you want to insert the clip e Then either e In the toolbar click on the Add icon which reveals the File dialog e Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add File s option to select a clip The image is imported at full resolution at the cursor position After the import is complete the Design Clip Panel appears which contain numerous options when working with clips which are discussed further in the section associated with a specific type General Visual Manipulation When the clip is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge of the clip which indicate that it is has been selected You can continue to work with the clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the clip image to deselect it Moving the Clip With the clip selected simply drag the clip to a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one
309. n Function syntax Tan Real Tan Real X Returns the tangent of X where X is in radians Tan Function syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 193 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation RadiansToDegrees Real RadiansToDegrees Real X Convert the angle X in radians to degrees RadiansToDegrees Function syntax Degrees ToRadians Real DegreesToRadians Real X Convert the angle X in degrees to radians Degrees ToRadians Function syntax Expression Evaluation EvalString String EvalsString String S Evaluate the string expression contained in the string S and return the result EvalString Function syntax Evallint Integer EvallInt String S Evaluate the integer expression contained in the string S and return the result Evallnt Function syntax EvalBool Boolean EvalBool String S Evaluate the Boolean expression contained in the string S and return the result EvalBool Function syntax EvalReal Real EvalReal String S Evaluate the Real expression contained in the string S and return the result EvalReal Function syntax System Functions Getenv Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners http docs scala com display D1 100 Page 194 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 S
310. n independent of one another until they are Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 53 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 moved again The capability to separate slices may occasionally be useful for example if there is one part of the source image which you want to constitute the repeated multi tile pattern Granularity In Designer you can resize a clip arbitrarily to any pixel size However multi tiles are resized in discrete increments which may be larger than a single pixel The Granularity value control specifies the increments by the size which the multi tile can be changed A large granularity limits the number of possible sizes you can make a small granularity allows you to resize more freely The control will allow you to adjust the horizontal and vertical granularity independently in pixels Click the Granularity control to activate it This will also highlight the granularity setting graphically on the enlarged image You can adjust the setting using the handles similar to working with slices Generally granularity should be small such as 3 x 3 This will allow greater precision in sizing the multi tile The limiting factor in specifying the granularity is the source image and the desired look when it is adjusted to its final size With some source images the exact granularity setting is not critical However others ma
311. n the File dialog Choose a source image in any format or an existing multi tile PNG format When you have chosen an image click OK The Multi Tile Editor containing your chosen image will appear ready for editing The name of the image will appear in the bar below the toolbar When you first open a plain image one which is not already a multi tile into the Multi Tile Editor the Center and Middle slices are set to occupy the entire image If your image is a uniform pattern the other slices will be superfluous allowing you to simply adjust the granularity and immediately save the image Image Areas The Multi Tile Editor screen has two display areas 1 The large area to the left is the Graphic Editor which shows an enlarged version of the source image and it is where you actually define the slices The name of the currently open file will be shown in the bar above this area 2 In the lower right of the editor is a tabbed display section which contains the Preview tab It shows a stretched version of the source image using the settings you have defined and the Original tab which shows the image at its natural un expanded dimensions The Preview image will change in real time as you makes changes using the Slice Controls and Granularity settings The example will then expand to fill the preview box given the current settings If the source image is too large it may not be possible to fit a stretched image in the Preview panel With a ve
312. n when the multi tile is sized The Top Middle and Bottom Middle regions are duplicated horizontally and the Left Middle and Right Middle regions are duplicated vertically This will ensure that the sides of the image where you would typically have features such as beveled edges shadows etc will continue to fit with the corner regions The Center Middle region is tiled or duplicated both horizontally and vertically as necessary to fill the internal area of the multi tile for the desired size The key is to adjust the slice edges so they will precisely match the edges of the pattern which is to be repeated The Center slice should be exactly as wide as the pattern while the Middle slice should be exactly as tall Although you can use any image to make a multi tile to achieve optimal results you should use a source image specifically created for this use Typically this will be a rectangular graphic which contains shading or other special treatment of its edges and corners along with a central pattern designed to fit seamlessly together when tiled By using this image the tiling will not be apparent but the multi tile interior will look like a single unbroken surface and the edges will be continuous Clip art libraries particularly those intended for Web authoring often contain graphics specifically designed with this purpose in mind Understanding the Multi Tile Toolbar Open Clicking on the icon in the Multi Tile Editor toolbar will ope
313. n which most options have been disabled Look in the View pull down menu to see the associated F keys for the different Design panels Some keyboards may be set up with alternate global commands for F key functions which may be disabled or overridden while working in Designer These panels house the functions and settings you will need to compose individual pages in your script There is a specific Design panel associated with every major type of design task The name of a panel reflects its purpose or the type of element with which it is associated The tabs containing common functions between elements are on the left most tab and the unique functions for the element are on the right This arrangement is optimal for getting the job done as you are kept on the same tab panel as you switch between elements The Elements Design Panel can also be accessed from the View pull down menu Since many of the panels contain similar controls under the tab of the same name the tabs are discussed in general The table below shows each of the Panels and their associated tabs with a brief description to follow in Understanding the Panel Tabs found after the chart Panel Name Panel Tabs Design Image Type Image Settings Process Background Design Text Appearance Position Misc Design Clip Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Design Movie Appearance Position Misc Chroma Key Clip Design Text Box Appearance Position Misc Design Text Appearance Position Misc Crawl
314. nail View A thumbnail Name button representing the group appears in the position of the first page you selected The page s you selected are now in the group Designer assigns a generic name to the group which will also appear on the group s Name button You can change the name of the group as follows e Click on the group s No Number button opening the Page Control Panel e Inthe Name text box type a short descriptive name for the group and click on Close You will return to the Main View and on the group s Name button you will see the name you have assigned Buttons for a group are generally darker in color than buttons for a page The thumbnail for a group looks like a stack of pages with the first page in the group located on top e List View e To group pages Select the pages you want to include in the group in the Main View e Click on the Edit pull down menu and choose Group or you can right click on one of the selected thumbnails or listed page names and select Group from the context menu Editing a Group When you double click on a group s Name button you will see the Main View with the individual pages scripts or groups of pages that are included in the group The page number for each represents the sequence of pages within the group based upon their selected order The path in the script title bar reflects the position of the group in the structure of the script You can refine the elements of the group and work in th
315. nd in this section e Element Selection Moving and Manipulation e Working with Off Page Elements Page View Toolbar The Page View Toolbar has a few buttons which are similar to the Main View Toolbar However it has other icons that let you quickly access different aspects of the page in which to compose and it consists of Add Cut Copy Paste Zoom Level Undo Redo Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 79 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Element Background List Buttons Palette Preview Main Add Cut Copy Paste Undo amp Redo and Preview are also present on both Toolbars Page View Toolbar Add Using the Add Icon Most types of elements are added to the page through the Add icon in the toolbar with the general exception being Text Clicking in an open area on the background will insert a Text Cursor allowing you to enter text Other elements are added at the current cursor position Text Cursor Select the File type in the bottom panel and navigate to the location of the file you wish to add either on your hard drive or server in a manner similar to the Windows file dialog You can select more than one file at a time by either holding down the Shift key or using the Alt key and selecting one file at a time To add elements such as Special Events Text Crawl and Streaming Videos use the Add pull down
316. nd press Open to install it The file must be for your Scala Designer USB Key Element Selection Moving and Manipulation Element Selection Elements can be selected by Using a mouse click to select the element moving the mouse over the element only shows the bounding rectangle of the element Using the Up Down arrow keys to select the next previous element on the page based on the order in the List View Clicking the elements name in Page List view Drag selecting elements using the mouse Click and hold down the mouse on an empty area Then drag the mouse and a lasso frame appears and any element that is enclosed fully or partially by the lasso is selected When you click on a element you will see a dashed rectangular frame This indicates that it is selected For those Elements that can be re sized the eight 8 graphic handles placed around its edges You have to click on a non transparent part of a clip which has Transparency set or the Chroma Key option on in order to select it Or use the drag select method If several clips overlap you can click through the transparent part of one to select another underneath Selecting Multiple Elements This can be done using one or more of the following methods 1 Choose the first element s using one of the methods above 2 Hold down the Ctrl Key 3 Using the mouse to select another element or the Up Down arrow keys to select the previous or next elements on the page based
317. ndition Until Command syntax Branching Goto eventname Bookmark Boolean expr Used to transfer control to a named event Goto name name echo this is a test n execution continues here The named event must be in the sequence or resources list of a block and the name must be in scope The Goto command by default does not push a return address for the Return command However a return address may be set by using the B ookmark True option This allows for scripts like this Goto foo Bookmark True TOO do stuff heres Return If the goto action causes the execution to leave the current block then the current block will clean up before execution resumes This means that the commands in the group list will be deactivated and the block will exit This will continue for each block exited until the block containing the named event is reached At that point execution will continue at the named event If the Goto pushes a bookmark and then exits a block or a number of blocks then control will not be able to return to the exact position of the Goto when the Return command is executed This is because exited blocks always execute from the start when they entered So the return action will jump to the start of the outermost block that was exited between the execution of the Goto and the Return Goto Command syntax GotoExpr Is like a Goto but its argument is treated as a string expr
318. neous settings a mm ere rea TEF C ee C S T T E Hr coe 1s r E mp beso LG 0 e Process Enables real time color processing of the clip during playback TPE rE eer E a repe Design Streaming Video Clip Panel The Design Streaming Video Clip Panel is shown when a Streaming Video Clip Element is selected in Page View It allows you to e Set URL of the Video Stream In and Out transitions for the element volume for the elements sound and the Start and End Times e Adjust Size and Cropping areas e Apply Opacity gradients and corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element The Design Streaming Video Clip Panel is accessed by Adding a new Streaming Video Clip Selecting a Streaming Video Clip element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Streaming Video Clip Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page ge oe r ARPE mP FE e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 103 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http d
319. nes the script and its ingredients This string consists of a lt content gt XML element whose name attribute is the path to the script relative to rootfolder The lt content gt XML element contains an lt ingredients gt XML element containing one or more data field elements as above With this form the path in any lt filename gt XML element can be relative to rootfolder Here is an example xmitext string lt content name NewsTemplate sca gt lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt resource name Showcase gt C images FeatureA mpg lt resource gt lt ingredients gt lt content gt An example VBScript invocation might look like this Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 234 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Dim obj errormsg numthumbs Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer obj GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 C rootfolder lt content name NewsTemplate scb gt lt ingredients gt lt text name Headline gt Breaking News lt text gt lt text name Body gt Scala announces a major new software release lt text gt lt filename name Photo gt images ScalaLogo png lt filename gt lt ingredients gt lt content gt
320. next line and will retain any styles associated to the text To start a new line without creating a new Text element use Shift Enter Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 83 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 To Join text elements together either position the cursor at the e End of the first text element and press Delete e Beginning of the second text element and press Backspace Another method of breaking up text Elements is to use Ctrl Enter This leaves the starting point for the new text Element where the Ctrl Enter was pressed This method is often used to transition on individual characters of a word Inserting In line Images into the Text Element To insert an image into a text element 1 Position the text cursor where you want to insert an image 2 Right Click to open the Context Menu and choose Insert Image 3 The image will be scaled according to its original size and image settings on the appearance tab of the Design Text Panel General Visual Manipulation When the Text element is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame around the edge The highlighted frame is an indication that it has been selected You can continue to work with the Text element or click anywhere on the page outside of the Text element to deselect it Moving the Text Element With the Text element selected simply drag it to
321. next page From the Main View you can initiate spell check on any page When you initiate the spell checker it will search the full text in a script and sequentially highlight any words which appear to be misspelled Unrecognized words such as proper names can be added to a user dictionary to keep spell checker from stopping on them in the future Spell Checking from the Main View To start spell checking from the Main view click the Tools icon and choose Spelling from the drop down list The spell checker will begin checking the spelling starting with the highlighted when you chose Spelling You can begin the spell check on any particular page by selecting it in the Main View before running the spell checker Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 54 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Spell Checking from the Page Views To start spell checking from any Page View click the Tools pull down menu and choose Spelling The spell checker will begin checking the spelling starting with the page currently in the Page View When There are No Misspellings When you run the spell checker on a script without misspelled words you will not see the Spelling panel Instead the following dialog will appear The spell check of this script is complete Using the Spelling Panel What you will see when the spell checker runs and finds a word wh
322. nfigurable options Spelling Contains options you can use to customize the Spelling checker Info Shows system information Additional Topics e Detailed explanations of the Scala Extension Modules can be found here Scala Extension Modules The Modules tab in the shows the Scala Extension Modules EX Modules that are installed and allows you to modify the options of those that are configurable Pinus Sethe Cipi Perii Timing Module Tu Tuner EX Module E Launch Module CORIOgen EX Module schedule Module Leghorns Ex Module Queue EX Module Serial RS 232 Module Svatcher EX Module WCR EX Module Weather Ext Module When you click a column button in a Main View for the page you are working on a menu for the corresponding Module will appear You can then adjust the settings just as you would for similar columns in the Page List view Some Modules contain configuration settings Modules such as Timing and Launch in the default Designer installation are shown in the Options dialog Module Settings list The settings which are available with these dialogs are global settings Any event or script which uses the corresponding Module will be affected In contrast the Module menus which you see on the Main and Design List views control settings which are specific to a particular script event The Module Panel consists of two lists Module Settings Lists the activated modules that have settings associated
323. ng Hiding an Emergency Crawl Element To implement an emergency crawl you want to have a text crawl element appear only during whatever emergency condition you define and implement Using the Text Style Tags for opacity you can turn on and off the crawl The crawl can be hidden by setting the opacity to zero by using this text style tag lt opacity 0 gt and the crawl can be restored by setting its opacity to 100 or whatever value desired by using this text style tag lt opacity 100 gt Data Source Fetcher Introduction The Data Source feature primarily focuses on the design time problem of binding data values to visual elements and lets the user set up the basic mapping between the feed source and Scala variables The Data Source module is how the Player reads data from local files It initially has limited goals and does not handle how data is fetched from the actual source e g internet feeds database serial etc This part of the overall task is left to a separate Data Fetcher application running alongside We are going to discuss the responsibilities of a Fetcher and what it needs to do in order to be well behaved Overview In the initial version of the Data Source module the feed supported by Player is a simple XML file available locally the Local XML File It will be the responsibility of the Fetcher to provide this file which means the Fetcher must e Retrieve the data from the real source local or we
324. ng operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the bounding box of the Line half its current width and height e d make the bounding box of the Line double its current width and height Add a Streaming Video Clip Element A Streaming Video Clip is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background They are added to the page using the Add pull down menu and select the Add Streaming Video Clip option For a more detailed discussion of the Streaming Video Clip formats supported by Designer click here The Streaming Video Clip is created at a resolution of the Streaming Video and a frame from that stream is used at the cursor position If the URL of the clip cannot be reached Designer has no reference to draw the Streaming Video Clip You will not see anything on the screen but Element will be listed in the Page List View When you return to the Main View a warning triangle can be observed on the page s thumbnail indicating a problem Previewing the page and pressing ESC may provide additional information as to exact nature of your issue After successful creation the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel appears which contain numerous options when working with Streaming Video Clips General Visual Manipulation When the Streaming Video Clip is displayed on
325. nged because the value of c was already established and it Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 179 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 does not update when a changes The Update None tells the text element not to update so it would also leave the text as Hello World after the value of a had changed Dering a DI Sequence a Hello b World Text 20 20 alb Update None HardDuration 1000 Waits for one second a Goodbye Format Strings To control how numbers are formatted see the Format function Core ScalaScript Commands The ScalaScript player engine supplies a range of core commands to handle script flow conditions and other programming language level tasks Also there is a wide range of extension commands for media timing and other additions beyond the core language The complete set of commands is given in the ScalaScript commands index The core commands are outlined below Core Commands Conditionals lf Boolean expr The If command causes the block to execute conditionally if Boolean expr evaluates to True This command must be used in the group list of a block Group If condition If Command syntax See also the If parameter Else The Else command causes the block to execute conditionally if the preceding If Elself returned False
326. ngine Choose which engine will be used to draw text e Standard Supports a full range of text effects e Complex The Standard text engine and styles and the Complex Writing Systems engine supports Arabic Thai Hebrew Hindi and other complex writing systems but does not support certain text style settings e Automatic Uses the Standard text engine when possible but uses the Complex Writing Systems engine when the text element requires its features e Complex Writing Systems Always uses the Complex Writing Systems text engine e Asian Vertical Text Specify that the text shall be rendered using the Asian vertical writing style Spacing Opens the Spacing options popup which enables you to make the following changes e Line Spacing Slider tightens or opens the spacing between text lines for multi line text based elements The value is in pixels and can also be adjusted by the value control e Character Spacing Slider tightens or opens the spacing between selected characters of text based elements The value is in pixels and can also be adjusted by the value control e Kerning Adjusts spacing between certain character pairs based on typographical rues There are three 3 options e Normal and Digits The default setting is applied to all Character pairs including digits e Normal Character pairs are kerned but digits have equal spacing for vertical alignment e Off No Kerning is applied and all characters use their standard spacing Image Th
327. nimation update less frequently A value of 50 tells the animation to play at its normal speed Values less than 50 are treated as a fraction of the normal speed so a value of 25 will make the animation play at half speed 25 or half speed is the default Stop on First After completion of the number of loops this setting specifies whether the Animation stops on the last frame of the animation default or shows the first frame again Type Movie Movie Backgrounds have both a Face layer upper and Backdrop layer lower File Shows the current media asset being used and can be change by clicking the name to bring up the file dialog Face A Movie Background can have options applied to the face by selecting the Face button Backdrop A Movie Background can have a Backdrop Fill Type options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Loops Specifies the number of times the Movie Background should play Start Time in HH MM SS hh To have the Movie Background start playing at some point after the beginning use the Start Time control to set the position in hours minutes seconds and hundredths HH MM SS hh End Time in HH MM SS hh To have the Movie Background stop playing at some point before the end use the End Time control to set the length of time from the beginning to the desired stop point HH MM SS hh e Volume Specifies the volume level using a range of 0 255 with the default set to 255 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and
328. nsparent areas The file is saved as a PNG file Add TV Clip Element TV Clips are only available if they have been configured and enabled in the Tools Options Settings They are used to show content from TV capture cards and internal webcams and are independent elements which can be moved resized and styled on top of the current page background Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 92 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 They are added to the page using the Add pull down menu and select the Add TV Clip option to create a TV Clip and are represented by a Colo r Bars graphic at a Capture Size resolution defined as the Capture Size at the cursor position After creating TV Clip the Design TV Clip Panel a ppears and contains numerous options for working with TV Clips General Visual Manipulation When the TV Clip is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge The handles are an indication that a TV Clip has been selected You can continue to work with the TV Clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the TV Clip to deselect it Moving the TV Clip e With the TV Clip selected simply drag the TV Clip to a new position n e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by on
329. nstance when creating content to displayed on super wide stadium perimeter banners video walls or frames within a channel 2 Aspect ratio is also key It enables you to re purpose content created in one resolution and either scaled up or down to fit a different resolution of the same aspect ratio There is no need to worry if you make an incorrect choice You can change your mind afterwards using the script properties button and the size you select or specify will be remembered for the next production Remembering what you did last is one of the things Designer does and is something you will come to appreciate as this enables you to accomplish your tasks quicker For scripts to be displayed across the whole screen the following table contains some common resolutions and aspect ratios Resolution Aspect Ratio Typical Display 1024 x 768 4 3 Desktop LCD 1280 x 720 16 9 LCD or Plasma 1360 x 768 16 9 LCD or Plasma 1920 x 1080 16 9 LCD or Plasma 720 x 1280 9 16 LCD or Plasma in Portrait rotation 768 x 1360 9 16 LCD or Plasma in Portrait rotation 1080 x 1920 9 16 LCD or Plasma in Portrait rotation Note Not all screens have the exact resolutions listed in the above chart For example some may be 1280 x 768 or 366 x 768 Check your screen s user manual for a list of its correct resolutions As we described earlier you may be creating content and scripts intended for playback within frames of a Scala channel For example the frameset created in
330. nt or page you are setting When binding a Sound File to a data field you are binding the file name of the Sound File being assigned to the data field With the Sound panel open 1 Select the Bind button in the panel and then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Binding a Page to a Data Field Binding a Page of a Designer script allows the substitution of this page with a Playlist when creating a Message in Content Manger As this page is not played back it is recommended that you bind a simple Plain Page From the Main View 1 Select the Page to be bound 2 Right click on a Page and select Bind to Data then select New 3 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Binding the Position X Y of an Element to a Data Field The X and Y positions of an Element can be bound so that you can re position the Element during Message Creation With the Design Panel open for the Element select the position tab 1 Right click on a Element Position X or Y numeric and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Binding the Size X Y of an Element to a Data Field The X and Y size of an Element can be bound so you can re size the Element during Message Creation With the Design Panel open for the Element select the Position tab 1 Right click on a Size X or Y numeric and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK Binding the Rotat
331. nt with a name rather than calculating the offset of the target event This makes the target event position independent Labels attach to the first block or command after the label They that do not have a following block or command are ignored for instance labels immediately before an end block or where there are two sequential label s Here are some examples of labels Lest event name 7 a block with the name test event name Sequence bar Text 10 20 hello a command with the name bar Labels cannot be used to jump into the group list of a block as it is meaningless to do that However labels on dumped elements in a group list can be used by out transitions to refer to specific elements Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 170 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Name Collisions Labels variable names and style names all occupy the same name space even though they are defined using different formats Labels as previously mentioned use a leading colon TestLabel Jf TALS yent la block will take the name Testilapel Variables contain the event name inside the command Integer my_var j This creates an object an integer variable named my_var A single command may be used to declare multiple variables Integer x y Z This creates objects integer variables named x y and Z S
332. nts on the page s ine COND OBR W Additional Topics Overviews of the Tabs used with the Data Source module can be found at e Tab Source e Tab Counters and Indexes Tab Source The Source tab of the Data Source Panel allows you to e Specify the XML data source file e Map which entries in the XML are read and how many are read at a time Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 66 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Set the required looping behavior You need to have a sample of the data source file in order to be able to set up the event Data Source Mapping Initially the only button available on this tab and on selection opens the Data Source Mapping Dialog which contains the following Filename Opens the file dialog to select the file name of an XML data source Recent Feeds Lists the recently used files for quick access For a discussion on how to make the XML file dynamic load the XML file from the Linked Content folder see the section on Locally Integrated Content under Scripting and Automation Number of Records Specifies how many records you want to read from the data source at one time the Default is 1 It also determines the array size for any variables created to handle repeated data records Once the XML file is specified the XML source file is read and the dialog populates with details of
333. ny layer blending modes such as multiply overlay hard light etc Currently Designer only supports Normal Blending mode This does not mean that the other blending modes cannot be used when designing an image It just means that you will have to convert layers with the other blending modes to Normal Blending mode to ensure that your clips maintain the same appearance in Designer as they do in Adobe Photoshop If a particular effect is applied to a clip layer that changes only inner pixels of that layer any blending mode can be used for these effects To troubleshoot problems the plug in generates an Error log file within the directory Using Scala Publish Automation EX Module This subject is covered under Scripting and Automation Click here to go to that page Integrating Data There are many ways in which Designer can integrate with data as it is essential a scripting language and therefore data handling is an intrinsic part of this scripting language There are many ways to integrate with ScalaScript and while many require programming skills there are a few that can be done with limited to no programming skills whatsoever Variables All integration needs the basic understanding of Variables This section goes through the methods of defining using and displaying Scala Variables There are a number of predefined system variables that can be used by the script as well as the ability to define your own Textfile EX The simplest for
334. o correct a picture s color balance or make a radical adjustment which will completely alter the natural colors in the image e Luminance Processing Affects the relative and overall brightness levels of the pixels in the image apart from their color As you will see when you begin to work in this panel the effects of the controls are not independent There are many ways to achieve similar effects Not only will every control affect the entire image they will also interact with one another Process Controls The initial value for each control is zero 0 and can be adjusted using either the slider or by selecting and entering the value of the control located at the top right of the control The range of values for most sliders is 100 to 100 except the Hue control whose value can range from 179 to 180 Please be aware that processing Video and other animations require additional CPU usage and can result in poor performance on low specification playback devices e Color Processing e Hue Shifts the hue of all colors by a constant amount retaining color relationships e Saturation Adjusts the intensity or purity of the colors in the image e Red Controls the amount of red in the image e Green Controls the amount of green in the image e Blue Controls the amount of blue in the image e Luminance Processing e Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the image e Contrast Adjusts the relationship of light and dark areas increasing o
335. o denote command names variable names and function names Identifiers must start with one of the following characters A Z a z underscore The remaining characters of the identifier can include any of the following A Z a z _ underscore 0 9 period Identifiers are not case sensitive Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 159 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Valid identifiers include EOOUY test identifier FourscoreAndSevenYearsAgo The_Date_is_1997 02 03 White Space Used to separate tokens that could not be distinguished without the intervening white space That is the tokens EVENT and Group must have white space between them for the parser to recognize them as separate tokens PScaLasScripe EVENTGroup the parser would NOT recognize these as independent tokens END The white space is used to identify the tokens and then discarded All strings of white space are treated as a single token break during parsing That is any amount of white space may be inserted between tokens without changing the behavior of the script White space is defined as the following characters Hex Value Character Description 0x20 space 0x09 tab 0x13 carriage return 0x10 line feed The script Seca lascripe Group integer x sequence x x a 1 is equivalent to PSGalaScripe Group Integer
336. o leave room for binding your printout Printer devices have different minimum margin settings and you may find a minimal margin which you have selected is not supported by your printer If your images text or labels seem to be cut off near the page edge consult the printer manual to determine the printer s minimum supported margin Margin Units Margins can be specified as either 1 16 ths of an inch English units or millimeters metric units Use this selector to switch between English and metric When you change between millimeters and 1 16 ths of an inch the individual margin values will accurately convert from metric to English and vice versa ScalaPrint Printer The panel will allow you to adjust physical printing options including allowing you to choose the print device itself Printer Use this selector to choose from the list of available printers your computer is set up to use You can select only from those printers configured in the Windows Printers folder If the desired printer name is not available from the selector check your system s printer settings The default printer displayed in ScalaPrint will match your default Windows printer Paper Use this selector to choose a paper size for your print job The sizes listed are those which the currently selected printer accommodates Printer Properties Clicking this button will open the Windows Printer Properties dialog You can then select from among the other feat
337. o these basic areas Be ER Aedd Mow Tools Help er ee ee m a See _ DRA I o Yom a aje Sample sca Me LT a ee _ E o _ 1280 x 768 i amp x ii ee Set Se ee S Headline Headline Duration 7 00 Main View Menu 1 Provide access to functions in the areas of File Edit Add View Tools and Help More detailed discussions of these can be found by clicking on Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 34 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 the link of the section Main View Toolbar 2 When you initially open Designer the Toolbar only has the the icons that can be used at that moment The Thumbnail List Area is empty because it is waiting for you to either create a script using the New icon or load an existing script using the Open icon Document Tab Bar 3 This area contains all your currently opened or unsaved scripts You can switch scripts by selecting the scripts name in the Document Tab bar If you have not saved the script then an asterisk will appear in front of the script name On the right of the document bar you will see the scripts dimensions the scripts properties icon the up icon for moving up levels in grouping and the close script icon Thumbnail List Area 4 The List icon toggles the view
338. ock of the script Simple Page Sequence This example shows how blocks might be used to define a number of pages Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 153 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation ScalaScripe Sequence Pagel Group Picture C Pierures Phocol Jpg Sequence Text 120 40 This is a Text 120 60 page with text gt Page2 Group Movie C Movies Anim1 mpg Sample Play C Music Songl mp3 Sequence Text 120 350 Hello World http docs scala com display D1100 This example also shows that blocks may be named by preceding them with a label which is a string that is prefixed by a colon If the string is an identifier defined in the section on Lexical Rules then the quotes around the string may be omitted Both commands and blocks may have labels The label attaches to the first event following the label Therefore a label must precede some event There are certain places where labels may not be placed in a script They may not be added to events in the group list of a block and they may not be used on commands that define internal labels such as style commands The above example contains two named pages Page and Page2 Labels are used to give names to events thus creating named events A named event may be used as a target for the Goto command or as a subroutine calls via th
339. ocs scala com display D1100 Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings LG ered es we Ty Bs I E ecm nd 7 Chroma Key Controls that let you select a particular Clip color and make it transparent a E CE 7 7 I ETE rm s m FTE mi Process Enables real time color processing of the clip during playback pre i T l i iE i ir J E HE re F Video Enables the clip to be trimmed in duration and loop control a E E zem _ repe aT lb mine wal ois fm a ol jm ES P e a n ii E A Design Web Clip Panel The Design Web Clip Panel is shown when a Web Clip Element is selected in Page View It allows you to Adjust Size and Cropping areas Apply Color gradients opacity gradients and corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element Set In and Out transitions for the element volume for the elements sound and the Start and End Times The Design Web Clip Panel is accessed by Adding a new Web Clip Element URL or adding a pre packaged HTML Widget wgt file Selecting a Web Clip element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Web Clip Panel consists of following tabs Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the e
340. of the respective trademark owners Page 98 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e Process Enables real time color processing of the clip during playback a l Lhe PI Design Movie Clip Panel The Design Movie Clip Panel is shown when a Movie Clip Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Adjust Size and cropping areas or the Movie Clip e Apply Color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element e Set In and Out transitions for the element volume for the elements sound Start and End Times The Design Movie Clip Panel is accessed by Adding a new Movie Clip element Selecting a Movie Clip element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Movie Clip Panel consists of following tabs a kh e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page a ss Pwr a RY SET rem L E 3 aL F INIEFL Ws Wee e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings PrE P a JP a Ty BS I E T r T d D n Lad at SS SE fs ok eee _ YF lki ee 3
341. og boxes It is assumed that most people will use a mouse to interact with the UI although almost all operations can be accomplished using a keyboard shortcut Common menu elements are briefly explained below Element Graphical Representation Function Title Bar Samia eox766 ilt X Shows the name of the panel script or dialog box in which you are working Occasionally additional information is provided Toolbar Contain icon buttons for common functions in that panel or dialog Toolbar items can toggle special options present drop down lists or navigate to another panel Tabbed Panels SE o e Se Access different sets of related controls to os aie prevent panels from becoming too large or crowded Ctrl Tab moves to the next tab Sh ift Ctrl Tab moves to the previous tab Click the tab header to display the panel of options for that type of operation As a point of interest the sequence of panels are ordered so that common tools between elements are found in the left hand panels and unique tools for that element in the right hand panels Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 6 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Close Button Up Button Value Control Pop up Button Selector Pull down Menu Combination Icon List Icon On Off Button Design Text x TE 1280 x 768 i t X q ib Foy Bitstre
342. ol Codes It is possible to change various aspects of the text style within the text of a Text Crawl or Global Text Crawl by using special control codes Inserting the appropriate control codes at the beginning of the crawl text will change the style in the segment of text which follows Direction The Direction of the Crawl can be set using the arrow control or by typing a numeric value Right to Left Default Traditional for horizontal text Crawls Left to Right Bottom to Top Traditional for credit scrolls Top to Bottom Rate Control The crawl movement can be adjusted by either Duration time code or a preset series of steps called Speed e Duration Specify the time that the first edge of the crawl will take to travel the crawl area This is specified in HH MM SS hh e Speed Determine the number of pixels the crawl will move per step refresh rate of the screen e Pixels per Step Enter the number of pixels Increasing Pixels per Step will make the crawl move faster Gap When a crawl element loops is cued or the text source contains carriage returns there will be a space between the crawl texts You can adjust the size of this space using the Gap value control The Gap is specified as a number of pixels between each crawl text repetition or update To allow visual adjustments the space you set will be reflected in the distance between the repetitions of the Crawl place holder text which is displayed in the Page View Separator
343. om the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Add a Table Element A Table Element is essentially a grid which can be either empty or contain a Text Cell which is an adaption of the Text Box Element To add a Table 1 Position the text cursor where you want to insert the Table 2 Either use the Add Menu or Drop Menu and select Add Table A grid of 2 columns x 2 rows will appear The Table Element can now be resized have additional rows and columns added or styles applied though the Design Table Panel It is possible to add additional rows and columns to the table at any time but it is recommended that you get the table into its most general shape before you populate it General Visual Manipulation When the Table element is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge of the clip which indicate that it is has been selected You can continue to work with the Table or click anywhere on the page outside of the Table to deselect it To exit cursor mode in a Text Cell press the Esc key which will select the Text Cell to Design Text Cell Panel Pressing ESC again will change to the Design Table Panel Moving the Table Element With the Table element selected simply drag it to a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock th
344. ommands to stop and wait for playing sounds Sounds can also be added to elements within a page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 31 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Playing a Script To view all of the pages you have added to your script click the Play icon in the toolbar The first page should appear then the next page and so on until the end of the list of pages you have added When the final page has appeared the script will loop back to the first page To exit playback at any time press the Esc key There is also a Preview button which only plays the page s you have selected Saving a Script Remember to save your work by clicking the Save button on the toolbar or selecting Save from the File pull down menu Iaza m n m a LF PEET a FET i pre r e ee ee ee el _ ae Enter a file name the SCA extension will be automatically added and click Save Publishing a Script In order for a script to be used in Content Manager it must be published Before publishing you need to know the following information e Content Manager URL this typically looks like http nostname 8080 ContentManager or http 1 2 3 4 8080 ContentManager where 1 2 3 4 is the Content Manager IP address e Username and password created on Content Manager The account must have a Role that allows Publish
345. on the order in the List View 4 Click another elements name in Page List view 5 Drag select elements using the mouse Regardless of your selection method the Design Panel will appear for the last type of element you have selected If it is a clip you will see the De sign Clip Panel if it is text you will see the Design Text Panel and so on Moving Elements Select the element and drag it to its new position you can cancel the drag by right clicking while dragging Use the Position tab in the Design Panel and type in the X Y co ordinates Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow When moving Multiple items they are normally moved in relation to each other except when Snap is turned on Manipulation using Element Handles Apart from the Text Element which does not have any handles on the bounding frame all other elements can be re sized using these handles Image and Animation elements may also be cropped using the handles Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and drag one of the of a element s bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust
346. on the Add icon which reveals the File dialog Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 93 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add File s option to select a Flash Clip swf file The Flash Clip imported at a resolution of 1280x720 at the cursor position After importing the clip the Design Flash Clip Panel appears and contain numerous options when working with Flash Clips General Visual Manipulation When the Flash Clip is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge The handles are an indication that a Flash Clip has been selected You can continue to work with the Flash Clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the Flash Clip to deselect it Moving the Flash Clip e With the Flash Clip selected simply drag the Flash Clip to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly
347. ons To vary the timing simply click on the Timing button of an element which will open the Timing panel This panel will also appear when you click on a Timing button in the Main View The timing options for elements are the same as for pages Special Event Pauses It is often useful to create a special event that is used to define a pause For example create a brief delay between the information presented by the passive elements which come into view with the page and the appearance of the first independent event which may be additional text You cannot apply a pause directly to a passive element Page View Toolbar Buttons Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 125 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Buttons A script that is interactive accepts input from the user Buttons and Text Entry Fields are the key to the world of interactivity A button is an element in your script that provides interactivity Most standard elements can be converted into a button These Button elements give the viewer control over the direction of the production By using the mouse or another type of input device like a touch screen to select buttons the viewer can make choices about how the script should proceed A button can trigger almost any kind of event jumping to a new page playing a sound wiping in an element even making calculations with vari
348. onveys the contents or purpose of the page The specific name of a page and script will not affect any other pages or page names nor any file name This means that although the name Designer provides may be based upon the name of a file you can change the name to something more descriptive in the Main View without affecting the name of the original file Background Clicking a button in the Background column opens the Background panel allowing for sizing opacity masking and other adjustments to background images from the Main View It is essentially identical to the Design Background Panel It also offers the advantage of being able to work with more than one page at a time Transition The icon on the button in the Transition column represents the page transition or the way the page moves onto the screen and replaces the previous page in the script is currently being applied to each page In most cases there is also a number on the button which represents the duration of the transition By default Designer applies the Cut transition the next page simply appears all at once You may edit the page transition by clicking on the Transition button opening the Page Transition panel When you select a transition the Transition button will immediately reflect the icon transition duration or speed and direction if any You may also change the transition for additional pages in the script before clicking on Close to exit the panel When adj
349. oo jpg Note that when using Python you can request that the Transmission Client be started automatically upon calling IntegrateContentLocally if it is not already running Just add start_netic True as in obj IntegrateContentLocally r C MyStuff MyFolder foo jpg start_netic True Seamlessly Reference External Content As shown above a Scala Script can reference this media by using paths such as Content foo jpg or Content mysubfolder foo jpg In Scala Designer you can create such a reference by e Opening the Linked Content folder by going to Start gt Programs gt Scala Designer gt Linked Content e Putting a placeholder file foo jpg in this example in that folder e From Designer add foo jpg You can locate the Linked Content folder by following the My Documents gt Scala Linked Content shortcut Player has special logic for linked content and locally integrated content that allows for seamless updates That means if your external code installs a new JPEG e g the current weather image it does not matter if Player is currently using an older revision of the same JPEG In particular e The IntegrateContentLocally method will not fail or be blocked because the previous revision is in use Rather the new revision of the file will be placed in the folder e Player will automatically grab the newest revision of your file the next time it needs it e Player will automatically clean up any older revisions of that file If
350. op of the current page background They are are added to the page using the Add pull down menu and select the Add Text Entry Field option lf there are any user defined Text variables already defined they are listed and you can select one Otherwise enter a name in the Name box to create a variable by that name Set the Scope of the variable as appropriate for this case i e set the Scope to External if you want a new variable to be common to the script and any sub scripts it has Once the variable has been defined or selected you see the variable name within a dashed box with graphic handles representing the size of the field The Design Text Entry Field Panel will appear containing options when working with Text Entry Fields General Visual Manipulation When a Text Entry Field is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge which indicate that it is has been selected You can continue to work with the clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the clip image to deselect it Moving the Text Entry Field Element e With the clip selected simply drag the clip to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 86 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Using CTRL A
351. opup and choose from one of the available options e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the Area e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the Area the level and direction of the gradient e Line Thickness Adjusts the thickness of the line by either using the slider or select and change the numeric value Streaming Video Element Controls URL Shows the URL of the Stream Video and can be replaced by clicking the URL The Steaming Video dialog enables you to specify the URL and any credentials needed to view the Streaming Video Transparency Turning transparency On makes transparent any portions of the Streaming Video defined as transparent using the controls in the Chroma Key tab Wait When set the playback sequence will wait until after the Video Stream has completed before continuing with subsequent commands TV Clip Element Controls This Element is only available if the TV Tuner Module is enabled in the Designer Tool Options panel Here you are able to setup the default settings for Channel Capture size etc Channel Enables the selection of the channel for the TV Tuner device The default Channel is initially shown but you can choose other channels from the list on the device The List contains channels defined for the current capture device and also e lt use player default gt uses the channel defined in the settings of the player This is useful when players are located in different locations e Composite Captures
352. ormat that represents your project Most users never need to concern themselves with the details of ScalaScript because Designer takes care of all that for them That said various advanced results can be achieved by hand editing ScalaScripts Often this is done by creating the basic project in Designer then embellishing it using a text editor If you need to use a feature or capability that is not supported by Designer manual updating of a script may be required It is possible to create new scripts outside of Designer as well as hand edit scripts that were created by Designer Loading a hand edited or hand authored script into Designer can occasionally produce unexpected results The ScalaScript Language ScalaScript is a language used for storing Scala Player scripts The Scala Player internally stores scripts as an object tree where playing the script consists of traversing the tree and passing methods to the objects When a script is saved it is converted into a text file containing commands and directives that allow the object hierarchy to be reconstructed at a later time It is important to understand that the ScalaScript language is not a traditional procedural imperative programming language Commands in a ScalaScript script are not executed played back one after another like a Basic or C program Rather a ScalaScript script is a description of an application and its components much like a description in English The Player and the EX
353. ot a big issue with Western fonts because of their comparatively small size but with Asian fonts this can be a significant issue Scala Designer supports a font exclusion list In a Scala network if a set of fonts is known to be pre installed on all players then naming these fonts in the font exclusion list will cause them to be not included by default when publishing to Scala networks By default fonts not on the exclusion list are published as normal In the Advanced Publish Options menu the Include Fonts option still allows you to exclude all fonts If you choose to include fonts the new E xclude Standard Fonts option lets you control whether the fonts on the exclusion list are excluded or transmitted The list of excluded fonts itself is an XML file that can be found at Program Files Scala Designer 5 System FontEmbeddingExclusionList xml Modifying this file is straightforward but care must be taken to only list fonts that are indeed present on all players Otherwise a player may receive a script without all the necessary fonts which can produce an incorrect display and run time errors Advanced Customization Options Most Scala products have a variety of advanced configuration options available through the use of the MMOS INI file Content Manager uses a file called features xml for some of its advanced customization MMOS INI is a file that lives in the program s installation folder e g D Scala Player or C Program Files Scal
354. ou left off e First Record Re starts from the beginning of the XML file Custom Step Size e Disabled Default Advances the position in the XML file by the specified value in Number of Records read after each iteration of the loop e Enabled Enabling Custom Step Size adds an additional numeric field which advances the position in the XML file by the count specified Tab Counters and Indexes The Counters and Indexes tab of the Data Source Panel allows you to set these Data Source control variables to Scala Script variables which can be used as on screen variables or used for more complex ScalaScript programming technique For each of these variables you must first de fine an integer variable Type Explanation of Value Current Count Variable Number of repeating records retrieved for the current iteration Total Count Variable Total number of repeating records in the data source Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 67 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Current Loop Variable Current loop count The Loop starts at zero Current Index Variable Current index position into the data source for the current iteration The index starts at zero Input Clicking a button in the Input column opens the Input panel which contains options related to interactive input for how mouse touch and keyboard input are handled on any given
355. our Script interactive it is recommended you lay out the basic production first and save this as a base so you can always revert to the non interactive version should you need to do so Additionally is recommended you create an interactive map that you can use to help do your work Design Buttons Panel In Designer almost all elements can be transformed into interactive buttons The Design Buttons Panel is shown when selecting Buttons from the Page View Toolbar or selecting Buttons F5 from the View Menu It consists of the following tabs which allow you to specify the e Type Use of the selected element You can change it into one of three types of button change one type of button to another or change a button back into a plain element e Select Action Action to take when the button is selected e Other Actions Additional controls for setting variables or playing sounds associated with the button e Appearance Visual appearance of push toggle and radio buttons Tab Type Initially this Panel only contains a single list button which specifies the type of button e None The default setting and also the method for removing the button and making it a normal element again Swapping between Push Buttons Toggle Buttons and Radio Buttons requires the selection of None before swapping can be completed successfully e Push Buttons e Toggle Buttons e Radio Buttons Push Buttons These are the most common and most versatile type of b
356. ouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Text Crawl Panel s Position Tab Cut Copy amp Paste A Text Crawl can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original Add a Text Entry Field Element Text Entry Fields are used in interactive scripts and allow a viewer to enter data with an input devices such as a keyboard They require a variable which must be a Text variable to be associated with it Whatever the viewer enters in the field is stored in this variable which can be displayed and manipulated the same as any other variable in Designer For example the viewer could be asked to enter their name and the script could then refer to the viewer by name More sophisticated applications of Text Entry Fields can gather store and process information entered then use it as a basis for changing script flow branching and display choices based on that variable It is an independent element which can be moved resized and styled on t
357. ouse pointer over the button icons to get tool tip information about which state each icon represents Both F12 and the button icons are available in any Design menu Most of the options in the Button Appearance and Action tabs can be applied independently to each of a button s states Radio Buttons Radio buttons are closely related to Toggle buttons but are different because they allow you to use any type of variable not just logical ones This implies that when using text and numeric variables you are not limited in your choice of values to assign to the button states You can choose any valid value you like for the button variable in a given state This makes Radio buttons more versatile than Toggle buttons Like a Toggle button a Radio button it has either two or four visual states and remains in its selected state after being clicked It requires a variable to be assigned to it The Variable List panel appears on first creating the Toggle button where you can either choose an existing variable or create a new variable as required 2 State Normal On and Off A two state Radio button can be either Off appearing like a Push button in the Normal state or On appearing like a Push button in the Select state It does not respond to the mouse pointer until clicked on Selecting it triggers a change in the variable s value 4 State Normal On and Off Highlighted On and Off A four state Radio button works the same way but both the Off an
358. ows Regional and Language Options Control Panel Windows Short weekday form from WindowsRegional and Language Options Control Panel Example Monday or Lundi Mon or Lun Monday Mon Monday or Lundi Mon or Lun When Timing Uppercase is set to true then text in the Date Time and Weekday variables will be converted to upper case Timing Uppercase Variable syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 198 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 System Information Variables Player Language String Player Language Returns the installed language of the player e g English Player Language Variable syntax Scala Productinfo Scala Releaselnfo Scala Buildinfo String Scala Producct Innis String Scala ReleaselInfo SLYing SCala Buildinto Returns information on the product and version Scala Productinfo describes the product build date and language Scala Releaselnfo the release number information Scala BuildInfo is normally blank but could contain some information if using a beta test version for example Examples e Scala Productinfo Scala Player 5 2010 05 04 English e Scala Releaselnfo Release 4 1 7 e Scala Buildinfo blank Scala ProductInfo Variable syntax Scala Releaselnfo Variable syntax Scala BuildInfo Variable syntax Scala Version Scala Revision Scala Build Integer Scala Vers
359. ows freely t234 fits fine 234 shorter number is padded with spaces 34 4 4 negative numbers just pick up a minus sign 34 O will print an integer with leading zeroes 1234 fits fine 0234 padded with zeroes 0034 0 will fill with leading zeros all but the first digit 1234 fits fine 234 leftmost place isn t supposed to be zero filled 034 now we get zeroes will print an integer as a fixed point number based on the fractional digits given 12 34 integer 1234 prints like this 2 34 leading zeroes trick would work here if you wanted ieee trailing zeroes dropped but see below Do not even one leading zero O special case 0 0 is like the above example but will always display two full decimal places listed plus the integral zero 12434 2 34 2450 note the 0 in the hundredth s place 0230 never lose that upper zero 0 00 as zero as we get will print a leading minus sign 1234 no sign printed if positive 1234 34 compare to first example where the minus sign touches the 3 will print a leading sign plus or minus Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 191 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 1234 even the plus is printed 234 1234 lt will print a left align number in the field 1234 234 34 Math Functions Min
360. owser and doesn t hold up playback waiting for the Flash clip to complete It is possible to make your ScalaScript wait for an explicit signal from your Flash clip s ActionScript To use this new capability you need to e Edit your ScalaScript to add the new WaitForExit On into your FlashClip or Flash command which tells Scala playback to wait for your Flash clip s ActionScript to explicitly signal its completion before Scala script playback advances e Make your Flash clip s ActionScript use Flash s External API Using the Externallnterface call method call the special scalaexit function at the point that it wishes Scala playback to advance ExternalInterface call Sscalaexit Data Driven Text Crawls Introduction You can use a Windows Script to drive a text crawl element using the Cued Expression feature Use one Scala variable for the Text Expression and another as the Cue Variable Using the Windows Script module share both of these variables with your VBScript JScript Python script When the text crawl engine is ready for more text it will set the cue variable to 1 Your script should notice this and place the next text string into the text expression variable then set the cue variable to 0 signaling that the text is now ready Then your script should wait for the cue variable to become 1 again Your script can set the cue variable to 1 to indicate that there are no further updates which will end the crawl Showi
361. panel where you can choose the sound file and adjust sound properties Variable A variable value can be set when a button changes state Clicking on the Variable button opens the Variables panel where you can define and set variables Pointer The pointer is ordinarily the default arrow or the pointer image specified by the most recent Inout menu event When you move the pointer over a Push or Toggle button its appearance changes by default to a hand with the finger extended You can change how you want the mouse pointer to appear depending on the button state Clicking the Pointer button opens the File dialog where you can select and load a clip to use as a mouse pointer Tab Appearance Button The buttons general appearance is created using the elements Design Panel You can apply different styles to each button state by selecting the state button icon on the Design Panel Title Bar The appearance options apply to whichever button state is currently selected as indicated by the highlighted button icon in the title bar Shift Use the value control to specify an offset in pixels horizontally and vertically to move the button face text or clip from its normal position in relation to its bounding box The most typical use of Shift is to use a small offset down and to the right for the selected face of a button that has a beveled style This gives the illusion that the button is being pressed down when it is clicked Boxed Hit A
362. pear anywhere within the script se This is a line comment There are a number of places where either a single command or a block may be used To this end it is convenient to define an event as either a single command or a block That is if an event may be used in some context then either a single command or a block may be used in that context The definition of a block should then be modified to read events enclosed between and That is blocks may contain both commands and other blocks The containing block of an event is often referred to as the parent of that event There are three commands in the example script Each command must be terminated by a semicolon Commands may take arguments and the arguments are enclosed in parentheses Command arguments may be of several data types including Boolean Integer or String String arguments are enclosed in double quotes The Picture command used here requires one argument the name of the picture file to display In this case the name is a string parameter so it is enclosed in quotes This is a command that displays a picture as the backdrop of a page full screen The default behavior of a block is to play its events sequentially Thus this script will display one picture after another until they have all been displayed Parallel Execution Sequential execution is fine for many tasks but there are times when two commands must execute simultaneously For instance a script
363. pecial event go the Add drop down menu and choose Add Special Event The Special Event page is automatically assigned lt untitled gt as the name of the page As with any page you can click on the No button and edit the name in the Page Control Panel You can then click the Timing Input Variable Sound or other Module columns to specify the action of the special event Special Events are often used to notate or comment your script by naming the page with your comment and then un checking Enabled in the Pa ge Control Panel Adding a Streaming Video Page Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 40 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Add Page From Media File Add Page From Recent Media File Add Page From Recent Media Folder p Add Plain Page Add Special Event Add Streaming Video Page You can only add a streaming video page from the Add pull down menu by selecting Add gt Add Streaming Video Page and entering the URL of the active media For a discussion of media supported by Designer please go here The page may also be edited in Page View with additional elements and text after which the media will stream to the page as a background movie Adding a Page using Drag and Drop You can also add pages to the script using ordinary drag and drop methods To do this drag a file icon for a background image sound sub
364. pective trademark owners Page 171 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Group Integer SourcelID definition 1 Sequence SourcelD 321 7 7 set Sourcer 41 tO 321 Group Integer SourceID definition 2 hides SourceID 1 Sequence SourceID 10 set SourceID 2 to 10 SourceID 999 2 is out of scope set SourceID 1 to 999 Here the local variable hides the more global variable until the local variable goes out of scope Once the local variable is no longer in scope the more global variable is again visible Even environment variables may be hidden in this manner Binding There are two possible methods of binding to a name in a script given a reference to that name 1 Static binding Name is found when the script is loaded The connection does not change during the playback of the script It is fast compared to dynamic binding There is no searching for the target name at run time However the referenced position will always remain the same regardless of the execution of the script 2 Dynamic binding Name is found each time the command is executed Every time the name is needed the Player must search the script for the name It is more flexible but is slower and often not necessary IT only matters where the same name is defined in multiple places within a script Currently only bang expansion within strings supports dynamic binding of names Suppose a string is created t
365. ped double quote is reached ScalaScript imposes no limit to the length of a string The string token generated will contain everything between the double quotes ScalaScripts are typically in Unicode UTF 8 format and have a Byte Order Mark at the beginning in which case string literals may contain any Unicode character Legacy ScalaScripts that lack a byte order mark are treated as ANSI in which case string literals may contain any ANSI character The UNNNN escape sequence works even in ANSI scripts The ScalaScript language uses the caret as an escape character to prefix control codes within a string An new line Ar carriage return At tab A literal quote AN literal caret at end of line Continue string on next line AXNN Embed any ANSI Latin 1 character code NN hexadecimal 00 FF AUNNNN Embed any Unicode character code point NNNN hexadecimal 0000 FFFF By using the exclamation mark which is sometimes referred to as the bang character a literal string may also contain embedded variables or expressions that are expanded through bang expansion Labels Consists of a colon followed by a string If the string is a simple identifier see below then the quotes around the string are optional However if the quotes are omitted then the label must be immediately followed by either white space an opening brace or a comment this is a long label with spaces pagel pagel paragraph2 Identifiers Used t
366. pt references some media that media is sent along with the script when the script is published to a Scala network However any media that isLinked Content is not sent with the script that references it Such content either needs to be added separately within Scala Enterprise Content Manager or needs to be installed delivered or generated on the player Note When installing delivering or generating content on the Player you should read and understand the Locally Integrated Content supp ort features When resolving references to Linked Content the Scala software first looks in the Content folder and if the file is not found there it looks in the LocallyIntegratedContent folder The reason for two folders and the essential difference is that e The Content folder is managed by the Player network engine i e things sent as content from Scala Enterprise Content Manager are placed there e The LocallyintegratedContent folder is for content managed outside of Scala Players e g placed here by any custom integration application One big difference is that cleanup of old unused content will not touch files in the LocallyIntegratedContent folder By default the Content and LocallyIntegratedContent folders are placed side by side as Documents and Settings All Users Documents Scala Content Documents and Settings All Users Documents Scala LocallyIntegratedContent but the WIN32_RootDataFolder keyword overrides this to WIN32 RootDataFolde
367. pyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 14 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 New dongles have a 30 day grace period before they stop working unless you provide the license file The license can be downloaded directly from Scala by Designer or you can manually copy it If you select Get New License File Online Designer will retrieve it from the Scala license server You will have the option to save a copy of your license file in the My Documents folder You can also select I Have It if you have a copy of your license file or defer by selecting Get it Later Software Update Unless otherwise specified all updates are cumulative so if you ve missed one or more updates you can just install the latest one You can find the latest updates on the Scala website at www scala com updates Additional Topics e Advanced Configuration Options for Designer provides information on how to further customize your installation of Designer Advanced Configuration Options for Designer Shortcuts to Sub topics within this Page e Installation Options e Silent Installation e Common Installation Options e Scala Designer Installation Options e Font Exclusion List e Advanced Customization Options e MMOS INI Options Applying to All Scala Products e Scala Designer and Scala Player MMOS INI Options e Scala Designer MMOS INI Options Installation Option
368. pyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 64 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 destination exists You see the controls for these on the tab when you choose Action Go to Event Go To Choose the page you want the script to advance to In most cases the Go To will be set to a page A thumbnail of the destination page is shown in the box to the right of the button Level Select the level of the script where the destination is Use the selector to cycle through the levels If the destination is in the same group you are in you can leave the selector as is If your script has no groups the only choices are lt this script gt Only levels at or above the current level are accessible Leave Bookmark Return from a series of events after branching with a Go to Event Click on Leave Bookmark to turn it on Then at the end of the series of Go to events insert a special event open the Variables column and select the Go To tab Choose Action Return to Bookmark When executed this returns the script to the bookmark location which is immediately after the original Go to Event Using Go to Event with a bookmark lets you define sections of a script as independent units that you can go to and return from whenever you call it Return to a Bookmark When using a Go to Event in the Variables and Branching Panel you can choose to use the Leave
369. r am pm e t Single character time marker e tt Multi character time marker Date Format Date Format has sixteen primary options using different combinations of separators leading zero and day month year order and a custom format The following Table shows the Date formats available and the value of the Scala System Variable dateformat Date Format Datefoemat vaule 5 October 1999 0 5 October 1999 1 October 5 1999 2 10 5 99 3 10 05 99 4 05 10 99 5 05 Oct 99 6 5 Oct 99 7 991005 8 99 10 05 9 05 10 99 10 5 10 99 11 5 10 1999 12 1999 10 05 13 Use Windows Regional Options In Long Form 100 Use Windows Regional Options In Short Form 101 Use Windows Regional Options In Custom Format 102 The custom date format template consists of a combination of patterns from this list The letters d g and y must be lowercase and the letter M must be uppercase Day e d Day of the month as digits e dd Day of the month as digits with leading zeros e ddd Day of the week abbreviated e dddd Day of the week e M Month as digits e MM Month as digits with leading zeros e MMM Month name abbreviated e MMMM Month name Year e y Single digit Year e yy Two digit Year e yyyy Four digit Year Period Era e gg Period era name ignored if the current calendar has no associated era name Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners
370. r relative positions Changing Size Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 88 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and drag one of the Box s bounding box handles Size can also be adjusted in the Design Box Panel s Position Tab e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust the width or height and using the opposite side as the anchor point SHIFT dragging a corner handle will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height and maintain the original aspect ratio of the Box using the diagonally opposite corner as the anchor point SHIFT dragging a side handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the Box using the opposite side as the anchor point CTRL dragging a corner handle resizes the width and height of the Box from the Center CTRL dragging a side handle resizes the Box from the Center in both directions of the side selected SHIFT CTRL dragging a corner or side handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the Box while simultaneously adjusting the width and height A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Box half its current width and height
371. r Documents Content WIN32_ RootDataFolder Documents LocallyIntegratedContent Display Options DESKTOP_Borderless TopMost CustomPosition Scala Player can now run on the desktop as a top most borderless window of arbitrary or full size You can specify the left top width and height As an example add this to your MMOS INI Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 18 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 DESKTOP_Borderless 1 DESKTOP_TopMost 1 DESKTOP_CustomPosition 100 50 800 600 Omitting DESKTOP_CustomPosition will make the window fill the primary display These options are also supported by Scala Designer MM3D_EnsureVBlankDuringPresentKludge This enables a workaround for certain Direct3D device driver issues Some device drivers do not properly maintain frame synchronization during display updates Ordinarily a Direct3D device driver waits for the display device to enter vertical blank before performing the display update Playback relies on this for smooth shear free animation Some drivers do not handle this properly resulting in jerky animation and or horizontal shearing When this workaround is enabled playback waits for the display device s vertical blank period instead of relying on the device driver to wait for vertical blank This workaround was initially added to address an issue with the Intel 945 graphics chipset
372. r User Guide Opens this online user documentation Scala Script Brings up a dialog where you can pick a Scala Script command function or system variable to get syntax help on Text Style Tags Brings up a syntax document describing Embedded Tags supported by Text and Text Crawl elemenis Scala on the Web Opens www scala com About Scala Designer Brings up the About Box that shows Version and Licensing Information This list in the About box shows version copyright and license information about Scala Designer The About Scala Designer Box Note You can use Ctrl C to copy this information to the clipboard should you need to contact Scala Support e Check Support Online Attempts to connect to Scala s License Server to verify the subscription coverage information and either download a new license file if one is available or take you to the Scala Maintenance Subscription web site for more options You must be connected to the internet for this to succeed e Get License File Online Attempts to connect to Scala s License Server over the Internet and download the latest license file associated with your Scala Designer USB Key and install it You must be connected to the internet for this to succeed e Import License File Use this button to install a license file you already have In the file dialog that opens locate your license file select it and press Open io install it The file must be for your Scala Designer USB Key Columns EXtens
373. r decreasing contrast e Gamma Correction Similar to Brightness this setting adjusts the overall luminance of the image but does not alter the lightest and darkest tones from their original values e Reset Returns the image to its original unprocessed state resetting all controls to zero Tab Video i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Design Movie Clip x Appearance A Position Mise Chroma Key Process Video Start Time in HH MM SS hh n ee lt 00 00 05 00 Wait Loops a 1m End Time in HH MM SS hh 400 00 20 52 gt The Video tab is primarily used to set the Start and End times of the movie clip allowing you to play a specific part of the movie clip To have the movie clip start playing at some point after the beginning use the Start Time control to set the position in hours minutes seconds and hundredths HH MM SS hh To have the movie clip stop playing at some point before the end use the End Time control to set the length of time from the beginning to the desired stop point HH MM SS hh Start Time in HH MM SS hh e Enables the Start Time value control allowing you to adjust the start time for the movie e Start Time Control The default is 00 00 00 00 the beginning of the movie Select a value and adjust it End Time in HH MM SS
374. r editing purposes only Grids and Guidelines are useful both to ensure alignment or defining safe areas of the screen Snap to Used in conjunction with Snap this menu allows you to specify which of the Extras elements are snapped to when moved Snap This toggle option enables you limit the movement of elements to the nearest grid or guide line depending on the selected Snap To options Zoom Control Six of the commonly used zoom levels are provided from this menu section Preview Page This is the same option as the Preview Icon in the Page View Toolbar and enables you to preview the page including transitions Play script This is the same option as the Play Icon in the Main View Toolbar and enables you to play the script from the beginning Using the Tools Menu in Page View Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 139 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 File dic Add Yew Took Help w a LJ Spelling 7 Ad Cut Copy Pa Edit Grid aung Save Element and Page Defaults Restore Defaults The Tools menu has a number of functions available to assist the designer during the creative process and enables you quick access to Spelling Edit Grid Edit Guide Lines Save Element and Page Defaults Restore Defaults Options Spelling Begins checking the spelling of the text on the current page Edit Grid
375. r the OnNotification command go out of scope OnNotification variable Goto foo OnNotification my_var Use foo It follows group scoping That is it is placed into the group list of a block and remains active until that block is exited Group OnNotification x Goto foo Sequence the OnNotification command is active throughout this entire block both the sequence and the resources list It accepts Use Goto UseExpr GotoExpr JumpPage Return and Quit for the branch action These take the following actions when the variable changes Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 185 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 e lf the branch specified is a Goto then the action will interrupt the player thread and it will exit its current context so that it can jump to the specified destination location in the script Bookmarks may not be set in a Goto within an OnNotification command e lf the branch specified is a Use command then the action will interrupt the player thread and it will detour to the specified destination location in the script returning to the original context when the destination work is complete e Ifthe branch specified is a Return then the action will break the current playback thread and return to the last pushed bookmark e Ifthe branch specified is a Quit then the action w
376. r to document their work However Scala Designer does not recognize comments and they will be lost if a hand authored script is saved from within Designer Each comment is treated as a single token where all characters inside of the comment are ignored Comments do not nest There are two types of comments in ScalaScript 1 Block comments Delimit a range of characters defined by a block comment introducer and a block comment terminator Any characters may appear inside of the comment and all characters are ignored until the block comment terminator is found lScalasScripe this is a block comment this is a comment It may appear anywhere within the file except on the first line Everything within the block is ignored another block comment 2 Line Comments Are introduced by the line comment introducer All characters up to the first end of line character either carriage return or line feed are ignored rScalasSecript this is a comment Sequence this is a comment my command 1 2 Test on another comment this is a comment Special Characters The following characters are single character tokens which always end the current token they do not have to have intervening white space 5 semicolon comma left parenthesis right parenthesis left square bracket right square bracket left curly brace right curly brace The following characters
377. rademark owners Page 178 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 my_var my_var l a T my_array 10 ivy tunce rom az iy LUN Variable references in bang expansion expressions are always determined dynamically at the point where the string is used Live Expressions in Text If an expression or bang expansion is used in a string displayed by the Text command then notification is set up for all the variables within that expression or bang expansion Changes to the variables while the Text element is displayed will cause the on screen text to update subject to the Update option of the Text command Consider the following example Serra DJa Sequence a Hello b World Text 207 207 Wal HardDuration 1000 Waits for one second a Goodbye The text will show Hello World and one second later it would automatically update to read Goodbye World The text will also update if an expression is used PEAR ay 4 Sequence a Hello b World Text 20 20 a b HardDuration 1000 Waits for one second a Goodbye If it is desired that the text not update you can use an intermediate variable SETIN ay D Sequence a Hello b World c a b Text 20 20 c HardDuration 1000 7 Waits for one second a Goodbye In the above example the text would remain as Hello World even after a was cha
378. rance of the pointer would be both unnecessary and misleading to the viewer Pointer Image options are not necessary with touch screens so they are also disabled Keyboard Arrows Enter When enabled this option lets you use the keyboard rather than the mouse and main mouse button to highlight and select buttons on the screen with the arrow keys and select the highlighted button by pressing Enter This option is available whether the touch screen or mouse options are on and can also be used by itself Tab Mouse Pointer To change the default pointer images for entire pages and scripts or to choose when the pointer is visible in your script you can use the options in the Mouse Pointer tab However if you want to change the pointer image for buttons in the Highlight and Select states use the Buttons panel Pointer The Pointer pop up lets you choose when you want the pointer visible in your production Even on a page that has no buttons for example you might want to use the pointer for illustrative purposes to point to items on the page as you discuss them Alternatively you may want the pointer visible only when buttons are available for selection The Pointer pop up menu has two options e For Selection Only Pointer is be visible only if there are buttons on screen e Always Pointer visible regardless of whether there are buttons on screen or not Pointer Image Controls the design of the normal mouse pointer used on screen
379. rd Wrap On Clips When using a Clip as a template file select the Scaling option as follows e Free Exactly to the size regardless of aspect ratio e Fill and Trim Match the width or height whichever is closer and crops off the image in the other direction e Fit Inside Fit completely within the size area leaving space above or below if the aspect ratio is different Binding Elements Binding a Text Element to a Data Field 1 Right click on the title and select Bind Data and then New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK The text you have typed in Designer is considered a placeholder When creating a message in Content Manager a user will enter different text to replace the placeholder The font attributes size and transitions will be preserved Binding Text Segments It is also possible to bind a segment of a text element to a data field Highlight a word within a text element then right click on the selection and ch oose Bind to Data from the context menu Binding a Clip Filename to a Data Field When binding a clip to a data field you are actually binding the file name of the clip that is being assigned the data field 1 Right click on a clip and select Bind to Data then select New 2 Enter the name of the variable and click OK The image you use in Designer is considered a placeholder This clip is published with the script but is replaced when the user creates a message The new clip will adopt the attributes
380. rea The option lets you adjust the button s hit area which is the space in and around the button that responds when the mouse pointer moves over it or clicks on it This area can be rectangular default or an irregular shape that is one defined by the pixels of the button image as opposed to the background Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 130 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The primary use of this option is with clip images that have transparent areas The hit area of a round button which has transparent corners can be round If you have selected three elements with different sizes for the three different buttons states Designer uses the size and position of the Normal state image for the hit area determination Link Sizes Because you can adjust the different button states independently it is possible to have different sized buttons for each state e On Forces any size changes made in one button state to be reflected in the other state s so that their sizes match This is the default setting e Off Enables independent control of the sizes of a button s states Link Positions Most Button are designed so that the states overlap each other and thus must be in the same position but it is possible to position them independently When moving one state button e Setting On All other states move to retain their
381. rea is enabled by default and will show a fill chip and an Options popup button To prevent Shape elements from becoming invisible you cannot disable the Area unless the Line is enabled Fill Chip To change the Area color or texture click on the fill chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the Options popup and choose from one of the available options e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the Area e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the Area the level and direction of the gradient e Mask Choose an image file to use as a mask to determine the opacity for this part of the element Line Lets you specify a colored or textured effect for the Line of the selected shape element Enable Disable the Line For Line Shapes Line is Enabled by default and will show a fill chip and an options popup button For Boxes and Ovals the Line is disabled by default To prevent Shape elements from becoming invisible you cannot disable the Line unless the Area is enabled Fill Chip To change the Line color or texture click on the fill chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the options p
382. reated in Level 0 Changing an element s level number from 0 to a higher number will ensures it will appear on top of any elements with a lower level number Levels are only a designation of the depth relationship of overlapping elements Levels do not exist as entities that you work with directly You can directly select and manipulate any element on any level For any elements with level numbers other than 0 a legend will appear in the upper left corner of their selection frame indicating the element s level number There is no limit to the number of elements or element levels that can be at a given level Levels are adjusted by changing a selected element s level number This can be done by changing the e Value in the Element Level control on the Position panel of the Element Design panels e Level number in the List panel s Level column As with other element attributes newly created elements will take on whatever value is specified in the Element Level New elements are created in the level with the last level specified or the level of the last element which was selected or until you change the level number Applying Transitions from the List Panel In and Out transitions may be applied to any element that is not a sub script or non graphic special event such as a sound or a pause When a page element is added it does not contain an In or Out transition If you click on a transition button the Element Transition Panel will appear Addi
383. rgument lists Array arguments are also known as indices semi colon Terminate commands including assignments equals sign Separate the left and right hand sides of an assignment statement It is also used as the equality comparator Other Control Characters These control characters are also used colon Part of certain primitives such as Sequence or are used to introduce labels curly braces Enclose event blocks The keyword EVENT i s equivalent to open brace and the keyword END is equivalent to the close brace Boolean Literals These values are valid Boolean literals True Boolean true value False Boolean false value On Boolean true value Off Boolean false value Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 161 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation True is equivalent to On and False is equivalent to Off The two forms may be used interchangeably Operators Assignment Operator To assign a value to a variable use the equals sign to write variable expression If x is an integer r is areal s is a string and b is a boolean then x 3 J Sets x to 3 x 3 23 Sets x to 1 truncates to fit in an integer x 3 9 Sets x to 3 truncates to fit in an integer r 3 9 II Sets to 3 9 E S 3 23 if Sets to 1 5 3 5 2 7 7 Sts r to 1 75 K Il b True Sets b to true Note that the equals sign is
384. riables are available as ScalaScript variables on the player as are various types of metadata that can be set in Content Manager You can read or display these variables directly from your ScalaScripts which can also pass this variable to a VBScript JScript or Python script for processing there You can make solutions that display the metadata information or that different actions based on metadata values Global Player Variables You can read these ScalaScript variables to learn certain global properties of the Player Playback Name Name of Player in Content Manager Playback Id UUID of Player in Content Manager Playback MainScript Player s main script Player Foo Value of Player metadata Foo The metadata entry Foo and its values on each player would be set up in Content Manager Current Channel Variables You can read these ScalaScript variables to learn about the current channel e Playback Channel Name of Player s channel e Channel Foo Value of channel variable Foo The metadata entry Foo and its values for each channel would be set up in Content Manager Current Frame Variables You can read these ScalaScript variables to learn about the current frame e Playback Frame Name of frame e Playback FramePath Frame path This is a string that uniquely identifies the frame including display channel and frame name e g Display1 My channel My frame e Playback Fullscreen On or off e Playlist Path Playlist path This
385. riables are not enabled for selection until a Windows script file has been selected Double click on a variable in the list to share it with the Windows script Scala variables shared with the Windows script will be available to the Windows script for reading and writing Shared Variables The right hand list shows the Scala variables that are shared with the Windows script These variables will be available for the Windows script to read and modify within the Windows Scripting environment Double click on a variable in the list to stop it from being shared Delete Deletes a Windows Scripting event Playback Audit This opens the Playback Audit panel which allows you to enable or disable the logging of playback audit information for the page and has Audit Event e When On playback audit information is written to the playback audit log file when this page is played e When Off no playback audit information is written for this page The playback audit information consists of the Player name derived from the COMPUTERNAME environment variable Page name Script name J J J e Timestamps showing exactly when playback for the page began and ended It is written to the file Logs BillYYYYMMDD log where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day and is appended to the end of the log file each time a tracked page finishes The Playback Audit Module creates a new playback audit log file at midnight every day Include Cu
386. ribed below may not be available Background x Image Type Image Settings p Scaling Original Y Custom Image Size A 1x1 gt Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 121 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The Image Settings tab of the Design Background panel contains options related to the dimensions of picture movie anim or streaming video backgrounds When a background of one of these types is added both the face and backdrop layers are present This tab relates to the media asset in the face layer The media asset used for the background will be scaled automatically from the center using the default scaling setting of Fill and Trim to Page This allows the media asset to cover the entire page without being distorted If the media asset is smaller than the defined page size it will automatically be scaled upward until it covers the dimensions of the page If the media asset is larger than the page it will be scaled down Regardless if the proportions of the media asset and the page do not match some of the media asset will run off the edge of the page The Custom Image Size button although normally disabled reveals the size of media asset being used in the face layer of the background Additionally the Image Size selector provides several automatic scaling options Scaling Lets you choose one of
387. ript Note More details on this topic can be found in the Scripting and Automation section The Windows Scripting column displays the name of a Windows script launched by this event through the Windows Scripting Module You can develop Windows scripts using any scripting language supported through the Windows Scripting Engines installed on your system Common scripting engines include VBScript Python and JScript The Windows Scripting panel enables you to select the external windows script and share variables between it and ScalaScript An example of this might be a windows script that gathers weather information from an external source and populates ScalaScript variables with today s weather It consists of Windows Script Opens the File dialog to let you select a Windows script file to run It is launched when the Scala script executes this Windows Scripting event Engine It is enabled after the file is chosen and defaults to the engine Designer believes should be the source The drop down list shows Windows Scripting engines currently available on your system You should ensure that it matches the Windows Scripting language used by the selected Windows script It is important to make sure that the chosen scripting engine is is also available on your playback device Variables List The left hand list shows the user variables created within the current Scala script along with their variable type integer real text or boolean The Va
388. ripts out_numthumbs Returns number of thumbnails that were generated from this template A multi page template will return a number higher than one out_errormsg Error message returned by GeneratePreviewThumbnails3 Note that errors such as missing files may be reported even in cases where the call succeeds In such cases the imagery for the missing files will be absent in the thumbnail that is generated The xmitext string must specify the ingredients for your template That is it must list the data fields the template provides and the values you wish to use for each of them This input string should consist of an lt ingredients gt XML element containing one or more data field elements from the following supported types lt text name fieldname gt Text to use lt text gt A text data field and its value lt boolean name fieldname gt On Off lt boolean gt A boolean data field and its value lt integer name fieldname gt number lt integer gt An integer numeric data field and its value lt real name fieldname gt floating point number lt real gt A real floating point data field and its value lt filename name fieldname gt path to filename lt filename gt A filename data field and its value which is the full path to the file lt resource name fie dname gt name of playlist lt filename gt A resource data field and its value which is typically the name of a playlist in Content Manager Here is an example x
389. rl Y for Redo While the majority of actions can be undone changes to settings that impact only the application s working environment and not the script itself are not tracked by the undo system Examples of changes that cannot be undone include Changes made in the Tools Options dialog Opening or closing a panel or dialog apart from changes made within it Actions that cause some form of output such as printing or publishing Changing the Designer window size or position Undo Ctrl Z This function undoes the last change made to the script You can continue choosing it to move as far back as necessary through your editing history The Undo entry in in the pull down menu identifies the change to be reversed such as Undo Delete You will see the results immediately and a message in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the specific change Use Redo to cancel the effect of the last Undo Redo Ctrl Y Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 95 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 This function reverses the effect of the last Undo operation restoring an editing change you had made You can continue choosing it to move as far forward as necessary through the actions that you have taken back using Undo The Redo entry in in the pull down menu identifies the change to be reversed such as Redo Delete You will see
390. rol tab General Visual Manipulation When the a Text Crawl is displayed on the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge of the crawl The handles are an indication that a element has been selected You can continue to work with the Text Crawl or click anywhere on the page outside of the Text Crawl to deselect it Moving the Text Crawl Element e With the clip selected simply drag the clip to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the Text Crawl s handles on the bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and the height of the Text Crawl Font Size does not change e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left m
391. rrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the Text Entry Field s handles on the bounding box e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button The size can also be adjusted in the Design Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the clip to its original size It can also be adjusted in the Design Text Entry Field Panel s Position Tab Cut Copy amp Paste A Text Entry Field Element can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste fr
392. rs crosses triangles crescents etc and these can have the area filled or outline line art To create a Box 1 Use the Add pull down menu and select the Add Box option 2 The Design Box Panel appears and the mouse pointed turns into a cross hair 3 Move the pointer to where you want one corner of the box then press and hold the left main mouse button then move the pointer to the position of the diagonally opposite corner and release the mouse button to complete the box While drawing you can hold down the the following keys to draw e SHIFT perfect square from the first corner in any direction e CTRL from the center of the Box the center being the original position e SHIFT CTRL perfect square from the center of the Box the center being the original position Graphic handles will appear around the resulting box indicating it is selected allowing you to change its shape General Visual Manipulation Moving the Box With the Box Element selected simply drag the Box to a new position Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the elemenit s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain thei
393. rty of the respective trademark owners Page 152 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 LeCa laser sequence Picture C Pictures Photo1l jpg Picture A Pictures Photo2 jog Picture C Pictures Photo3 jpg Simultaneous Execution The preceding examples have been simplified to introduce the concepts of the group list and the sequence list In reality the behavior of these two list is more complex Events in the group list are played before the events in the sequence list but the events in the group list remain active until after the sequence list completes This makes it possible to have a command execute while another command is in process Take the following script for example SCALA Serr ou Group Picture C Pictures Photol jpg Sample Play C Sounds Sound1 mp3 Sequence Pause 2 Text 10 10 Hello World In this example Picture1 and Sound1 start at the same time The sequence list is played while the picture is displaying and the sound is playing That is after two seconds of playback a line of text will be displayed on the picture The group and sequence list behavior is even more complex than this example suggests however this should give the reader a good feel for page construction within a script When scripts are built that contain multiple pages each page will look much like the above block All of the page blocks will be contained within the main bl
394. running Either form of the LogExternalError method takes three parameters e problemNumber The problem number to report This determines whether the report is a problem logged reported to Content Manager s Player Health subsystem where it can trigger an email alert or a warning logged only The current supported values are Value Explanation 1000 Problem general Use when none of the other Problem numbers are suitable 1001 Warning general Use when none of the other Warning numbers are suitable 1002 Problem with Player hardware e g CPU temperature critical 1003 Warning with Player hardware e g CPU temperature higher than expected 1004 Problem with the display e g Projector lamp has failed 1005 Warning with the display e g Projector lamp life less than 10 remaining 1006 Problem with a device e g Printer is out of paper 1007 Warning with a device e g Printer is low on paper 1008 Problem with communication e g Server could not be reached invalid password 1009 Warning with communication e g Server could not be reached retrying 1010 Problem with software e g Unhandled error subsystem cannot continue 1011 Warning with software e g Unexpected result 1012 Problem with data e g Invalid data format 1013 Warning with data e g Data is corrupt e moduleName A short string identifying your script module as the source of this report This inform
395. ry large source image the sample may extend beyond the edges of the box If this occurs simply drag the sample around in the Preview panel so you can easily see the outer areas Slice Controls Above the Preview Original tabs are the buttons of the Numeric Editor which control the vertical and horizontal slices Each of the six slice buttons displays two pixel values 1 An offset the number of pixels from the top edge or left edge of the source image 2 Width When you select one of the buttons the corresponding slice will be highlighted on the Graphic Editor s enlarged image Changing the Numeric Editor values will change the dimensions of the slice in the editor Similarly clicking in the enlarged image will select a slice By dragging the graphic handles on the sides of the slice the pixel values on the corresponding button will automatically update You can use either or both methods to define your slices By default the edges of neighboring slices are stuck together For example when you move the right edge of the Middle slice the left edge of the Right slice will move in tandem This will ensure that the source image s pattern will match from slice to slice The edges of the slices may also be adjusted independently To independently control the edge of a slice hold down Ctrl while dragging its handle As you position the selected slice edge the edge of the neighboring slice will not move Once separated the two edges will remai
396. s Else s Publishing finished successfully ENG 1 ElseIf curscriptnum 0 Then s Queued and awaiting publishing Else So Pia is bag SiO pk he eure cra Orin ae TOC T MISC pre a Ti TU curscriptname amp is amp percentdone amp done amp vbLf amp vbLf amp Overall progress amp totpercentdone amp done End If s s amp vbLf amp vbLf If completedscripts lt gt Then S S amp Completed scripts amp vbLf amp completedscripts amp vbLf amp vbLf End LI It lea ledserrore lt gt my Then s s amp Failed scripts amp vbLf amp failedscripts amp vbLf amp vbLf End If MsgBox s amp allerrors Loop Set obj Nothing Scala Server Support Module The Scala Server Support Module is a component that supports various tasks that Scala Enterprise Content Manager needs Using those same features an external program can generate preview thumbnails of scripts and other content Installation The Server Support Module is installed as part of the Scala Enterprise Content Manager installation Module Usage The Server Support Module offers a COM interface to access its Thumbnail Generation feature This COM interface can be accessed from VBScript or many other languages It contains these methods GenerateThumbnail2 Method The GenerateThumbnail2 method can be used to create a thumbnail image from a media file or ScalaScript At the same time it can retrieve relat
397. s The Scala installers accept various command line parameters that affect the installation or the values used in installation To use these open a command prompt and type setup exe OPTION1 value OPTION2 value If value contains spaces enclose it in quotes for example setup exe OPTION1 C Temp My Folder Silent Installation Silent installation can be accomplished by passing SILENT or VERYSILENT as command line arguments SILENT installs ask no questions but show installation progress VERYSILENT installs ask no questions and do not show progress during installation To assist with silent installs the installers accept various additional command line parameters given below Common Installation Options All the Scala installers accept e LOG filename Log the results to filename which can be used to trouble shoot a silent install e DiR folderpath Specify the full path where the product should be installed e LANGUAGE language Select language during installation e These are the accepted values for Designer installs NOT case sensitive Arabic English French Japanese Korean Russian SimplifiedChinese Spanish TraditionalChinese Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 15 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e ROOTDATAFOLDER path Specify the path to be used for storing various configuration and data item
398. s This corresponds to the WIN3 2_RootDataFolder keyword in MMOS INI see here but the command line option is also supported for Content Manager Scala Designer Installation Options The Scala Designer installer also supports these options e COMPONENTS comma separated list Specify which components to install Supported values are e usersguide User s Guide Clipart Clipart library Clipart 4x3 4x3 Landscape Clipart clipart 4x3 demoscripts 4x3 Demo scripts Clipart 4x3 templates 4x3 Template scripts clipart 4x3 images 4x3 Image files Clipart 4x3 videos 4x3 Video files Clipart 16x9 16x9 Wide screen landscape Clipart Clipart 16x9 demoscripts 16x9 Demo scripts clipart 16x9 templates 16x9 Template scripts clipart 16x9 images 4x3 Image files clipart 16x9 videos 4x3 Video files Clipart 9x16 9x16 Wide screen portrait Clipart clipart 9x16 images 4x3 Image files clipart 9x16 videos 4x3 Video files Clipart clips Clip files clipart sounds Sound files clipart misc Other files tiles palettes pointers e extrafonts Additional typefaces Example COMPONENTS clipart clips clipart sounds extrafonts Font Exclusion List Scala Players use intelligent file transfer to avoid uploading or downloading files that are already present However font licensing rules generally require that fonts be transmitted with their documents Scala scripts which defeats the benefit of intelligent file transfer This is n
399. s files However Scala extends in the following ways the file path syntax in order to manage the storage and seamless updating of content media files e Special Locations The most important one is called Content which is the Linked Content location For example if you use Scala Enterprise Content Manager s Non Scheduled Content feature to send data xml to a player that file will end up in the Linked Content location Scala can refer to this file using the path Content data xml and the true location will be found e File Revisions Every time you update a file called data xml it is given a unique always increasing revision number The actual file on disk might thus be called data 12345 xml Scala automatically locates the newest revision of a file and cleans up older revisions when they are no longer in use thus Scala can refer to this file using the path Content data xml and the correct revision will be found e Locking Scala locks media files while they are in use to ensure that such files are never cleaned up while they are still in use and to allow new revisions to be installed under a new higher revision number In order for your Windows script to access files that are inside the Content location and or to automatically deal with file revisions and locking Scala provides the LockScalaFile and UnlockScalaFile methods of the ScalaFileLock interface These let you obtain the normal Windows style path to a file and to hold a lock on
400. s for the currently selected clip if it is a 256 color format 8 bit Palettes will not be available under the following conditions e A Background Palette Option Background is Plain a High Color or True Color image or a movie e The Clip Palette Option If a clip has not been selected or if the clip is a High Color or True Color image or a movieclip e No clip is currently selected Color Bar The contents of the current palette are displayed in the color bar at the top of the panel in color sets of 16 colors at a time Use the Color Set Switcher at the end of the color bar to cycle through the color sets in the palette The color bar for the User palette contains the system default of 19 colors One of these colors is always selected as indicated by a box within one of the colors on the color bar and it will also be displayed in a larger color block to the right of the sliders Palette Lets you select e User e Background Available if the current background is a 256 color 8 bit picture or animation e Clip Available only if a 256 color 8 bit clip is selected Add Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 131 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 You can create and add any color you choose to the User palette e Click the Add button beneath the Palette pop up to create a new chip e It is located to the left of
401. s scala com display D1 100 What can be Bound Text Elements Text Crawls Text Expression or Text File Background Image Videos Clips Images Videos Pages Playlists in Content Manager Table Cells Masks Font Size Many Numeric values of an Items properties for example the elements position Content Manager only allows you to replace the placeholders with data of the same type i e Text with Text Video with Video and Images with images Binding is easy just right mouse click Whether you are binding a text element a clip or even some panel options for instance Font size Bind to Data is just a right click away or you can use the Edit menu for Elements To bind something right click on what you want to bind then select and right click the element or panel option Bind Text To Data Field Text elements Bind Text Crawl Text To Data Field Text Crawl Text Expressions Bind Text Crawl Filename To Data Field Text Crawl Text Files Bind Clip Filename To Data Field Clip Files Bind Background Picture Filename To Data Field Background Files See Template Creation for further details on each of these options You are defining Text variables and as such you should remember the rules for naming Variables Content Manager Template Properties When Scala Designer publishes the scripts Content Manager is able to distinguish between a normal script and a template script Normal scripts are put dire
402. script or other file from its window into the Designer window showing the Main View The file is added as a new page and it will follow whichever page you originally selected There are certain types of pages that cannot be created using drag and drop Plain Pages for example and Special Event pages which are not file based such as a branch event must be created as described in Adding a Special Event Page Main View Toolbar Edit Page A Edit Page The quickest way to begin editing the contents or design of a page listed in the Main View is to double click on the corresponding thumbnail or its Name button In addition to the Page Toolbar the revealed Page View is dependent upon two things e An Empty Page e The Page Already Has Elements on It An Empty Page You will see the Design Text Panel with a text cursor at the top left of the page canvas the visible design area of the page ready for text entry Clicking anywhere in the page canvas will place the text cursor in this position assuming you wish to type text in that position To add other elements at this position you can use the drop down menu to add the following elements Using this Element Allows You To Add Files Add a new element by opening the File dialog from which you can choose from Clips Images AnimClips Movie Clips Multi tile Clips Buttons Add Recent File Choose from previously used media Add From Recent Folder Choose media from a previously used me
403. sed to declare one or more integer variables whole numbers or to declare single dimensional arrays of integers This command must be used in the group list of a block The scope of the variables is over the block in which they were declared Group Integer x y Z Integer Leste EUO Real Real variables are numbers that can include decimal points The Real command is used to declare one or more real variables non integers such as 1 23 or single dimensional arrays This command must be used in the group list of a block The scope of the variables is over the block in which they were declared Group Real x y zZ Real test 100 String Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 175 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 String variables contain arbitrary Unicode text The String command is used to declare one or more text variables or single dimensional arrays String variables adjust dynamically to the length of the string it contains There is no need to declare the length of the string This command must be used in the group list of a block The scope of the variables is over the block in which they were declared Group DERING SLrIMnG My array LUO normali vars Stringy FileNameString The FileNameString type behaves like a regular String However if you use an initializer then when publishing a Sc
404. several options for scaling the background media asset to the size of the page e Original No scaling is performed The media asset appears at its original dimensions and positioned centrally within the page e Fit Inside Page Preserve Aspect Ratio Scales the media asset as large as possible while still fitting entirely within the page letter boxing if necessary e Fill and Trim to Page Preserve Aspect Ratio Scales the media asset to just completely fill the entire page trimming in the larger dimension if necessary e Fill Page Exactly Scales the media asset so that it exactly matches the page size without regard to aspect ratio e Custom Enables the Custom Image Size control so that you can specify any arbitrary size When the proportions of the media asset do not match the proportions of the page the Backdrop layer s Fill Type is used to fill the page areas not covered by the media asset If the dimensions or proportions of the media asset match those of the page there will be no apparent difference in the effects of some of these options Custom Image Size Normally disabled this option displays the pixel dimensions of the picture movie anim or streaming video background To choose a custom size set the Scaling option to Custom which allows you to specify any size you want for the media asset and it will be scaled according to its new dimensions Crop Selecting Crop enables the crop position and crop size fields The
405. signer You will see this dialog for each open script that has been edited since the last time it was saved Working in the Page View Designer s Page View is used to create and manipulate a page and it is broken down into these basic areas Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 78 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Headline Body text Page View Menu 1 These menus provide access to functions in the areas of File Edit Add View Tools and Help Page View Toolbar 2 The Page View Toolbar has a few buttons which are similar to the Main View Toolbar Certain icons including Add Cut Copy Paste Undo and Redo and Preview are also present on both Toolbars To the right of the tool bar you will see the page s name and duration and the Page Switcher Page View Canvas 3 The canvas has two distinct parts e Visible Page Area 4 seen during playback and is normally the main area to work within e The Off page Area 5 area outside the visible page Design Panel 6 These panels house the functions and settings you will need to compose individual pages in your script There is a specific Design Panel associated with every major type of design task The name of a panel reflects its purpose or the type of element with which it is associated Additional Topics Information on the following topics can also be fou
406. simple values gt lt item element 1 gt item value Al lt item element 1 gt lt item element 2 gt item value A2 lt item element 2 gt lt item gt lt item gt lt Successive item nodes would typically have the same elements with new values gt lt item element 1 gt item value Bl lt item element 1 gt lt item element 2 gt item value B2 lt item element 2 gt lt item gt lt main gt XML Features Not Supported These XML features are not currently supported by the Data Source module e XML attributes e Additional sub elements e Other more complex structures e g deeper trees e More than one group of repeating item nodes e XML comments e g lt My Comment gt Using Data Source To use Data Source follow this process 1 Create an XML file like the example found above Create the layout using placeholder Scala elements on the page s that will be replaced by XML elements from the XML file If using multiple page layouts be sure to group the pages Select the Data Source column for the page s Select the source XML File on the Data Source tab of the Data Source Panel Select the XML element s to be read using Data Source Mapper dialog and define the number of records to read at a time Setting the rules for stepping through the XML File Optional Set the variables associated for Counters and Indexes Bind the data fields to existing placeholder eleme
407. simply toggle the button off and any text typed regardless of the length will not wrap at the right text margin of the element The left and right text margins are indicated in the Tab Margin bar by a pair of black triangles one on the left and one on the right These triangles will appear hollow if they are outside of the visible page area The word wrap length can be adjusted either by dragging them in the Tab Margin bar to a new position or by changing the value in the options popup menu e Word Wrap Width Use the numerical controls buttons or select the value and enter a new value The right margin triangle will move to reflect this change e Keep Ideographs Together When On word wrapping will try to keep ideographic phrases together as is the case in Chinese characters Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 108 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Style Buttons Bold B Button Makes the selected text bold e italics Button talicizes the selected text e Underline U Button Underlines the selected text e Underline Fill Chip Adjust the fill type settings of the Underline pions This popup will vary depending on the current styles selected Bold Weight Use the slider or select and change the numeric value e Italic Slant Using the slider or select and change the numeric value negative numbers slant the charac
408. sing the Highlight state is valuable in most interactive productions as a way of letting viewers know where buttons are so they know when they can click or press Enter to choose a buiton During playback a button displays the Select state when e Itis chosen by clicking on the mouse e The viewer presses Enter while the button is highlighted e The viewer touches the button if using a touch screen device Using different imagery for the Select state helps confirm for the viewer that his or her choice has been noticed and accepted Panel Buttons Selecting a Push buttons adds 3 button icons to the Design Buttons Panel Title Bar These are also visible on the Elements Design Panel indicati ng it is a Button and enables the setting of different visual appearances for each state At least one of these button icons is always selected indicating the current state of the selected button If you have defined a Push button with fewer than three states the title bar icon s for the unused state s are disabled More than one state of the selected button s may be current at a given time so that you can apply the same styles and attributes to several states at once Select multiple button states to affect them all with the same attributes by Ctrl clicking as many title bar state indicators as desired To cycle through the states of the currently selected button use the F12 shortcut or click the button icons to switch directly to a particular state
409. sition of the mouse pointer Scrolling Using the Scroll Bars A Design panel can cover the lower portion of a Page View canvas If any portion of the canvas is covered by a Design panel or if the window is not large enough to display the entire page you will see vertical and or horizontal scroll bars in the Page View window that will disappear when not needed Designer can automatically scroll through the page display For example if you drag an element below the top of a Design panel Designer will scroll the page to reveal the entire element Mouse Wheel Middle Mouse Button Support if your mouse has a middle wheel and or button you can use it to scroll or zoom on the page Wheel Scrolls the page vertically as you turn the wheel Shift Wheel Scrolls the page vertically by screenfuls as you turn the wheel Ctrl Wheel Scrolls the page horizontally as you turn the wheel Shift Ctrl Wheel Scrolls the page horizontally by screenfuls as you turn the wheel Alt Wheel Zooms the page in or out as you turn the wheel Middle Mouse Button Scrolls the page as you drag with the middle mouse button wheel button pressed Page View Toolbar Undo and Redo 2v E Undo Redo Designer has a multi leveled Undo and Redo function Undo and Redo are options which are available on the Edit pull down menu and the toolbar panel in both the Main and Page Views You can also use keyboard shortcuts for these functions Ctrl Z for Undo and Ct
410. sort to editing in a external video editing package e Use ALT to drag a handle on the side or corner of the clip until the edge s enclose only the portion of the Movie Clip you want to keep e Use ALT to drag the clip itself to re position the cropped area seen The cropped area can also be adjusted in the Design Movie Clip Panel s Position Tabas well as reverting to the Movie Clip to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A Movie Clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new clip is added slightly below and to the right of the Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 82 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 existing clip e Paste the element using CTRL ALT v will paste the new clip exactly in the same place as the original If a clip was copied from an external package and added by pasting from the clipboard the Clip button will read lt embeddeds indicating there is no underlying file This can bloat your script file and on saving as you will also see a dat file associated to the sc
411. st ScalaScripts are saved in the Unicode UTF 8 format The first character of the script is the Byte Order Mark represented by the three byte UTF 8 sequence EF BB BF which looks like i in most editors If a ScalaScript does not have a Byte Order Mark then it is interpreted as ANSI 8 bit text File Identifier After any Byte Order Mark the next 12 characters of a ScalaScript file must be ScalaScript This identifies the file to the Player as a valid ScalaScript file This keyword must be before any comments commands white space or any other characters It must be on the first line of the file Following ScalaScript is an optional version number For example ScalaScripts saved by Scala 10 5 begin with SCa Lascripe 1050 Blocks A number of events bracketed by the and or EVENT and END directives is known as a block Blocks are used for grouping and execution control and its contents are treated as a single event by the Player Execution of events within a block is controlled by dividing the block into three sections e Group List Early execution parallel playback and scoping e Sequence List Sequential playback e Resources List Sequential events that are normally not executed but may be called when needed By default events go into the sequence list To place something into another section that section must be explicitly named The sections are named as follows Group Group stuff here Sequence Seq
412. stom Text The Custom Text field may be used to control grouping in Playback Audit Reports and to provide additional detail e When on the Custom Text string is written to the playback audit log Entries that would otherwise match will be tallied separately if the Custom Text values differ Include Note The Note Text field provides additional detail in Playback Audit Reports e When on the Note Text string is written to the playback audit log Entries that would otherwise match will be tallied together even if the Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 74 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Note Text values differ Optional Modules Optional Modules may be enabled in the Designer Tool Options dialog Each Module extends your script s capabilities Optional modules include TV Tuner This EX Module gives you the capability of incorporate video inputs within your production using integrated Webcams Video Capture devices and TV Tuner hardware that accepts and displays a video input This module requires configuration prior to use Information on doing this can be found at Designer Tool Options To use the TV Tuner EX see the following topics e Add TV Clip Element e Design TV Clip Panel Serial This allows the bi directional communication between ScalaScript and external RS 232 devices This could be for sending control
413. stration required ScalaScript Documentation Scala s rich media playback is governed by a flexible scripting language called ScalaScript which describes pages elements actions and events in Scala Documentation on individual commands functions and variables is accessible from Designer s Help gt Scala Script pull down menu ScalaScript language topics e The ScalaScript Language e ScalaScript Syntax documentation Other Scripting and Integration Documentation Other Scripting and Automation topics Windows Scripting Introduction Windows Scripting Documentation Text Style Tags Connecting HTML5 Web Clips and ScalaScript Connecting Flash and ScalaScript Data Driven Text Crawls Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 149 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Data Source Fetcher Reporting Custom Warnings and Problems Locally Integrated Content Restart Playback Check For New Plans Accessing Player Variables and Metadata Scala Publish Automation EX Module Scala Server Support Module The ScalaScript Language Foreword This document provides an overview of the ScalaScript language and its capabilities When you create a project in Scala Designer you use Designer s user interface to compose and sequence media If you were to open your project in a text editor you would see a ScalaScript which is the document f
414. string_array hash_value Extended on The arguments passed to arrays usually do not include optional parameters but they are supported by the ScalaScript language specification Parentheses are used to override default operator precedence int_1 1 3 2 bool_1 1 1 and not 3 gt 7 Named Parameters ScalaScript uses the concept of named or optional parameters to create self identifying data in argument lists A named parameter is an argument or set of arguments that are enclosed in parentheses and given a name much like a function name Test Command X Y Color 10 100 17 Here the command Test Command has three parameters It has two required parameters X and Y and a named parameter Color which itself contains three parameters The advantages of using named parameters include e Command arguments can be optional The caller specifies only the arguments they are interested in and lets the command use default values for the rest e The script becomes more readable as values are preceded by a explanatory name e Using named parameters ensures script compatibility between different software versions New optional arguments can be added without changing the existing syntax To see how named parameters work consider a command to play back a sound In its simplest form this command will have a single argument the name of the file to play Sample Play C Sounds Toccata mp3 Additionally one might
415. successfully the settings will be saved as a Target for the next time you need to publish Simply click on the Publish button in the toolbar to publish again or select it from the drop down list next to the icon to use the same settings on a new script Sharing and Archiving a Script Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 33 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 When you import media files into your script Designer references them from their respective locations It does not embed them If you want to share or archive a script you will need to gather all the necessary media files together The Collect Files feature does this for you This function works similar to other production software It will save a copy of your script and create a folder with the same name as the script containing all of the media files This script plus folder is a separate copy from what you are editing and can be archived for later use 1 Select File from the drop down menu and choose Collect Files 2 Set the Collect For button to Authoring This ensures the script will be editable by other users They must have the same fonts used by the script 3 Click on the Folder button to select where the files will be collected try the Desktop 4 Click the Collect button Doing More with Designer Congratulations you have made your first script Bu
416. syntax Copy Boolean Copy String from String to Copies a file Copy Function syntax DirExists Boolean DirExists String dirname Returns a Boolean value indicating whether the specified directory exists If no drive letter is included the Path is assumed to be relative to the folder containing the script using this function if a drive letter is included then that absolute path is searched DirExists Function syntax Eof Boolean Eof Integer filehandle Returns a boolean value indicating whether an open file is positioned at the end of file Eof Function syntax Erase Boolean Erase String filename Erases a file Erase Function syntax FileSize Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 200 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Integer FileSize String filename Returns the size of a file FileSize Function syntax MkDir Boolean MkDir String dirname Creates a directory MkDir Function syntax Open Integer Open String filename enum mode Encoding enum encodingType Opens a file Open Function syntax Position Integer Position Integer filehandle Integer position enum relativeType Sets the read write position of a file Position Function syntax ReadBool Boolean ReadBool Integer filehandle Reads a line from an open file converts
417. t Otherwise it is excluded and off Click on the button to either include or exclude the page Unless you specifically choose to exclude the page it is numbered in the Main View according to its position in the script You can set the status of other pages without closing the panel by clicking in either the No or Name columns of the pages To close the panel click on the Close button or the X box in the upper right corner of the panel to confirm the setting or Cancel to leave it unchanged Clicking outside the panel after making a change will confirm the action If you choose to make changes to other pages it is not necessary to close the panel Name The buttons in the Name column display a unique name for each page If the name is referring to a page then the original name of the page will be displayed Initially the page is given a default name based upon the file name of the background or the first element placed on the page Designer handles each page as a distinct entity separate from the file contained within it The name used to identify a page is not dependent upon a specific file name Page names can be as long as the space in a button permits It may also contain spaces and dots The only restriction is that the name must be unique within the script To change the name of a page click on the page s No number button and in the Page Control panel edit the name as desired The name should be short but descriptive enough so it c
418. t Acta a vee net EE Sao Me E Sega ag Mackie hos ee ace apt aks nk Ainge een denen acta aos E eae 62 Ms ose PAIS ELON 98a cg a Sg Deeg E ac cee A ered eg Seen AS E E a Rag the cls Bare Mckee tae oe ih cc beet char a 62 Be MNG sentence ea sss tg oc han ca arte E cae Wn facade paps Gee ees NS aig eles eae a Aap ener ag eae ae er Perla ape ae ey eh ng 62 KASON ALVA Sh s Seca ease asda E Wee Pate ae digest EN ah a lesen dit dag cee Bo Aca a heed A ag Se ech Sues Mata ard eds ces osc cd tare 63 1229504 TIGON seeti ae RAE a a dac cde Goce ache Seed Bao Ml a a tn Med Sty ged yn uch ae Nace ahah aces 63 236 a Vas Sel VanaDIO sack u hans a A E wi inal ayes dere tok ait thane eae Sak Meare ede bate ao aes 63 kaoa 2 8M 2 21 gt Rann en et ae ee ee er ee er oe eee ee ee ee eee ee en ee ae a eee eee 64 i PEE ot al GOTO e Re ean Oe Oe ee eee PaO no gem One ae Rare ee Re aS ee SEE eee ae ee Meg ae See eer eee eee een 64 Ms FNM he OLIN Ca ec ess ag oct tera Pcl sco pe pe ae ra tet De sce St fc Rec vce Ag as So dG er acd ce fasce eae ane gee cae 65 Taide hae DOUNCE Sida Gl a Rane yates tony aaa wh apn ah eave tone Gaia O santa Stak Meare ete eee Gaara 66 Ike ole Fae COUMISTS Aan Ndee S ante Week te awhy ak aNd eS Rok taka hhek baat kag tee eA Sa bee 67 hr LOMO Le ac cara eee ce Sacto a yar dan cea fa ee gine Ss Pe gD Sf casa flea cate axe a ate a N Ut R A N E 68 RAT has DUNO CONOIS arrn ured tnd ctn dwn fegha dua E E E ein ars Rad eek ba Ae E A E d
419. t basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page a Mi r rI a barg ere x m mamo o Mi DE Fu Ee i F I e Position controls where elements are positioned on the page amm I Po e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings LG i E Toy ey me Let ar oi m he 2 hie 1o Fat Rn a Design Line Panel The Design Line Panel is shown when a Line Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to Change Line size and thickness line color or fill type Add Arrow heads to either end of the Line Set Typographical controls and In and Out transitions for the element Apply Color gradients opacity gradients and corner styles and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element The Design Line Panel is accessed by Adding a new Line element Selecting a Line element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Line Panel consists of following tabs aa F e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page rI wae hers Lave z Fs I m inl al u n a a a ai a g i e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page
420. t can have values from 0 to 255 If the V slider is at 0 before starting the color will remain black To achieve gray tones set S to 0 and adjust V H will not have an effect For bright pure colors set S and V to their maximum setting and adjust H Copy Color Palette from One Page to Another Each page has a separate color palette If you want to use the palette of one page on another or another script you need to export it from the first page then add it on the other page To do this 1 Open the first page select the File pull down menu and choose Export Palette 2 Name the file mypalette pal and click Save 3 Return to the Main View and open the page you want to add the palette to 4 In the Page View click Add and open the mypalette pal file Page View Toolbar Preview ke Preview runs the current page allowing you to see and hear any element on the page including their transitions In a Design panel Preview will not show you how the page transitions in or let you hear a sound which started on an earlier page For a complete overview of the interaction of the page and the rest of the script you must run the script from the Main View Page View Toolbar Main The Main icon closes the Page view and returns to the Main View where the page will also be listed When you save the script the page will also be permanently saved Choosing Undo from the Edit drop down immediately after exiting to the Main View will ret
421. t ge a 222 Teal Resta AV OCH geese A E E E oe aa eae et Dae Seanad ca Sc NE A Sapa cde trated phe E E watery 224 tra GheCkK AON NEW Plans ushers ete ete ae ee hha cid ated aA ae a eta eit at ended wana a Gute eee eel as 224 1 7 13 Accessing Player Variables and Metadata 2 ds cieeesdan dee ete i ehe ee ieee tat aa eee ee deieiedeaeeks 225 1 7 14 Scala Publish Automation EX Mod le 2 02344 cee eei de ieee Pad eked deen He a ae ee eae ey 228 Felo Scala Sever SUPPO WIOGUIC gt serisine nae tata ek ange tied Rae ONCE ee sake Me eee E tee ede 230 Page 3 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Designer 11 00 Welcome to the Designer Documentation homepage for release 11 00 The below sections are grouped to help you find the areas most likely to assist you e Where to Begin points you at the system fundamentals or offers an overview of the system changes since the last major release depending on your history with the product http docs scala com display D1100 Keeping your Scala Maintenance Subscription up to date will give you access to the latest updates and upgrades from Scala These are the dates specific to this release e Scala Maintenance Start Date June 1 2015 e End of Support Date not yet defined e User Manual takes you deeper into the online documentation The links allow you to jump into a specific For more information about maintenance and renewal topic area click here e Related Areas takes you to the other
422. t pages or only the slides corresponding to the script pages which you have selected in the Main View Use the selector to switch between All and Selected If you have more than one script page selected in the Main View before you start ScalaPrint this selector will default to Selected Pages This selector allows you to print pages from the current job either every page or only pages from a selected range in the print job Use the selector to switch between All and Range Choosing Range will enable the Print Range control below This control refers to pages of the print job not script pages For example if your script has twelve pages and your slide layout places six slides on each printed page the print job has three physical pages controlled by this option Choosing Pages All does not print all script pages unless the Slides All option has been selected Print Range When you select Range from the Pages selector the Print Range value control becomes active allowing you to specify the beginning and ending pages of a range you wish to print from the current print job Select the page number range using the value control You can use the arrows or enter the page range numbers manually Possible values for this control are from 1 to 999 The Print Range value control is not limited to the actual number of pages in the current print job It is possible to set page numbers which are higher than the maximum number of pages If the starting page
423. t the script itself are not tracked by the undo system Examples of changes that cannot be undone include Undo Ctrl Z Changes made in the Tools Options dialog Opening or closing a panel or dialog apart from changes made within it Actions that cause some form of output such as printing or publishing Changing the Designer window size or position Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 42 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Undo reverses the last change that you made to the script You can continue choosing Undo to move as far back as necessary through your editing history The Undo entry in in the pull down menu identifies the change to be reversed such as Undo Delete You see the results immediately and a message in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the specific change Use Redo to cancel the effect of the last Undo Redo Ctrl Y Redo reverses the effect of the last Undo operation restoring an editing change you had made You can continue choosing Redo to move as far forward as necessary through the actions that you have taken back using Undo The Redo entry in in the pull down menu identifies the change to be reversed such as Redo Delete You see the results immediately and a message in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the specific change Use Undo to cancel the e
424. t you have just scratched the surface of what can be done For example e Making a Template Script Designer allows you to turn scripts into templates where you can give users in Content Manager the ability to fill in text or replace specific visual elements e Interactivity You can turn any element on a page into an interactive button that can control script flow play a sound or other features e Device and Data Integration Designer has powerful scripting capabilities as well as the ability to run VBScript JavaScript or Python These features enable advanced programming to integrate with data sources devices or external files e Live or Streaming Video Designer can display live video input as well as streaming video Live video requires a video capture card and the TV Tuner EX Module e Scrolling Tickers Designer allows you to add text crawl elements that can pull text from an external file or a template filled in by a user Getting Updates A newer version of Designer may be available To find out visit http www scala com updates There you can enter your Designer serial number and click Submit Useful Tip You can find your Designer serial number by going to Help About Scala Designer in the Designer menu bar Working in the Main View Designer s Main View is used to create and manipulate scripts and gives you access to all other views needed in the creation and execution of your scripts The Main View is broken down int
425. tain pages of your script or print a permanent record of the entire script You may also find a need for a cue card type list of notes for a presenter to follow during the presentation of your script Using ScalaPrint you can choose how much of your script to print whether it be the entire script or only selected pages You can also lay out your pages in different formats Whatever you choose ScalaPrint provides you the ability to customize your script printouts in order to accommodate your needs ScalaPrint produces printed output in a graphical format similar to the way the Thumbnail View in the Main View displays your scripts You can print all script pages on one sheet of paper or each on its own page and every option in between The ScalaPrint view will allow you to arrange the size numbering and arrangement of all the script s pages on the printed page and direct that output to a specific printer device To open ScalaPrint click the Print icon on the Main View toolbar or select the File drop down menu and click Print The ScalaPrint view will appear on the screen divided into two main areas the page preview section and the five ScalaPrint tabbed panels General Layout Labeling Margins Printer Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 45 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The page preview section located across the top o
426. take care of this cleanup Simple Cleanup In some cases the overall behavior and schedule means that the Fetcher can implement cleanup following some simple rules For example if the Fetcher is checking often for an updated news feed and suppresses any feed that is more than one hour out of date the Fetcher may be able to simply clean up any related files that are more than a couple of hours old Locking Aware Cleanup In other cases it may not be possible to have an overarching rule for identifying obsolete files With a bit of care it is possible to clean up related files in a way that avoids deleting any file that Player may still need When Player accesses the Local XML File it locks that file and holds the lock until it is done using that revision of the file In addition Player will lock all related files from all records of the Local XML File This protects these files from deletion If the Fetcher tries to clean them up it will fail to delete them When Player needs to check for a new revision of the Local XML File e g once it has iterated through all the records it will unlock all the related files obtain the new revision and then lock all the related files If the Local XML File is unchanged that does mean it will re lock the same set of related files it just had locked Once the Fetcher has placed all the related media files and presented a new revision of the Local XML File the following may be true e Player has not
427. te sequentially Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 150 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 LeCa laser Picture C Pictures Photol jpg Picture C Pictures Photo2 jpg Picture C Pictures Photo3 jpg What is important to recognize here The first point is the general construction of the script The first line of the script must contain the ScalaScript file identifier This token must be the first thing on the line It identifies the contents of the file to the Player Next notice that the commands in the script are enclosed between EVENT and END brackets and respectively Commands enclosed between and are known as a block and the block containing the entire script is known as the main block of the script All scripts must have a main block and all commands must appear inside of at least one block blocks may be nested ScalaScript does not support blocks outside of the main block however it does support calling external scripts Blocks are used extensively in scripts for grouping and execution control Comments and white space may appear anywhere in the script even outside of the main block but not before the ScalaScript identifier Comments follow the comment style of the C language with both line comments and block comments being supported Le elaocraou this is a block comment it may ap
428. teger Q Ticket Q Ticket variable syntax Q TicketN Integer Q TicketN Q Ticket1 through Q Ticket9 are supported Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners http docs scala com display D1 100 Page 206 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Q TicketN variable syntax Q TicketLabel String Q TicketLabel Q TicketLabel variable syntax Q Unit Integer Q Unit Q Unit variable syntax Q WaitTime Integer Q WaitTime Q WaitTime variable syntax Serial Module Variables ComN nput String ComN Input Up to 16 serial ports are supported i e COM1 Input through COM16 Input COMN Input variable syntax ComN LastChar String ComN LastChar Up to 16 serial ports are supported i e COM1 LastChar through COM16 LastChar COMN LastChar variable syntax Video EXes Module Variables CORIOGEN VideoSource String CORIOGEN VideoSource CORIOGEN VideoSource variable syntax Switcher Success Boolean Switcher Success Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 207 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Switcher Success variable syntax Weather EX Module Variables WEATHER Barometer String WEATHER Barometer WEATHER Barometer variable syntax WEATHER DailyET String WEATHER DailyET WEAT
429. ters to the left e Underline Position Adjusts the number of pixels of the underline in relation to the fonts baseline This is done by either using the slider or selecting and changing the numeric value Negative numbers raise the underline e Underline Thickness Adjusts the thickness of the underline by either using the slider or selecting and changing the numeric value e Underline Air Adjusts the pixel space air surrounding the text characters by either using the slider or selecting and changing the numeric value when an underline goes though the characters e Underline Opacity Enables you to set the overall opacity of the Underline e Underline Opacity Gradient Enables you to apply an opacity gradient to the Bevel the level and direction of the gradient Text Justification Text Based elements have three 3 Justification Buttons and Text Boxes and Table Cells have an additional Option popup for adjusting the Vertical Justification They are disabled for horizontal Text Crawls Left Text Justify button Justify text inside elements bounding box along the left edge Center Text Justify button Justify text inside elements bounding box between the left and right edges Right Text Justify button Justify text inside elements bounding box along the right edge Options Contains the Vertical Justification for Horizontal Text Crawls Text Entry Fields Text Boxes and Table Cells e Top Text is top aligned within its bounding box e Middle Text
430. that is a constant can supply its value even when the script is not being run For example such initializers establish the value of variables for purposes of generating or displaying thumbnails for the purposes of enumerating files during publish etc They have specific value for publishing files for templates and certain other scenarios Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 174 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 Template Variables A ScalaScript template has data fields Within the ScalaScript these are represented by variables that are both External and that have an initializer for example Group External Integer DaytimeTemperature 72 Variable Types Boolean Boolean variables are used to represent logical values They may be assigned the result of a logical expression or may be set to any of the Boolean constants True False On orOff The Boolean command is used to declare one or more Boolean variables true false values or to declare single dimensional arrays of booleans This command must be used in the group list of a block The scope of the variables is over the block in which they were declared Group Boolean var_1 arr 3 Sequence The boolean constants are True and False You may also use On and Off Integer Integer variables are 32 bit signed whole numbers The Integer command is u
431. the direction of the arrow Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the clip s bounding boxes The size can also be adjusted in the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel s Position Tabas well as resetting the Streaming Video Clip to its original size e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allow you to adjust only that side e SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Streaming Video Clip half its current width and height e d make the Streaming Video Clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the Web Clip without having to resort to editing in a external video editing package e Use ALT to drag a handle on the side or corner of the clip until the edge s enclose only the portion of the clip you want to keep e Use ALT to drag the clip its
432. the element is a line of text the name will be the same as the contents of the line i e the actual text A clip is identified by its file name e If the same text or the same type of element is used more than once on a page Designer automatically adjusts the name by adding a numerical suffix such as 1 Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 123 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e You can change the name which identifies an element without affecting the element itself To edit the on screen text in a text element you must work directly in the Page View Do not edit the text by editing the name of the element in the List panel You can change the order in which events take place by dragging the Element button to a different position You can adjust the width of the columns and change their order To work with several elements simultaneously select the elements on the page by using the Shift click and Cirl click commands All the standard functions of the Edit Pull Down Menu and the context menu Cut Copy Delete etc are available There are some additional columns that are specific to the Page View List Panel e Transition In How an element should appear onto the page unset means it will appear immediately e Transition Out Allows you move elements off of the page while it is being displayed e Level Controls the el
433. the missing files will be absent in the thumbnail that is generated GenerateThumbnail synchronously generates a thumbnail of either the specified page or the first page of the provided script file The thumbnailfil ename parameter must contain the full path plus the filename and the extension of the desired image The resulting image can be in jpg bmp gif or png format based on the file extension the caller supplies An example VBScript invocation might look like this Dim obj errormsg Set obj CreateObject Scala Thumbnailer obj GeneracvetThumbnail cr vest sca TMa Toithumbnail jog S12 384 errormsg If errormsg lt gt Then MsgBox errormsg End rf Set obj Nothing GeneratePreviewThumbnails Method Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 235 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 The GeneratePreviewThumbnails can be used to create thumbnail images from a template ScalaScript where the template will use the text and media files that you supply Typical Use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails The typical use of GeneratePreviewThumbnails is Publisher GeneratePreviewThumbnails scriptpath As String xmlitext As String thumbnailfilename As String width As Variant height As Variant options As String out_numthumbs As Variant out_errormsg As Variant scriptpath Full path to the template ScalaS
434. the page you will see a dashed frame with eight graphic handles positioned around the edge which indicate that a Streaming Video Clip has been selected You can continue to work with the Streaming Video Clip or click anywhere on the page outside of the Streaming Video Clip to deselect it Moving the Streaming Video Clip Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 90 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e With the Streaming Video Clip selected simply drag the Streaming Video Clip to a new position e Using SHIFT and dragging will lock the drag either in the horizontal or vertical direction e Using CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by one 1 pixel in the direction of the arrow e Using SHIFT CTRL Arrow Key will move the element s by ten 10 pixels in the direction of the arrow Elements can be dragged off of the page into the off page area If multiple elements are selected they will move as a group and maintain their relative positions Changing Size You can quickly adjust the size by clicking and dragging one of the clip s bounding boxes The size can also be adjusted in the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as resetting the Streaming Video Clip to its original size e Dragging a handle at a corner will allow you to simultaneously adjust the width and height e Dragging a handle on a side will allo
435. the prefix Out This will allow you to distinguish between every type of transition and related event If you change the name of one of the related events Designer will automatically update the other If you do not apply an Out transition to an element it will remain on the page until the next page transitions Adjusting the Sequence of In and Out Transitions When you apply both an In and an Out transitions to an element Designer will schedule the element to transition out immediately after it transitions in In the list of independent elements the Out transition event is placed directly below the event with the related In transition You can change the timing by moving one or both of the elements in the list or by changing the Timing setting for the element with the In transition Since an element cannot transition out of view before it is displayed you cannot move an Out transition event to a position which precedes its related In event Adding Pauses The setting on the Timing button of an element indicates how long Designer waits before it proceeds to the next event in the sequence Initially this setting is one 1 second after which the next event will occur immediately This duration is independent of the transition duration If it is less than the duration of the transition the next event will start before the current transition has been completed If it is longer playback will appear to wait for the difference between the two durati
436. they are not apparent on a static page You can move from one page to another using the Page Switcher arrows in the panel title bar You can also access a different Design panel by using the toolbar icons or a shortcut key Additional Topics e The List Panel is discussed in greater detail in Working with the List Panel Working with the List Panel The List Panel offers several similarities in function as that of the Main View An event here is analogous to a page in the Main View It can be a single line of text a clip or it may be a special event which defines a sound event a pause or a variable An event is anything which can be introduced on a page and controlled from the List Panel Events representing something seen on a page such as text and clips are more frequently referred to as Elements but they may also be known as events e The No Number column indicates the position of an event in the sequence of events as they occur on the page It also indicates whether or not the event is enabled On on the page To change the status of an element click on the No button and use the Element Control panel which is the same as the Page Control Panel on the Main View When an event is disabled the No button will read Off Its row in the List panel will also change color If the event is an element the element will disappear from the screen e Inthe Element column the name of an element is based on the element itself For example if
437. tially determined by the number of slides you choose to place upon each page with the Matrix control Scaling does not increase the number of slides on a page but merely reduces each slide s image size You cannot scale up or enlarge a slide to greater than 100 of its maximum size Row Alignment Just like you justify or align text you can align slides However with ScalaPrint you are actually aligning the slides within the boundaries of their individual matrix areas This option allows you to align the rows of slides vertically on the page by choosing from Center Top and Bottom alignments Aligning slides will create a visual effect only if the slides have room to move vertically within their matrix areas If your slides do not move when you change their alignment use the Scale option to reduce their size Column Alignment This option allows you to align the column s of slides horizontally on the page Choose from among Center Left and Right alignments to align columns along their matrix areas Further adjustments may need to be applied to the page s margins using the Margins option tab Aligning slides will create a visual effect only if the slides have room to move horizontally within their matrix areas If your slides do not move when they have been justified use the Scale option to reduce their size ScalaPrint Labeling This panel offers a variety of options to control the labeling of your slides on the printed pages Title
438. ting a Box element on the page you want to change e Selecting the name of the element in List View e Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Box Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the element and how it is transitioned In and Out of the page Peo wae bra pn _ o C A tt TTT s x ke mon imj a _ ot e Position Controls where elements are positioned on the page a et Ch os m va rana d n k wy e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings LG re A Tw Es a Let r Tiy oi A ink h F liei a Too Fat Rn a Design Oval Panel The Design Oval Panel is shown when a Oval Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to Change Oval size and the area color or fill type Add An outline Apply Color gradients opacity gradients and alpha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element Set In and Out transitions for the element The Design Oval Panel is accessed by Adding a new Oval element Selecting a Oval element on the page you want to change Selecting the name of the element in List View Using the Tools gt Element Panel F3 when in List View and working in another Module column such as Variables The Design Oval Panel consists of following tabs e Appearance adjus
439. tionally depending upon the size of the List panel either the Page View canvas and the Transition panel or the full screen List Panel and the Transition Panel will appear Applying transitions using the List Panel allows an effective overview of the sequence of page elements and events and also reveals transition settings As a result it is often more practical to work with the full screen List Panel and the Transition panel Click Preview to test the on screen effects of your adjustments You can select a transition adjust its duration and preview the results or work in the panel and apply In and Out transitions to multiple elements in the List Panel before closing the Transition Panel Transitions and Passive Elements If you apply an In transition to a passive element Designer will automatically move the element to the bottom of the list in the List Panel If you remove an In transition from an independent element the element will automatically be repositioned and listed last in the series of passive elements Elements that are special events are interpreted by Designer as independent elemenis If there is a long list of elements Designer will scroll to the element in its new position selecting it So you can continue working Passive elements may contain an Out transition When an Out transition is applied Designer will create a new event in the list of independent elements The name will be the same as the original element but will include
440. tions See additional options that apply to both Scala Designer and Scala Player HTREQ PreserveScalaArt Normally if you add media from the Scala clipart library location the ScalaScript uses the normal Windows path to that file But if you set HTREQ PreserveScalaArt l1 then such media will be listed in the script using a path of the form ScalaArt folder file jpg This matches IC3 behavior but only in certain limited Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 21 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 cases is it useful SCRIPTXFER_EnableUTF8ContentFiles When set forces the publish operation write the top level Content XML files in UTF8 SCRIPTXFER_EnableUTF8ContentFiles 1 Getting Started This space will serve as a brief starter guide for using Designer and will provide you the basics to get going Note If you have not already done so please see Installing Designer for steps on how the requirements and steps for setting up Designer on your PC Shortcuts to Sub topics within this Section Starting Designer Creating a Script Publishing a Script Sharing and Archiving a Script Doing More with Designer Getting Updates Starting Designer Note If you have not already done so please see Installing Designer for steps on how the requirements and steps for setting up Designer on your PC
441. tions were applied prior to making the element Global these transitions will be removed when Global is turned on Page Margins The left right top and bottom page margins are predefined to 10 pixels from the edges of the page These settings are used to determine the position of the element when an alignment option is applied and to provide the default position of the left and right margins for new elements e Left Page Margin Pixels from the left edge of the page e Right Page Margin Pixels from the right edge of the page Together they determine the effects of the left center and right alignment buttons in Tab Appearance e Top Page Margin Pixels from the top edge of the page Bottom Page Margin Pixels from the bottom edge of the page Together they determine the effects of the top middle and bottom alignment buttons in Tab Appearance Update By default embedded variables displayed on the page are automatically updated so as the variable s value changes during playback so to does its representation on the screen The simplest example of this is time which displays a clock on the page You are able to control how long the variable will update for while playing the page e Extended default Continues to update until the beginning of the next visual page This includes the transition period between the pages and also any special events that follow the current page e Normal Continues updating until the end of t
442. tive trademark owners Page 28 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Notice that the bottom panel has changed to Design Clip The Design panel adjusts to whatever type of element you have selected Useful Tip To resize proportionally hold down the shift while resizing To crop an image hold down the Alt key and drag the handles on border of the clip Transitions Adding transitions to elements on the page gives them motion and visual excitement with zooms and fly ons that you can sequence any way you want By default elements start with no transition so they appear when the page itself appears and remain static until a new page appears 1 Select the desired element by clicking on it If it is text make sure the entire element is selected not the letters within it 2 Click on the In button on the lower left side of the Design panel 3 You will see the Transition panel eee ee ee 4 When you select a transition you will be able to adjust the duration acceleration direction and other options 5 Asmall preview shows the Transition s effect You can see how it works on your actual content by clicking Preview 6 When finished click Close Or to remove a transition from an element click Delete The Out button brings up the same panel to let you choose a transition to make the element disappear or fly away Returning to Main View You are currently in the Page V
443. to Scala Script for connecting HTML5 WebClips and Flash and Text Style Tag documentation Keyboard shortcuts exist for many actions in Designer and are shown next to the Menu item We have made an effort to list them as often as is possible through the documentation Installing Designer Technical Specification Operating Systems Recommended e Windows 8 1 64 bit e Windows 7 64 bit Supported e Windows 8 1 32 bit e Windows 7 32 bit e Windows XP SP3 32 bit Third Party Components Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 9 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Requirement Purpose Python 2 7 9 Special Scala version Adobe Flash Processes Flash files Q Warning about Adobe Flash Scala Enterprise only supports Flash through version 10 3 x e g 10 3 183 90 due to issues with significant memory leaks seen in newer versions of Flash You might still choose to leverage your older Flash media assets but we advise shifting to a different media format moving forward The Installation Process Important Note about Software Dongles Scala Designer comes with a USB key dongle To ensure the correct driver is installed and used please do not insert the USB key dongle until requested by the Installer program Note Your actual steps may vary based on components that may be already installed on your syst
444. ton s states Tab Select Action There are two tabs in the Buttons menu for controlling the actions that can happen when using the action oriented button types Push and Toggle buttons the Select Action tab and the Other Action tab The Select Action Tab is for specifying the primary purpose for an action oriented button In particular it lets you choose what happens when the button is put into the Select or On state This occurs when the button is clicked on or the viewer presses Enter or a defined hotkey while the button is highlighted Most often the action is a branching type of operation such as moving to another event or page within the script but other action types are possible The Action pop up on the Select Action tab has the following options None Go To Event Going to the Next Page Going to the Previous Page Returning to a Bookmark Exiting from a Script Show WWW Page Using Go To Actions The three Go To actions allow you to make script execution move to another location in the script where that execution continues either on another page or another event on a page This lets the response to a button be almost any series of scriptable events You can return to the original button location after a button Go To by setting a bookmark Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 128 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100
445. trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 119 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 The Backdrop layer will only be seen if the Face layer s settings allow it to do so i e by applying Corners Styles or a Mask to the Face will expose the Backdrop Fill behind it Changing the Face Options Selecting the Face button opens up the Face options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Changing the Backdrop Options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Start Time in HH MM SS hh Enables the Start Time value control allowing you to adjust the start time for the movie The default is 00 00 00 00 the beginning of the movie Select a value and adjust it End Time in HH MM SS hh Enables the End Time value control allowing you to adjust the end time for the movie The default is the movie length indicating that the movie plays to the end Select a value and adjust it Loops Sets the number of times the Movie Background should play The default value is one 1 Type Streaming Video Streaming Video Backgrounds have both a Face lay
446. trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 226 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Set default values for all metadata here Location 2 Color 7 http docs scala com display D1 100 Dim oScalaFileLock Dim myXML Get an instance of the ScalaFileLock to do our resolving and locking Set oScalaFileLock CreateObject ScalaFileLock ScalaFileLock 1 Prepare to survive the case where the file is not found On Error Resume Next Resolve and lock the file name and return the Windows file name to use windows_file oScalaFileLock LockScalaFile ScalaNet metadata xml If windows _file lt gt Then Load the metadata XML Set myXML CreateObject Microsoft XMLDOM myXML asynce False If myXML Load windows_file lt gt 0 Then Find the root metadata node Set metadatanode myXML selectSingleNode sScala metadata IF Not metadatanode Is nothing Then Find the entry for location Set entrynode metadatanode SelectSingleNode entry name Player Location If Not entrynode Is nothing Then Set the value location entrynode Attributes getNamedItem value text End If Find the entry for color Set entrynode metadatanode SelectSingleNode entry name Player Color If Not entrynode Is nothing Then Set the value color entrynode Attributes getNamedItem value text End If End If End If Indicate we are done with this file for now
447. tring Getenv String Var Return the contents of the OS not Player Environment variable Var lf the variable is not defined return an empty string Getenv Function syntax Exists Boolean Exists String FileName Return True if and only if a file named FileName exists Exists Function syntax Version Revision Integer Version String ModuleName Integer Revision String ModuleName Return the version or revision number of a module e g Player book or mpeg ex Version Function syntax Revision Function syntax SysTime Integer SysTime Enum TimeType Returns the system time as a number TimeType can be any of Year Returns the current year e g 2015 Month Returns the current month e g 1 for January Day Returns the current day of the month Hour Returns the current hour 0 23 Minute Returns the current minute 0 59 Second Returns the current second 0 59 Weekday Returns the current weekday e g 1 for Sunday 2 for Monday up to 7 for Saturday SysTime Function syntax Core Variables Date and Time Variables Clock Integer Clock Returns time in milliseconds This variable updates twice per second Clock Variable syntax Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 195 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation Date String Date http docs scala com display D1 100 Returns the current date accor
448. tring is resolved which is usually when it is displayed on the screen Bang expansion will be covered in detail in a later section on strings In ScalaScript each expression has a data type The data type of the expression must match its use When assigning an expression to a variable the result of the expression must match the data type of the variable This also applies to command and function arguments and to array index values If an expression of a different data type is to be used then a conversion function must be called to convert it to the proper type There are no automatic conversions in ScalaScript Expressions consist of constants variables array references and function calls separated by operators Constants and variables should be self explanatory Array references take the form array name Where the array arguments index values are inside of the square brackets Function calls take the form function name Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 167 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Where the function arguments are inside of the parentheses The arguments passed to functions and arrays may be quite complex and may include expressions or optional parameters MY TUNCLIOn 2 Fly TString datar my vOUNer Varieable Operon d TestO y puLonz OND another fn Simple_fn int_var my array x y
449. tyles such as those implemented by the Text command are similar to variable definitions in that they contain the event name within the command However they may only contain a single event name They also contain additional information that defines the behavior of the style TextStyle my_style Font helvetica 20 Face on Pen 7 Here a text style object named my_style is defined with a specific set of attributes font and color Typically the event name will be a fixed parameter if the name is required by the command That is variables and styles must be named If they are not named then they cannot be accessed later The script writer should understand that all of these names occupy the same name space and that care should be exercised to avoid reusing names even in seemingly unrelated areas Scope The scope of a name is the part of the script where the name is visible An event name is visible to all events that are inside of the block in which that name is defined If a reference to a name is made outside of its scope the name will not be found The event s scope includes all events within the immediate parent block of the named event and if any of these events are blocks then all events inside of these blocks It continues recursively to include all events that are contained within any block that is contained within the immediate parent block of the named event This includes the group sequence and resources list of all of t
450. u ila Opacity 100 Out Image a Caps Normal Y Word wrap s fial aaa SE paa T General Element Controls Face Specify a colored or textured effect for the face of the selected element Enable Disable the Face The face is enabled by default and will show a color chip for text or monochrome clip elements and the Options popup button while all other elements will show the Options popup To prevent elements from becoming invisible you cannot disable the Face unless either the Outline or Shadow is enabled Fill Chip To change the face color or texture click on the color chip to open the Fill Options popup Select the desired Fill type Solid Color Color Gradient Image or Tile then adjust colors and various other parameters Options To adjust attributes click on the triangle to open the options popup all of which are element dependent e Opacity Set the overall opacity of the face e Opacity Gradient Apply an opacity gradient to the face the level and the direction of the gradient e Smooth Turn on or off smoothing of text elements or shape elements Note Off can be useful when working with low resolution outdoor LED displays e Corners Corner Styles can be applied to this part of the element e Mask Choose an image file to use as a mask to determine the opacity for this part of the element Outline Specify a colored or textured effect for the outline around the selected element Enable Disable the Outlin
451. ue to behaviors designed into the clip itself Page Advancement for Wait and Loops Regardless of the Wait setting the page itself will advance when the page duration is reached If Wait is off and if the page is set to Wait for Elements then the page will wait for the specified number of Loops to complete If Loops is set to infinite then the page will advance Mode Controls the Window Mode property of the Flash Clip Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 117 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Opaque Mode Hides everything underneath the Clip e Transparent Mode Allows elements underneath to show through any transparent portions of the Clip including any alpha channel transparency Interactive This enables the Flash Clip to receive input controls from an input device such as a touch screen Tab Image Type i This image is for illustrative purposes only as the actual Panel s layout may vary based on the element selected and some of the features described below may not be available Background x wigs alle Image Settings Process Tupe Picture Z Tile the Page File background png Face a Backarop E a Cose Gancet There are six Background Types which can be selected from the pop up Type Plain Type Picture Type Animation Type Movie Type Stream
452. uence stuff here Resources Resources stuff here The sections may appear in any order but are executed in a very well defined order The group list is executed first and all commands in the group list are executed in parallel Once the commands in the group list are all active the events in the sequence list are played back sequentially Events in the resources list are only accessed if specifically referenced by another command Once the sequence list has completed commands in the group list are given a chance to clean up This order of execution is always maintained regardless of how the block is called The block always starts with the group list then executes the sequence list in order This may lead to unexpected results if an attempt is made to jump from outside of a block into the middle of the block s sequence list If an attempt is made to jump into the middle of a block s sequence list the block will still execute from the beginning The actual target command will be ignored The commands in the group list are actually playing the entire time the rest of the block is executing That is while execution is continuing in the sequence or resources list of the block the group list commands are still active They are activated when the block is entered and deactivated just before the block is left This fact means that the group list also gives scope to commands Specifically commands in the group list have scope over the entire bloc
453. ule time period e Valid Weeks Whole weeks by week number e Valid Days Days of the week e Valid Time of Day Single day level Given a time period which you have defined as valid you can specify one of two possible results for a periodic schedule entry either enable or disable the event for that particular period As Designer runs a script and reaches an event which has a periodic schedule setting it will check to see whether the current date and time is within the valid period defined by the schedule If it is then e if the event is Enabled within the Valid Period the event will run it cannot run outside the valid period e if the event is Disabled within the Valid Period the event will be skipped it can run at any time outside the valid period In short the periodic disabled type of schedule will invert the sense of the valid period i e don t play during this periodic schedule It is important to emphasize that periodic scheduling will not cause events to run at a certain time or guarantee which event will run during any given scheduled period It simply allows the event to run if in the normal pace and sequence of the script s execution the event is reached during a period for which it is enabled The following diagram graphically illustrates how three levels of periodic scheduling for simplicity omitting consideration of the Valid Weeks level work together to filter the possible execution times of a script event Th
454. ures which is offered by the selected printer driver Other than to select printer device paper size number of copies and paper orientation you must use the external Windows Printer Properties dialog to change the current printer s features For these printer settings which you can also make directly in ScalaPrint the corresponding settings in the Printer Properties sheet will reflect whatever choices have already been made Similarly changes which are made in Printer Properties are immediately reflected in ScalaPrint when you click OK and return Main View Toolbar Preview and Play Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 48 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Preview a Page s The Preview icon helps you test and preview one or more pages of the script However what you see and hear is not necessarily everything that will appear on the selected pages While using preview events continuing from earlier pages will not be included in the playback Play To see how everything flows and functions together it is necessary to use Play It will always show the entire script regardless of the selected pages Options during Playback You can stop script playback at any time by pressing Esc Advancing You can override any timing settings by pressing the main mouse button to reveal the next page in the sequence or by using the
455. urn you to the Page View This will also undo the last change you made to the page and it does not revert the page to its previous state prior to any editing in Page View To globally revert to an earlier version of your script you must close it without saving changes and then reopen it Page View Menus Ale Edit Add View Tools Help The drop down menus in Page View cover the following activities File File based activities that assist in the creative process Edit Various editing functions that will allow you to manage the contents of the page Add Ability to add elements to the page View Viewing options that assist in the creative process Tools Various tool options that assist in the creative process Help Access to the Help system and various online documentation Using the File Menu in Page View file Edit Add Wew Tools Help Sine J Q A A G Save As Paste 100 F Undo Zada Eemer Background Export Main The File menu has a number of functions available to assist the designer during the creative process that enable quick access to Function Shortcut Explanation Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 133 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Save CTRL S Save the current script if it has previously been saved using its current name and location without opening the File dialog If the script has
456. usting each page simply click on the page to select it choose a transition and or set a duration or speed Buttons in the Transition column are blank and disabled for pages in the Main View which represent a group a special event or a sub script as transitions cannot be applied to those items Designer allows you to adjust the speed of the transitions You can start or end the transition either slower or faster The transition tool will allow you to select the direction variable speed transition speed and direction in many cases of the transition Set the length of the transition in the Duration button To remove a transition from an element click Delete Timing The Timing button indicates how pages automatically advance Pages can have one of the following durations Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 62 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 e Duration Fixed time duration It is defined in hours minutes seconds and hundredths of a second Depending on the current width of the column the value can be displayed as either seconds only up to 999 or in hh mm ss hh format e Wait for Elements Wait for the elements in the page however long this may take e Wait Forever Page wait indefinitely and can only be interrupted by mouse click or by scheduling or programming Designer uses the default setting Wait For Elements for
457. utton and are typically used for branching to another page of the script or accepting some kind of response from the viewer A Push button can have one two or three visual states 1 State Normal A Push button with one state has a single appearance It can respond to being selected but cannot give any visible response to the mouse Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 126 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 passing over it or clicking on it the way a button with multiple states can 2 State Normal or Select A two state Push button can have a different appearance for its Normal idle state and its Select state when it is clicked by the mouse During playback a button displays the Select state when e It is chosen by clicking on the mouse e The viewer presses Enter e The viewer touches the button if using a touch screen device Using different imagery for the Select state helps confirm for the viewer that his or her choice has been noticed and accepted 3 State Normal Highlight or Select A Push button with three states can have separate appearances for Normal Highlight mouse pointer touching it but not clicked or highlighted by using arrow keys and Select clicked on states If you do not make changes to the button for its Highlight state the button keeps its normal imagery when the mouse pointer is over it U
458. values for the size by clicking on the numbers at the top of the window This is particularly useful when designing Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 23 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 content that will appear in a frame zone in Content Manager Click OK when done Adding A Page A page consists of a background and any foreground elements Under the Add pull down menu you will see options for creating different types of page backgrounds e Page from Media File Image or video as the background e Plain Solid color gradient or transparent background Special Event Non displayed page to the script for audio or other non visual actions e Streaming Video Page Background is a Streaming Media source There is also an Add button in the toolbar which does the same action as Add Page from Media File To add a new page 1 Click on the Add button or select Add Page From Media File from the Add pull down menu iey pE E E aul a Re PEL REP VEE BS EI ii r p z See a m ats 2 This will bring up the Add Page From Media File dialog box The background image you choose will be the base upon which you place text animation photos and other items 3 Select a background by navigating to the desired folder and double clicking the file A background format can include any of these file types JP
459. vance the script The Page Down key moves to the next page and the Page Up default key moves to the previous page Slideshow Controls ONLY work when playing back your script in Designer They do not work if you publish your script to the Network and schedule that script to play on a player Sound Clicking a button in the Sound column opens the Sound panel When a sound is added to a page the corresponding button in the Sound column is labeled with text such as Play or Stop to the sound event which may be music sound effect or voice If there is no sound event on the page the button will be blank As with the Page Transition and Timing panels you can change the sound setting for other pages in the script without closing the Sound panel by clicking on the following page When the thumbnail or row in the Main View represents a group of pages or a script the Sound button is blank even when sound is an element of one or more individual page s You may click on the button to define sound elements that affect the entire group or script For example if you want music to begin with the first page in the series and end with the last page before the next page in the script in the Main view is presented this option would be very useful For more information about the Sound panel and its controls please click here page is under construction Launch Prior to using Launch which allows you to run external programs documents or URLs from within
460. vertical offset for successive columns e Offset lets you specify the number of pixels that each successive row or column of tiles is offset from the preceding row or column Changing the Backdrop options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level of the background e Opacity gradient Type Picture Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 118 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Picture Backgrounds have both a Face layer upper and Backdrop layer lower e File Shows the current media asset being used and can be changed by clicking the name to bring up the file dialog e Face Can have options applied to the face by selecting the Face button e Backdrop Can have a Backdrop Fill Type options applied to the backdrop such as Opacity Changing the Face options Selecting the Face button opens up the Face options panel where you can apply the following e Corner Styles e Select an Alpha Mask Image file that will be use as a stencil e Set the overall Opacity level e Opacity gradient Changing the Backdrop options Selecting the up arrow next to the Color Chip opens up the Backdrop options panel where you can apply the following Corner Styles
461. w page of any type script animation etc use the Add icon in the Main View toolbar If the Main View is empty as it is when you create a new script you will be adding the first page Otherwise the page you add will be inserted in the script after the currently selected page Using the Add button in the toolbar you can add a new page from a media file or script This is the same as using the Add pull down menu and selecting Add Page From Media File Using the Add pull down menu you can perform the following Add Page From Media File Add a new page by opening the File dialog where you can choose backgrounds or sub scripts Add Page From Recent Media File Choose from previously used media Add Page From Recent Media Folder Choose media from a previously used media folder Add Plain Page Add a page with a solid color background Add Special Event Add an event other than a background such as a sound event or pause or some other non visual event Add Streaming Video Page Add a page whose source is a video stream Additionally you have the option of Adding a Page using Drag and Drop You can drag media files into into the Main View from your Desktop and pages will automatically be created for you with the media getting embedded into the the script Be careful when using this option as the action of dragging or copying media from your clipboard into your script causes unnecessary bloating of the Scala Script file As a result this action
462. w you to adjust only that side SHIFT dragging a corner handle maintains the original aspect ratio of the clip You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the secondary Right mouse button while holding down the main Left mouse button A couple of notable single key keyboard shortcuts associated with sizing are e h make the Streaming Video Clip half its current width and height e d make the Streaming Video Clip double its current width and height Cropping Designer allows you to crop away parts of the Streaming Video Clip without having to resort to editing in a external video editing package e Use ALT to Drag a handle on the side or corner of the clip until the edge s enclose only the portion of the Streaming Video Clip you want to keep e Use ALT to Drag the clip itself to re position the cropped area seen The cropped area can also be adjusted in the Design Streaming Video Clip Panel s Position Tab as well as reverting the Streaming Video Clip to its un cropped state Cut Copy amp Paste A Streaming Video Clip can easily be copied from one part of the page to another or even to another page in another opened script Any styles applied will be remembered e Cut the element using CRTL x or by selecting Cut from the Edit menu e Copy the element using CTRL c or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu e Paste the element using CTRL v or by selecting Paste from the Edit menu The new Streaming Video Clip is adde
463. will be moved accordingly and their corresponding page numbers will be adjusted e List View You may move a page by dragging the Name button up or down the list Designer also allows several pages to be moved simultaneously Multi select the pages you wish to move and then drag them to their new position in the script Whether or not your selected pages are in a consecutive series they will be handled collectively and inserted together in their new position Copying Pages You can create a new page in Designer by copying an existing page and pasting it elsewhere in the current script or in another script of your choice You may also copy one page or a series of selected pages regardless if they are consecutive To make a copy of a Page 1 Select the page s you want to copy 2 In the Main View click on Edit and choose Copy Ctrl C A copy of each selected page will be placed on the clipboard 3 If necessary use the tabs to navigate to the script where you want to place the duplicate s or if the script is not available click on Open and select it from the File dialog 4 Inthe script select the page where you want to place the duplicate s Click on Edit and choose Paste Ctrl V Each copied page will be listed in the panel in the order in which it was originally selected Designer applies the same name as the original to the copy Additionally a number which uniquely identifies the duplicate will be added For example i
464. x Sequence x xt 1 Comments are treated as white space Primitives Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 160 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Control Primitives These primitives are used to structure the script and control certain behaviors of events Disabled Mark the following event as disabled End Block terminator equivalent to Event Block introducer equivalent to NoAuthor Mark the following event as non authorable Optional Suppresses error messages if the EX module that processes the following optional command is unavailable External Denotes that a variable is an external variable These tokens are also control primitives however note that they contain a trailing colon This colon does not indicate the start of a label Group Place events that follow into the group list of the current block Sequence Place events that follow into the sequence list of the current block Resources Place events that follow into the resources list of the current block Parentheses Separators and Terminators These characters are used to break statements into their component parts parentheses Enclose argument lists for commands and functions They are also used in expression grouping square brackets Enclose indices of array variables comma Separate arguments in command function and array a
465. xpr evaluates to True then Conditional evaluates and returns the expression OnTrue If Expr eval uates to False then the expression OnFalse is evaluated and returned This is very useful for constructs like page page Conditional line gt 20 1 0 str word Conditional number gt 1 s Without thhis function many simple operations requires setting up complex conditional pages It is unusual in that any type of variable or expression may be used and the return type matches the type of the expressions used However the function return OnTrue and OnFalse must all be of the same type Conditional Function syntax Casting Functions Value Integer Value String S Interprets the text in string S as a number and converts it to an integer Returns 0 if S does not start with a number leading white space is ignored Recognizes decimal numbers default hexadecimal prefixed with a and binary prefixed with a Value Function syntax String Functions Left Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 188 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1100 String Left String S Integer N Return the N first characters of S If Length S lt N return S Left Function syntax Right String Right String S Integer N Return the N last characters of S If Length S lt N return S Right
466. xt Cell is selected within a Table Element It allows you to Change Normal and minimum font sizes and the face color or fill type Set Typographical controls Add Inline images Apply Color gradients opacity gradients corner styles and alpha masks backdrops and internal padding for a Text Cell The Design Text Cell Panel is accessed by selecting a cell within a Table Element and it consists of following tabs e Appearance Adjust basic style options that can be applied to the Text Cell l loar a m on Seg meme tye Jeg ee le a ey E e Position Controls the Text Cell s width and height ae Fa 1T nen m ane a m l e Misc Set page margins Variable update rules and other miscellaneous settings ba i rat E CE r1 i Lr bom Let er Ty d BI ee ee ti a 3o CTF Design Text Entry Field Panel The Design Text Entry Field Panel is shown when a Text Entry Field Element is added or selected in Page View It allows you to e Change Font size and face color or fill type e Set Typographical controls the variable associated with this text entry field and the In and Out transitions for the element e Apply Color gradients opacity gradients and corner styles and aloha masks You can also apply and change the backdrop of the element The Design Text Entry Field Panel is accessed by Adding a new Text Entry Field Selecting a Text Entry Field element on the page you want to change Selectin
467. y have licensing restrictions which vary from manufacturer to manufacturer It is your responsibility to comply with their requirements Publishing Through a Proxy Server If your network has a proxy server you will need to configure Designer so it can publish through it To change the proxy settings 1 From the main view go to Tools Options 2 Click on the Network tab 3 Enable the Connect Via Proxy Server option 4 Click on the Proxy Server URL button and enter the appropriate address port and authentication Publishing a ScalaScript Package Normally you would publish Scripts directly to Content Manager In cases where this is not possible you can publish to a SCZ file and manually upload it to the Media library When publishing to a local or shared folder select Publish to ScalaScript Package which will create a single file containing the ScalaScript and its related media This single file has a SCZ file extension and may then be shared with others or uploaded to Content Manager via drag and drop After uploading the SCZ file it will become a new revision i e replace an SCB file of the same base name Main View Toolbar Print Print Designer gives you the ability to print your scripts Using ScalaPrint you can produce color or black and white hard copies on paper or transparencies to enhance or accompany your Designer production or simply to aid in your design process You may want to Summarize your script print cer
468. y Out Time Set the out time of a timeslot interruption using the value controls for hours minutes and or seconds Recurrence This can be set to on of 4 four options for the scheduled event Once Set to a specific date Weekly Default option Set for days of the week week numbers and a date range for recurrence Monthly Set for day of the month s and a date range for recurrence Yearly Set for a specific month day of the month and a date range for recurrence Textfile The Textfile EX Module allows you to link a ASCII text file containing data to a page or group of pages The data from the Text file is displayed on the page s using the series of reserved Scala System variables line though to line99 As the script runs a specified number of lines are read from the text file the ineXX variables are updated and the page s is displayed This is repeated until the end of the text file is reached Basic Steps To use the Textfile EX Module Create a text file making sure that if you have repeated data it is in the same sequence and position in the sequence Create a script with one or more page s using the Scala reserved variables line1 line2 line99 to display the contents of the text file Assign the text file to the template pages in the Textfile EX menu Set the number of lines to read from the text file max 99 Run the script oakRWN Textfile EX will not display the page or pages if it cannot fin
469. y call for a particular granularity value There are two main reasons for specifying a particular granularity value 1 Prevent discontinuities between the center middle slices and the Bottom and Right slices If the granularity is smaller than the size of the center middle slice segments of the Center and Middle slices in granularity sized increments are used to complete any odd sized area on the right and bottom of the fill area These segments might not match with portions of the central pattern that could be present in the Bottom Right slices 2 Ensure the pattern contained in the center middle region will always reproduced in its entirety not cut off from the bottom or right sides When the granularity is made equal to the size of the tile defined by the Center and Middle slices only whole center middle tiles will be displayed and the pattern will not be cut off The granularity of a multi tile is not necessarily the same as the size of the center middle region Aside from the fact that granularity cannot be larger than the size of the center middle region the settings of Granularity Center and Middle are independent This will allow you to optimize both the precision with which you can resize the multi tile and the quality of the resulting image The center middle region is used as the basic tile unit to fill the multi tile Designer will always reproduce the full tile or as much of it as possible within the space available When the f
470. you to move and size the columns you use the most into an order that works for you This setting is remembered between Designer sessions The integrated Modules are always available Optional Modules may be enabled in the Options dialog Each Module extends the capabilities of your script and some may be purchased separately Follow the link for a more detailed discussion of each of the Optional Modules e No Number e Name Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 61 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Background Transition Timing Variables Data Source Input Sound Launch Log Schedule TextFile WinScript Playback Audit Optional Modules Customizing Columns No Number A number on a button in the No number column indicates the position of the page in the sequence of the script and also that the page is on an d enabled as part of the script When Off is visible on the button it means that the page is not shown when the script is run This is used when you need to prevent the execution of a page but do not want to lose or change the contents of the page so it is easily available in the future To change the setting so that a page is included or excluded accordingly click on the page s No button opening the Page Control panel The Enabled button is marked with a checkmark when the page is included in the scrip
471. your script the security settings for Launch should be set More details on how to do this are available in the Launch Module section of this documentation Once selected the Launch Program or Document panel appears with the following options Command Line Type the location and file name of the program document or URL you want to launch as well as any command line arguments File Opens the file dialog enabling you to locate the program or document you need and add additional arguments in the command line Wait When On this suspends the execution of the script until you exit the launched application or document Minimized Runs the launched application in a minimized window without showing the Windows desktop Log Opens the Log panel where you can add edit or delete text and or variables to be included in the playback log as this script event is executed When the page is played the text is evaluated if it contains variables and written into the log The Log panel has Log Text Copyright 2015 Scala All logos and trademarks are the property of the respective trademark owners Page 69 Scala Designer 11 00 Documentation http docs scala com display D1 100 Enter the text written into the log when this page is executed The text may contain variables which must be preceded by the evaluation character to be evaluated prior to writing the string Schedule Most of your scheduling tasks and calendar ev

Designer 11.00

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents